Home

HP LaserJet P3005d

1. Font name Font style File name CG Omega Regular CGOR45W TTF CG Omega Bold CGOR65W TTF CG Omega Bold Italic CGOR66W TTF CG Omega Italic CGOR46W TTF CG Times Regular CGTR45W TTF CG Times Bold CGTR65W TTF CG Times Bold Italic CGTR66W TTF CG Times Italic CGTR46W TTF Clarendon Condensed Bold CLAR67W TTF Coronet Regular CORONET TTF CourierPS Regular CPSR45W TTF CourierPS Bold CPSR65W TTF CourierPS Bold Oblique CPSR66W TTF CourierPS Oblique CPSR46W TTF Garamond Antiqua GARR45W TTF Garamond Halbfett GARR65W TTF Garamond Kursiv GARR46W TTF Garamond Kursiv Halbfett GARR66W TTF Helvetica Regular HELR45W TTF Helvetica Bold HELR65W TTF Helvetica Bold Oblique HELR66W TTF Helvetica Narrow Regular HELR47W TTF Helvetica Narrow Bold HELR67W TTF Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique HELR68W TTF Helvetica Narrow Oblique HELR48W TTF Helvetica Oblique HELR46W TTF ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book AVGR45W TTF ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique AVGR46W TTF ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Regular AVGR65W TTF ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique AVGR66W TTF ITC Bookman Light Regular BOKR35W TTF ITC Bookman Light Italic BOKR36W TTF ITC Bookman Demi Regular BOKR75W TTF ITC Bookman Demi Italic BOKR76W TTF Font support 51 E 0 y z e Lo 9 Table 3 1 Default fonts continued Font name Font style File name ITC Zapf Chancery Medi
2. 19 MS Windows printing system software oooonnnccccnnnnnncoccccccnnncnn non cnnnnn nn n een nennen nnne nnne renes 20 Printing system and installer sssseee eem eene nnns 20 HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD for MS Windows SMS ERE 20 Installer features iei ror tie eee neni Gadde eR ERE ree FX E IRR TEM EIE 22 HP LaserJet print drivers sssssssssssseseeee eem eI enne nnne nen nenne nennen nnn 23 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation drivers occconocncncncocnnnncnonrnnoncnanonnnnnonoss 24 Select the best print driver oooooooccconccninccccccccconcoonnonnn no nono nonnnnnnnnnnnnncnnncnnncnnnnninns 24 Complete LaserJet printing system sssseee 25 HP PCL 6 UnldriVer reta dinar ri 25 HP POL 5 U nidrIVer o io etre ces nee aaia 25 PS Emulation Unidriver sss enn 25 HP universal print driver UPD seeem 25 Print driver version numbers for MS Windows operating systems 26 MS Windows driver configuration ooooocnnnncccccnonononccccnnonononcnnnn conc nn nenne eee en nennen nennen nnns 28 ENWW iii Driver autoconfiguration 2 2 aret ie lidia 28 Bidirectional communication oooocccccccccccccnnnnnononononnnonnnnncnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nn trn nns nn nnne 28 Enterprise AutoConfiguration eiiis issesesessseseees essen nth ta kann then kd dantes ad
3. nerE S 367 ENWW xiii xiv ENWW List of tables Table 1 1 Software technical reference overview cccecceecsecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteecsaecaaeasaeaaaaaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeess 1 Table 1 2 HP LaserJet P3005 printer features ssssssssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeen enne nennen nnne 3 Table 1 3 Printing system software support sssssssssssesssseeeeeeeene em emere nennen nennen enrrn nennen 7 Table 1 4 Software component availability for HP LaserJet P3005 printer seeee 8 Table 1 5 EDT AMEOTICAS pcc 11 Table 1 6 CD 2 Asia Pacific esses e ren enne nenne enn n ECEE rn nr nn rrrnr ran 12 Table 1 7 CD 3 Europe Middle East Africa ssssssssssssssseee eene 13 Table 1 8 Document availability 2 000000 ener nr nn ee nn eene nennen enne enne 15 Table 2 1 Print drivers included with the HP LaserJet P3005 printer sssssssssssss 24 Table 2 2 Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication in Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 20083 ooccccconncnconcccconocononononoconnnnonoconononononncnnonononornnennnnnonors 28 Table 2 3 EAC availability in MS Windows and Microsoft Share sssssssssssssss e 29 Table 2 4 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments sss 30 Table 2 5 Operating systems that
4. Mopier mode Application collation Driver collation Expected result Disabled Not selected Not selected 3 copies uncollated Disabled Not selected Selected 3 copies uncollated Disabled Selected Not selected 3 copies collated Disabled Selected Selected 3 copies collated Enabled Not selected Not selected 3 copies uncollated Enabled Not selected Selected 3 copies uncollated Enabled Selected Not selected 3 copies collated Enabled Selected Selected 3 copies collated Postscript Passthrough PS Emulation Unidriver only Postscript Passthrough is enabled by default and must be enabled for most print jobs Postscript passthrough provides additional capabilities for some software programs when printing to a postscript driver Options such as Watermarks n up and Booklet Printing might not print correctly from some software programs with Postscript Passthrough enabled because such programs send postscript information that the device cannot control Other programs might print using these options without problems Select Disabled and print the document again if you encounter problems E NOTE n some cases disabling Postscript Passthrough can cause unexpected results within a software program 266 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW JPEG Passthrough PS Emulation Unidriver only The JPEG Passthrough setting contains the following options e Disable When this option is selected images sent as JPE
5. sss m 296 Select Printer screen printer not Selected ooooooccccccncconocooononconccnnnononnncnncnnnnnnnnnnn nro nn e 299 Connection Type Screen cu ci oe e dd dee deba de a eed gue eue 300 Select Printer screen printer selected sss 300 Printer Status screen it A eere Gh Ge ede need pe edie RR Te Ta 301 Current Supplies Levels screen cccccceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaenaeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesageeeeececincueeeeeseeeeeess 301 Supplies Information screen sssssssssssssssessseeeeeenn eene emen nennen nnn en nemen enne nnnnns 302 Transfer printer information to HP SureSUpply screen ssssssssssssseseeeees 302 Paper Status Screen pei ete P aliados init nda ici 304 Device Information Screen teet e aei ee Rede dilecte Ede eiie sedata baii 305 File Upload Screen didas 306 Update Firmware SCENE ido qe estara IRL ERREUR 307 Upload Eonts sereen 5 oni Rete di 307 Upload Fonts dialog di eie bie eri ete epi dece a ec eei ice ende ent 308 Add SystemvEonts SCFOeOGT 22 t nee dd de Food etate eaae 308 HP Online Support screen i oiii tieni aset tcI dea 309 HP Instant Support link ettet eee e eR EUR ett LR DR ROOF eed 309 HP Registration Web page i a ad ee dte a edd e dede 310 D plex MOGGe SCEBeenD tec eet e tiesa 311 Economode amp Toner Density screen erret ad at 311 Default Resolution Screen niue eiae eene 312 Trays Configuration SCCeel
6. Document Options C Correct Order for Rear Bin Print On Both Sides n Pages per Sheet 1 page per sheet Orientation Portrait Landscape C Rotate by 180 degrees ie Figure 5 14 Finishing tab The Finishing tab contains the following controls e Print Task Quick Sets e Document options e Document preview image e Orientation Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs Print task quick sets are either preset or user defined printing specifications such as media size and pages per sheet 238 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Document options The Document Options group box contains the following controls Correct Order for Rear Bin Print on Both Sides Flip Pages Up Booklet layout Pages per Sheet Print Page Borders Page Order Correct Order for Rear Bin The HP LaserJet P3005 printer has a door in the back that can be opened to make the paper go straight out the back of the printer Use this bin or slot to minimize curl and avoid jams with heavier paper such as cardstock You may also need to feed the paper from the multipurpose tray for best results The paper is delivered printed side up Use this feature to order your pages correctly for this bin or slot If you clic
7. 285 Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10 3 ssssssssssmRmeee 290 Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10 2 8 leeena 293 Troubleshooting the printer setup eeeeeeessssssesssssssss 297 Uninstall the Macintosh printing system ssssssn mme 297 Macintosh HP Printer Utility nt nr eene nnne nennen nnns 298 Access to the HP Printer Utility 2 iia nde 298 S pplies Stats e 301 ENWW xi Device Information iii a tie e ete e eds 305 E itte ite riot ial Enn T abd tH nisi 305 Update Firmware o eene eter etos ine tee ste eed de use dee DERE Eee eee 306 Upload EOonts rto rtc rto oerte rule tuta neh d teda eb ede tun 307 AP SUPPOR IEEE 308 Duplex Mode ee oie Ga te dte t ette tet cee 310 zero te pe E EE 311 A me ETE 312 Trays Configuration messire ciiin t o fto oed tbi uei v aden tu eee ED uat pede 313 Lock Resources 5i bm Ie e ed as aac 314 O A EE 314 Releasing a job storage print job oooccocninnnnocicccnnnaconnnnccnanannnnnrcnnnnn oran r rra 315 Deleting a job storage print job sssssse mem 316 E mail Ales ione edet cala 316 Network Settings d itt E E THE t OPE Leder dE rode 317 Bonjour Settings vociare ree A pe p dale eed ime aue etd ke tad cae 318 Additional Settings tati inh eedem ton teet eda dd ee dade ie eed 319 HP Embedded Web Server EWS ssssssssssssssssesseee nnne en nee nennen nnns 320 Access to
8. Capabilities Printer Serial Number 3000000000X Firmware Datecode 2UU6U U3 U2 U28 U Duplex OFF RAM DISK Sturage 193 MB Capacity DIMM Slot 1 256 MB DDR Embedded Jetdirect YES Figure 6 53 HP EWS Device Status page Configuration page The Configuration Page displays the values of all of the settings available to be set in the device The contents of this screen are consistent with the configuration page generated by the firmware ENWW HP Embedded Web Server EWS 323 ProductName HP LaserJet P3005 Printer Name HP LaserJet P3005 DC Contulter 9 Model Number COOK Printer Serial Number ODO J Formater Number MI110101111 Firmware Daterade 20060703 n noa n Service ID 00000 PS Wait Time out 300 seconds Other Links Engine Cycles 0 ho instant support Order Supplies nstalled Personalities and Options Product Support ShowMe How PCL 20010402 PULL 0010402 POSTSCRIPT P0010402 PDF 20050131 DIMM Slot 1 256 MB DDR EIO 1 Empty Embedded Jeldirect HP JelDirect J7979 10 10 48 119 RAM DISK Storage 198 MB Capacity Installed DIMM Memory 256 MA On Board Memory System 64MB Total RAM 320 MB DWS 131 00 Automatic Resource Saving Enabled Control Panel Lock NONE Control Panel Password DISABLED Device Type RAM DISK Write Protect DISABLED File System Access PJL ENABLED PML ENABLED NFS ENABLED PostScript ENABLED Direct Ports USANEFF 1284 FNARI FD Paper Trays an
9. Figure 6 67 HP EWS Device Information screen If you make any changes on the Device Information screen click Apply to save the changes The information that is typed here appears on the Device Information screen that can be opened from the Information tab It also appears in e mail messages that are sent from the product This might be useful if you need to locate the product to replace supplies or fix a problem Language Use the Language screen to select the language in which the HP EWS screens appear The Language screen is shown in the following figure ENWW HP Embedded Web Server EWS 335 HP LaserJet P3005 Printers Language View Pages in Browser Language View Pages in Printer Language O Select A Language II Figure 6 68 HP EWS Language screen CAUTION Selecting View Pages in Device Language or Select A Language changes the language for everyone who uses the HP EWS The default language is the language that the Web browser is currently using If your browser and control panel both use a language that is not available for the HP EWS English is selected as the default If you make any changes on the Language screen click Apply to save your changes Date amp Time Use the Date amp Time screen to update the product time The Date amp Time screen is shown in the following figure HP LaserJet P3005 Printers Date amp Time Current Date Current Time 2006 MAR w 418 11 43 PM v
10. sse neret rne 331 HP EWS Alerts SGreen x eire eee Fere The rra CERE NER Ee RR DERART 332 HP EWS AutoSend screen ococcoccocoococonccoccnnccnnnnnnnnn ceeanee cee eeeeeeee esa nnnnnnnnnnn nn nrnr nn n nen nn Eanna nemne EEE 333 HP EWS S6ecurlty SCreell ento ipeo M peto riter iio 334 HP EWS Edit Other Links screen ooccococococccconcconoccconocononnnnnonnonconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 334 HP EWS Device Information screen sse enmt 335 HP EWS Language Screen ii er Rr Re e er pte e a ate 336 HP EWS Date amp Time screen aa a a ae se nsn einn nenne 336 HP EWS Date Time Format screen ssssssssssssssssseeeseeeeeee nemen e nennen nene nenne 337 ENWW Figure 6 71 HP EWS Date amp Time clock drift correction screen oconnnninnnnicnnonicnnnccncncnrnnn anno cano nn nnnncninn 337 Figure 6 72 HP EWS Wake Time screen oncocccinnnccccicncoconcncnnononnonnnnn anno cnn nr nan nn enne rennen nennen nennen nnns 338 Figure 6 73 HP EWS Networking tab Network Settings screen sssssssee eee 339 Figure 7 1 File to E mail sample e mail message with files attached ooonnocccnnnnccnnnnnnncnnnnncccnnnnnaccninannno 343 ENWW xxi xxii ENWW 1 Purpose and scope Introduction ENWW This software technical reference STR provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software
11. E NOTE Ifthe file name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example type C N copy b c MMy Documents VP3005FW PDF Press Enter on the keyboard The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel and the job prints At the command prompt type exit to close the command window Printing print ready documents 363 e y m 0 m 97 c Tes 0 o 97 c Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 The print ready file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in an MS DOS window 1 Ata command prompt type copy b FILENAME lt PORTNAME gt where FILENAME is the name of the print ready file including the path and lt PORTNAME gt is the name of the appropriate printer port such as LPT1 For example type the following C gt copy b c P3005FW PDF lptl 2 Press Enter on the keyboard EZ NOTE Ifthe file name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example type C N copy b c My Documents NP3005FW PDF The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel and the job prints 3 Atthe command prompt type exit to close the command window Print ready file printing in an MS Windows network If the product is shared on an MS Windows network complete the following steps 1 From a command prompt or in an MS DOS window t
12. HP LaserJet HP LaserJet P3005 Series PCLE Driver Version 4 26 3005 210 DEK 2 0 Copyright 1996 2005 Hewlett Packard Co All Rights Reserved Driver Extensions Configuration Status Not Auto Configured No Administrator Preferences Last Configured 08 04 2006 User Configured Figure 4 21 About This Driver dialog box The About This Driver dialog box provides the following information e Printer name e Driver name e Print driver version number e Copyright information e Driver Extensions if any e Configuration Status The printer name the driver name the print driver version number and the copyright information appear at the top of the About This Driver dialog box 7 La co O ot EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo The Driver Extensions group box lists the driver extensions if any The Configuration Status group box indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured whether administrator preferences were set the date the driver was last configured and whether the configuration is default or user defined ENWW Basics tab features 163 Configure tab features To gain access to the Configure tab in Windows 98 SE or Windows Me follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Properties 6 Clickthe Configure tab Use the Configure tab to tell the driver about the device hardware configuration If bidir
13. If your HP LaserJet P3005 printer does not have a minimum of 80 MB of memory or a hard disk installed job storage options are not available When the job storage feature is enabled the device can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the device control panel Fonts The Fonts group box contains a Font Card s check box and a corresponding Configure button Selecting the Font Card s check box tells the driver that a Font card is installed and that stored data about the fonts on the card is available When the check box is selected the Configure button is ENWW Configure tab features 169 enabled Click Configure to open the Configure Font Cards dialog box Ifthe Font Card s check box was not selected when you opened the More Configuration Options dialog box selecting that check box automatically opens the Configure Font Cards dialog box Configure Font Cards IES Click Add to add a new font card and register the fonts with the driver You can also enable or disable specific fonts on a card Installed Font Cards Fonts NENNEN Enable Font if Cancel Help Figure 4 24 Configure Font Cards dialog box Use the Configure Font Cards dialog box to perform the following tasks e Add up to four font cards by clicking the Add button e Specify a unique font card name e Select specific font card data files that contain lists of fonts on specified cards e Selec
14. sssssssssssssssee Hmmm nennen 192 TIY E na 193 Duplex Unit for 2 sided Printing eeeeeeese 193 Printer Hard DISK Eisen tuse edil REM R e Nu denen 193 M pier Mode E 193 VOD STN mc 193 MSIE naasa a a 194 Restore Defaults eir dina SERERE Ra Ven E e REA REP Ox ds 194 PostScript Tab Teatures E 194 PostScript output format coooocoococccnnccccccncccccocnnonnoncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn eer eee 195 PostScript header eet tierra dae 196 Print PostScript error information oooocccccccnncnncnnnoncnnnnonnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnnn 196 PostScript timeout values inicia no nere e ers ie ne RR eng 196 PAV AN CC oc teet coarse e einn eee arenes D ee ge nee 196 PostScript Language Level sssem n 197 Bitmap COMPrESSION eee teint RR AER exe e CARN eu e Rad EARS 197 BECROIHqm TEE 198 Send CTRL D before job ooooocccccccnnnocccinoncnonanccccnononnnannnccc nc nnnnnnans 198 Send CTRL D after job 198 Restore Defaults dre entere ttt aude d Dx iaa 198 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows Introduction ger m 199 Access to print drivers in Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 201 Device control panel EU 201 Software program print dialog DOX cccoccococooccccccconononnnccnnnnnnanoncnnnncnn nano nnnnnnnnn nana nnncnnnnnnnns 201 Print driver user Interface eden t
15. 158 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW If no PIN number is assigned to the job continue with step 8 8 Press A up or V down to select the number of copies to print 9 Press select to print the job Deleting a job storage print job Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the device memory You can do this from the device control panel 1 Press theMenu button to open the menus 2 Press A the up arrow or V the down arrow until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device control panel and then press v select 3 Press y select 4 Press A up or V down to scroll to your user name and then press v select 5 Press A up or V down to scroll to the job name and then press v select 6 Press A up or V down until DELETE is highlighted on the device control panel and then press w select 7 Press y select 8 Ifa PIN number is assigned to the job press A up or V down to select the first digit of the PIN and then press v select The number in the device control panel display changes to an asterisk Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number If no PIN number is assigned to the job continue with the next step 9 Press select to delete the job The stored print job is deleted and the device returns to the READY state 7 Ll co TO o c EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo ENWW Job Stora
16. Right click the device name Click Printing Preferences Click the Advanced tab Use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages and to configure special controls that are not commonly used Also use this tab to control features such as media size and copies in the driver although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or through the page settings in the software program The following figure shows the Advanced tab Advanced tab features 205 m e uem 0 y os 20 ED ssc ss Qa E 2 HP LJ P3005 PCL6 Printing Preferences Advanced Paper Quality Effects Finishing Job Storage Services HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 6 Advanced Document Settings 25 Paper Output in Graphic 3 ike Document Options Advanced Printing Features Print Optimizations Enabled E As Printer Features REt On Print All Text as Black Disabled Send True Type as Bitmap Disabled Alternative Letterhead Mode Off Layout Options Page Order Front to Back Figure 5 2 The default appearance of the Advanced tab The Advanced tab contains the following controls e Paper Output e Graphic e Document Options Paper Output The Paper Output settings contain the following controls e Copy Count setting e Collated check box appears when you select Copy Count 206 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Copy Count Copy C
17. Click OK to return to the Drivers dialog box In the Drivers dialog box click Next to continue the installation The Ready to Install dialog box appears 78 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW HP LaserJet P3005 Setup EJ Ready to Install D 5 Setup is ready to begin the installation Y To modify the properties of this printer such as printer name or sharing click Printer Printer Properties Properties Click Install to begin the installation lt Back Install Cancel Figure 3 23 Ready to Install dialog box Click Install to start the installation process Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box This dialog box has two tabs e General E o z e xe 9 e Sharing ENWW Print driver installation instructions 79 Printer Properties General Sharing Printer Name Note A printer will be created for each driver being installed The driver type will be appended to the name specified above Example HP Model 1000 PCL6 Location Comment Use this printer as the default printer For Windows based programs Figure 3 24 Printer PropertiesGeneraltab On the General tab you can change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name field Use the Location and Comment fields to describe the printer You can also leave these fields blank If you want to use the HP LaserJet P3005 pri
18. ENWW Effects tab features 135 To create a new watermark click New The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until its named To name the new watermark type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box To delete a watermark select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete ET NOTE No more that 30 watermarks can exist in the Current Watermarks list at one time When the limit of 30 watermarks is reached the New button is disabled and a Bubble Help message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to make it available To edit an existing watermark select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list Changing the Watermark Message for that watermark in effect creates a new watermark Watermark Message The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list except when more than one watermark has the same message For example several different watermarks can contain the message DRAFT each in a different font or size When this occurs the string is appended with a space a pound sign and a number for example Draft 2 When a number is added the number two is used first but if the resulting name is also in the list then the number increases until the name is unique Draft 3 Draft 4 and so on Message Angle Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to
19. InputOutput Status Capacity size type Tray 1 L Empty 100 Sheets ANYSI ANY TYPE Tray 2 lI OK 5UU Sheets LETTER PLAIN STANDARD TOP DIN l ox N A N A Change Settings Capabilities Printer Serial Number 900000000 Firmware Datecode 2UU5U U3 U2 U28 U Duplex OFF RAM DISK Sturage 193 MB Capacity DIMM Slot 1 256 MB DDR Embedded Jetdirect YES Figure 2 2 HP EWS Information tab Device Status screen ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 39 Configuration Page You can gain access to the HP LaserJet P3005 configuration page remotely through the HP EWS The HP EWS Configuration Page screen provides configuration information about the device in the same way as the configuration page that is printed from the device The following figures show an example of a configuration page viewed remotely through the HP EWS A Device sut Configuration Page f Pi tal Printer Information EventLog ProductName HP LaserJet P3005 Usage Pa PrinterName HP LaserJet P3005 p DC Cuntiuller 9 Model Number COXA Control Pai Printer Serial Number 000000000 Pri Formater Num ber MI10101111 Firmware Daterade 20060703 n MAN Service ID 00000 PS Wait Time out 300 seconds Other Links Engine Cycles 0 hp instant support Order Supplies Installed Personalities and Options ShowMe How PCL 20010402 POLXL 20010402 POSTSCRIPT Ennan PDF 20050131 DIMM Slot 1 256 MB DOR EIO 1 Empty Embedded Jeldirect HP JelDirect J7979 1
20. O 7 Y Le v fas 5 e o MS Windows driver configuration The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5 traditional drivers for MS Windows and the HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers feature bidirectional communication technology which in environments that support the drivers provide automatic discovery and driver configuration for device accessories at the time of installation Some accessories that are automatically discovered and configured include the duplexing unit optional paper trays and dual inline memory modules DIMMs Topics e Driver autoconfiguration e Bidirectional communication e Enterprise AutoConfiguration e Update Now HP Driver Preconfiguration Driver autoconfiguration Automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication occurs in the following circumstances e When a print driver is installed by using Enterprise AutoConfiguration EAC e When using the Update Now feature for a driver that is already installed However as shown in the following table driver autoconfiguration and EAC are not available in Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 operating systems over a direct connection when the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is installed by using the Add Printer wizard Table 2 2 Availability of automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication in Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 Connection type Add Prin
21. deer creates ida rese I ipee elegi dat e bebes ke Eee d dae edd 286 Print Fax dialog ee riter fesc ttes eed im iere i eter cas 286 Default Browser tab 4 ai aee get a eiae rebate tede ea gere tubus dee ve aigu oa des 287 Printer Browser IP Printer tab sssssssssssssseeeneennnee emen nm ennen nsn enne nnne 288 Installable Options screen oooocooccocccnconcoocooonoononcnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn rra nana anar nennen rrr erre rnn nennen nennen 289 Printer Cist Screen A 290 Printer Lists A e SRM 291 Print cE aX SCIeen cde nte be ret ettet taille ae ets de ets noe Ttt 291 Add Printer scream epe ita mote ee tieten isdem E 292 xix Figure 6 21 Figure 6 22 Figure 6 23 Figure 6 24 Figure 6 25 Figure 6 26 Figure 6 27 Figure 6 28 Figure 6 29 Figure 6 30 Figure 6 31 Figure 6 32 Figure 6 33 Figure 6 34 Figure 6 35 Figure 6 36 Figure 6 37 Figure 6 38 Figure 6 39 Figure 6 40 Figure 6 41 Figure 6 42 Figure 6 43 Figure 6 44 Figure 6 45 Figure 6 46 Figure 6 47 Figure 6 48 Figure 6 49 Figure 6 50 Figure 6 51 Figure 6 52 Figure 6 53 Figure 6 54 Figure 6 55 Figure 6 56 Figure 6 57 Figure 6 58 Figure 6 59 Figure 6 60 Figure 6 61 Figure 6 62 Figure 6 63 Figure 6 64 Figure 6 65 Figure 6 66 Figure 6 67 Figure 6 68 Figure 6 69 Figure 6 70 XX Printer LS ESCENA crete E die ete rtt d edoceri eM Ha ee 294 Add printer SCreen baee id aiii 295 Printer Info Installable Options dialog sample
22. e Optimize for Portability Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring Conventions ADSC Each page of the document will be a self contained object This is useful for instance to create a Postscript file and print it on a different printer ENWW HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 195 Encapsulated PostScript EPS Use this setting to include the file as an image in another document that is to be printed from a different program Archive Format Use this setting to create a PostScript file for later use PJL archive format This setting notifies the printer that the document is being printed in a different printer language PostScript header Use the PostScript header options to specify whether to send header information to the device each time you print a document The following options are available Download header with each print job This is the default setting and is sufficient or most types of printing Use this setting to print to a shared network device or to a file on a disk Assume header is downloaded and retained To print to a local printer save printing time by sending the header information to the device only once Send Header Now Click this button to send header information to the device This option is ignored when you specify EPS Archive or PJL Archive formats Print PostScript error information Use the Send PostScript error information option
23. Antique Olive Roman Bold PS_11118 TTF Antique Olive Roman Italic PS_11846 TTF Apple Chancery Italic PS_24516 TTF Bodoni Poster Regular PS_12704 TTF Bodoni PosterCompressed Regular PS_14508 TTF BodoniPS Regular PS_12581 TTF BodoniPS Bold PS_12585 TTF BodoniPS Bold Italic PS_12586 TTF BodoniPS Italic PS_12582 TTF Candid Regular PS_24517 TTF Chicago Regular PS_24518 TTF Clarendon Light Regular PS_14513 TTF T ClarendonPS Regular PS_10269 TTF ClarendonPS Bold PS_12968 TTF Cooper Black Regular PS_10369 TTF 3 Cooper Black Italic PS_10370 TTF S Copperplate32bc Regular PS_14514 TTF 2 Copperplate33bc Regular PS_14515 TTF CoronetPS Italic PS_10249 TTF Eurostile Regular PS_10267 TTF Eurostile Bold Regular PS_10268 TTF Eurostile Extended Two Bold PS_14512 TTF Eurostile ExtendedTwo Regular PS_14511 TTF Geneva Regular PS_24509 TTF GillSans Regular PS 13872 TTF GillSans Bold PS 13874 TTF GillSans Bold Italic PS 13875 TTF GillSans Condensed Regular PS_14053 TTF GillSans Condensed Bold PS_14054 TTF GillSans ExtraBold Regular PS_14051 TTF GillSans Italic PS 13873 TTF ENWW Font support 53 54 Chapter 3 Table 3 2 Additional PS emulation fonts continued Font name Font style File name GillSans Light Italic PS 13871 TTF GillSans Light Regular PS 13870 TTF Goudy Bold PS 12544 TTF Goudy Bold Italic PS 10695 TTF Goudy Regular PS 12542 TTF Gou
24. Fit to Page Prompt User kH TEA Apply Changes Figure 6 23 Printer Info Installable Options dialog sample 296 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW 9 Inthe Collation in Printer drop down menu choose one of the following options depending on the device configuration e Yes Total RAM 80 MB or Hard Disk e No Total RAM 80 MB and No Hard Disk 10 Ifthe device has the optional 250 sheet tray 3 choose Tray 3 11 Ifthe device has a duplex unit a standard feature on the HP LaserJet P3005dn and HP LaserJet P3005x models select the Duplex Unit check box 12 Click Apply Changes and then close the Printer List dialog Troubleshooting the printer setup If the printer does not appear in the printer list after an installation Carry out each one of these solutions in the order given and restart the setup process after each one to see if the issue has been resolved e Verify that the USB or network cable is connected between the device and the computer and that the device is powered on e Try disconnecting and reconnecting the cable If the computer has more than one USB port try a different USB port e Turn the device off and then back on again e Turn the computer off and then back on again e f you are using a USB hub on the computer disconnect the other USB devices from the hub If the wrong PPD appears in the Kind column in the printer list after an installation 1 Unplug the USB cable 2 Delete the print
25. If the computer is running a 64 bit MS Windows operating system install the corresponding 64 bit print driver by using Add Printer The HP LaserJet P3005 printer has not been tested with and is not supported in the MS Windows 3 1x or MS Windows 95 operating systems o Q fe o 7 Lo c o 2 O Q gt n For more information about the HP LaserJet P3005 printer go to the following Web site www hp com support ljp3005 Topics e Print drivers e Print driver support in other operating systems Print drivers The following operating systems support the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software including the HP traditional PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation drivers and unidrivers Table 1 3 Printing system software support Full software installation Print driver only e Windows XP 32 bit e Windows 98 SE e Windows 2000 e Windows Me e MacOS X V10 2 and later e Windows Server 2003 Windows XP 64 bit E NOTE Print driver only support requires installing print drivers by using Add Printer Print drivers are supported by the following 64 bit operating systems e ltanium based systems e AMD Athlon 64 AMD Opteron Intel Xeon and Pentium 4 with EMT64 Print driver support in other operating systems The HP LaserJet P3005 printer is also supported in the following operating environments e Mac OS X V10 2 8 and later e Linux For more information go to the following Web site www hp com go l
26. In Windows 98 SE and Windows Me you have access to a single set of driver tabs To gain access to the print drivers follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Properties to gain access to all print driver tabs The settings that you make on these driver tabs control print job output and become the default settings for all software programs The following print driver tabs are available in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me e Graphics e Fonts e Device Options e PostScript g e General E E de c e Details T ty i fe e Sharing E e Paper ge 50 Only device specific HP driver tabs are described in this STR the other driver tabs are part of the aS operating system The following tabs are described I Lo e Paper e Graphics e Fonts e Device Options e PostScript ENWW HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 173 PS 3 emulation support for the HP LaserJet P3005 A set of 92 postscript soft fonts is included with the printing system software If you want to permanently install soft fonts in the printer postscript fonts are available from HP in an optional font DIMM The PS emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PostScript when PostScript fonts are purchased from Adobe Users of Adobe licensed programs might also have the right to use the Adobe PostScript print drivers from Adobe with the HP LaserJet postscript
27. Print All Text as Black PCL traditional drivers 130 unidrivers 209 print cartridges AutoSend feature 332 usage information 326 Print Document On settings PCL traditional drivers 132 unidrivers 231 print modes 120 Print on Both Sides PCL traditional driver settings 119 PS Emulation Driver 178 unidriver settings 239 Print Optimizations option PCL unidrivers 208 Print Page Borders settings PCL traditional drivers 124 unidrivers 244 Print Quality Details PCL traditional drivers 126 128 Print Quality settings PCL traditional drivers 126 PS Emulation Driver 190 unidrivers 227 Print screen 328 Print Task Quick Sets PCL traditional drivers about 115 defaults 115 use guide 118 Print Task Quick Sets unidrivers about 212 custom 216 defaults 213 use guide 215 print ready files command line printing 361 printing by FTP 361 printing by local Windows port 363 printing by Windows network 364 printing in UNIX systems 364 printing using HP Embedded Web Server 38 printing with LPR command 364 128 ENWW Printer Connection dialog box Full Installation 63 printer control panel settings traditional drivers 107 unidrivers 199 Printer Dialog Extensions PDEs 276 Printer Driver Test Page dialog box Windows 84 Printer Features unidrivers 209 Printer Found dialog box Windows 67 68 Printer Model features 3 PCL traditional driver settings 165 Printer Not Found dialog box Windows 66 Printer Port dialog box Customiz
28. S o o A4 36 Topics Du Y e Automatically print on both sides IS o e Manually printing on both sides ENWW Finishing tab features 119 Automatically print on both sides The duplexing unit in the device prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both Sides option is specified in the print job The HP LaserJet P3005 printer comes with a duplexing unit installed in the following models e HP LaserJet P3005dn e HP LaserJet P3005x The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports smart duplexing The smart duplexing feature increases printing performance by preventing one page print jobs or single sided pages of a duplexed print job from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver The smart duplexing feature is available for all media types except for those that cannot be printed on both sides and certain others Media types that are not supported are shown in the following list e Labels e Envelopes e Transparency e Prepunched e Preprinted e Letterhead When the media type is set to Unspecified the smart duplexing feature is disabled To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page the printer makes adjustments to its print modes Selecting a media type in effect instructs the printer to use a group of settings such as fuser temperature and print speed to create an image that has the best possible quality for that media
29. The File to E mail utility is a standalone Microsoft Foundation Class MFC program that reads an INI file to detect where the HP LaserJet device software is installed The program then attaches relevant log or history files to an e mail that can be sent to HP Customer Support to assist troubleshooting The utility runs on the computer but does not interact with your HP LaserJet device The tool is included on the installer CD but is not copied to the computer during the software installation HP Customer Support can also send the utility to you through e mail or by posting it to an HP web page The tool is compatible with Windows 98 SE Windows Me Windows 2000 and Windows XP The File to E mail utility runs with any MAPI compliant e mail programs It does not run with Web based e mail services such as Yahoo Hotmail or AOL Depending on the speed of the computer it might take several seconds for the utility to gather the log files and attach them to an e mail message The File to E mail utility consists of two files that are located on the HP LaserJet P3005 software CD e CD ROM drive gt Temp FiletoEmail FiletoEmail exe e CD ROM drive gt Temp FiletoEmail FileToEmail ini To use the File to E mail utility copy these files to the desktop and then double click FileToEmail exe to open the utility The utility generates files opens an e mail message and attaches the files so that you can send them to an IT administrator as shown i
30. This STR is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick reference tool for Customer Care Center CCC agents support engineers system administrators management information systems MIS personnel and HP LaserJet P3005 printer end users as appropriate The following information is included in this STR e Descriptions of drivers and operating systems with system modifications e Procedures for installing and uninstalling software components e Descriptions of various HP LaserJet P3005 printer topics including engineering details The following table describes the structure of this STR Table 1 1 Software technical reference overview Chapter Content Chapter 1 Purpose and scope This chapter contains basic information about the HP LaserJet P3005 printer and its software e Overview of the HP LaserJet P3005 printer e Printing system software overview including the following topics e System requirements e Operating system support e Availability e HP LaserJet software documentation Chapter 2 Software description This chapter provides an overview of the printing system software installer and print drivers This chapter also contains general information about other software features including the following topics e Driver configuration for Microsoft MS Windows e HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool X UUl H M
31. cete tob ette e eda a a aliq a eaaa a tb ais 218 Name oett amit E EE 218 Paper Size iie ei hoa te t tta ett etum d 219 Ma cere 219 Custom width and height control limits seeesssseesess 219 OOULCO IS chos hlc Ld n E MUR E MEUM 219 TIPOS AA e e Re A et a tts 220 Use Different Paper Covers ssssssssssssssssssseee eene enne nennen erret nes 221 Irene 221 First Page aieo enne tutelae iion een doi perg turtle 222 Other Pages cte to Deiode P LL rede ee D ae 223 East Pages csset aie mad etin AM 224 Back COVER M ELE 225 Document preview Imriage etsi ett tt hee tette t E e PL Ce Re E Ee ebd dz 227 Print Quality zt o ida scat gtd Sivas aan Sead enit nci 227 Print Quality drop down menu ssssen enne 227 ECONO MOS EC 228 Effects tab featUres 1o aee eT tte 229 Prnt ask QuickeSets 5 ird A da ea IE ete tags 230 RESIZING OPUONS 231 Actual S128 toi otha oth state a aeaaea 231 Print Documents On 1 ee eee ed ce obitu dde dise 231 secre get 231 Yo of Normal SIZe 24 2 hai tddi 232 Document preview Image eg tem eed Ea rte XP RE E Ere Creep tea ERRAT 232 WaltermarKS tests trainee ttiam iiti usate iuis ratem 232 Current Waltetrmlatrks 3 det a exei Md ies enia Date be echa nud 234 Watermark Message rere np rer ede dier n n dart nne nne d 234 Message Angle ut he enm eee um eat 234 A Dae Dee sake ite eia sas 234
32. e Drivers e Manuals ET NOTE File layouts differ by language for each regional version of the software CD To view the files insert the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD right click Start click Explore and then select the CD ROM drive CD versions The HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD is available in three versions each of which contains printing system software in various languages as follows e CD 1 Americas part number Q7812 60111 e AR Arabic e DE German Deutsch e EN English e ES Spanish Espa ol 10 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW ENWW e FR French Francais e EL Greek e IT Italian Italiano e NL Dutch Nederland e PT Brazilian Portuguese Portugu s CD 2 Asia Pacific part number Q7812 60112 e ZHCN Simplified Chinese Chi Simp e ZHTW Traditional Chinese Chi Trad e EN English e KO Korean e TH Thai CD 3 Europe Middle East Africa part number Q7812 60113 e CS Czech Cesky e DA Danish Dansk e EN English e FI Finnish Suomi e HE Hebrew e HU Hungarian Magyar e NO Norwegian Norsk e PL Polish Polski e RU Russian Russ e SV Swedish Svenska e TR Turkish Turk e Each ofthe following tables lists one of the software CD versions along with the printing system software components that are supported in each language ET NOTE Drivers for various languages do not neces
33. o e E ou a5 gt fe o S Table 5 3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks Setting New watermark Preset watermark Name Arial Varies by language Color Gray Gray Shading Very Light Very Light Size 80 Varies by language Style Regular Regular Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box Clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New all of the changes are saved and only the current unsaved changes can be canceled 236 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Finishing tab features To gain access to the Finishing tab follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers Windows XP or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Printing Preferences 6 Click the Finishing tab Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output The following figure shows the Finishing tab m e uem 0 y os 20 ED ssc ss Qa am ENWW Finishing tab features 237 2 HP LJ P3005 PCL6 Printing Preferences Advanced Paper Quality Effects Finishing Job Storage Services Print Task Quick Sets um je new Quick Set name here
34. Internet Services 256 Job storage settings 246 JPEG Passthrough 267 Layout Options 210 media supported 344 Mopier settings 265 Pages per Sheet 244 Paper Options 216 paper size commands 347 paper type commands 349 Paper Output settings 206 Paper Quality tab 211 PostScript Options 208 PostScript Passthrough 266 Print Quality settings 227 Print Task Quick Sets 212 Printer Features 209 Printing Preferences tabs 201 Properties tabs 202 Resizing Options settings 231 Scale to Fit 231 Services tab 255 TrueType font settings 207 Update Now 30 version numbers 26 Watermarks settings 232 uninstallation Macintosh printing system 297 units of measurement 145 UNIX operating systems direct printing 364 driver availability 8 print ready printing 364 remote firmware update 358 Web site for 6 Unprintable Area PS Emulation Driver 178 Update Now feature 29 30 172 updating firmware 328 updating firmware remotely See remote firmware updates usage information AutoSend 332 Usage Page 326 usage page 38 USB direct connect installation 59 Use Different Paper PCL traditional drivers 147 Use Different Paper Covers unidrivers 221 User Guide 16 username 333 User Name stored jobs PCL traditional drivers 157 unidrivers 251 V version numbers drivers 26 Ww Wait Timeout settings 196 263 Wake Time screen 338 wake time setting 3 Watermarks settings PCL traditional drivers 134 PS Emulation Driver 191 unidrivers 232 Web Jetadmin S
35. Mopier Mode The multiple original print mopy function is an HP designed feature that produces multiple collated copies from a single print job Multiple original printing mopying increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the device once and then storing it in memory The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created controlled managed and finished from the computer which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier 7 La co OO o c EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports the transmit once mopying feature when the Mopier Mode setting on the Device Options tab is Enabled Job Storage When the job storage feature is enabled the device can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control panel ENWW HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 193 VMOption This option shows the amount of virtual memory RAM in the device The following options are available 48 MB 64 MB default 80 MB 96 MB 112 MB 128 MB 176 MB 192 MB 304 MB 320 MB 512 MB ET NOTE The HP LaserJet P3005 printer can be configured for a maximum of 320 MB Restore Defaults Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Device Options tab to their original values PostScript tab features To gain access to the PostS
36. Operating system support ocoooccccccccccccnnccnnccnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnno nono nono nro rrnrmerrnmen nnns nnn ness n nann 272 Avallability A A iaa dado 272 Printing system software on the Web ccocccccccnnococconcccccccnnnannnnannnncnnnnnnn nn cnn 273 Printing system software sss en 273 Software component availability eeeeneee 273 In box printing system software CDS ssem 273 Macintosh partition cccccccccccccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 273 PR CIO EMT 274 Macintosh install and uninstall instructions sssssssssssssssssseee emen 276 Macintosh component descriptions sssssssssss mene 276 HP LaserJet PPDS circo clonadas 276 PDES Vii aia leader 276 HP Embedded Web Server ooccoccccccccccccccccnnonnconnn nono ncnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncninnns 277 Install notes Readme file sssssnn rra 277 AA nea dade ar aaan anaa a ataa aa eannan aeaa aana 277 Install the Macintosh printing system ssssnnn mmn 277 General installation for Macintosh operating systems sssssssss 277 Detailed Mac OS X installation ooooooonnnnnnnnnnncnncccccnnnnnonnrrnnnnonnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 278 Main Install dialog sequence oooconcooocccccccccnanconcnnncccnanananannnc cnica nos 278 Printer Sloan EM 285 Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10 4 and later
37. The HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software is available for download at the following Web site www hp com go ljp3005 software ET NOTE Only 32 bit print drivers are available on the printing system software CD If the computer is running a 64 bit operating system you must install a 64 bit print driver The 64 bit print drivers for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are available at the following Web site www hp com go ljp3005 software In box printing system software CDs ENWW The software CD for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer contains a variety of files for installing the printing system software on the computer The HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD is divided into two partitions one for each of the following operating systems e MS Windows e Macintosh Printing system software 9 o Q e o 0 Lo c o 2 O Q i a Each partition includes documentation files and files that are required to install and uninstall the printing system components Topics e Windows partition o CD versions Windows partition The root directory in the MS Windows partition of the software CD contains the AUTORUN EXE file the SETUP EXE file and the following directories and support files e Autorun e Drivers e fonts e HP Easy Printer care e hw e Manuals e PortMonitor e System32 e Temp e WebReg The printing system files for each language reside in the following directories
38. The options include all the media types that the HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports e X Paper Source The options are Printer Auto Select Manual Feed Tray 1 Tray 1 or Tray 2 When a feature is locked the selected default option is the only option that is available to users Generally the feature is unavailable in the driver UI after it has been locked Continuous export ENWW The term continuous export refers to the ability of the driver to copy the latest driver settings back to the working copy of the preconfiguration file Using this feature the exported values can be transferred when a compatible version of the driver is used to upgrade the print driver For instance if the orientation is set to Landscape in a driver originally installed in Windows 2000 then the orientation setting automatically remains Landscape when the operating system is upgraded to Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 The continuous export feature functions transparently from the user s perspective and works only between drivers of identical device models ET NOTE Not all of the driver parameters can be exported however the exportable components are always the same as the components that can be preconfigured The following table shows drivers and operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration Table 2 5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration Driver Windows 98 SE Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Serve
39. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode and a different print mode is used with each media type Print mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used Manually printing on both sides Select the Print on Both Sides Manually check box to print on the second side of the media Because the HP LaserJet P3005 and HP LaserJet P3005n printer models do not have a duplexing unit installed this is the only setting available for duplex printing Use the Print on Both Sides Manually on the other HP LaserJet P3005 printer models for media types that the automatic duplexing unit does not support such as cardstock and thick media Manually printing on the second side of a page is available in the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver The PS Emulation Driver does not support this feature If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver the device automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing Letter A4 Legal and 8 5 x 13 only and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported To make the Print on Both Sides Manually check box available in the document options select the Allow Manual Duplexing check box on the Configure tab in the Properties print driver tabs If you want to print on both sides manually while using media that is supported for automatic duplexing you must click to cle
40. dialog boxes 57 HP Device Installer Customization Wizard 86 HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool 35 HP Driver Preconfiguration operating systems and drivers supported 33 status PCL traditional drivers 163 HP Easy Printer Care 36 HP Embedded Web Server about 37 alerts page 41 AutoSend page 41 Configuration Page 40 Configuration section 45 339 Configure Device page 41 Device Information page 38 41 Device Status page 39 Diagnostics section 46 340 documentation 17 E mail Server page 41 HP Printer Utility accessing from 319 HP Web Jetadmin 37 Information tab 38 language setting 41 links 39 41 navigation 38 Network settings 45 339 Networking tab 44 338 Security page 41 44 Security section 46 340 Settings tab 41 time settings 41 user guide 37 ENWW HP Embedded Web Server EWS configuration page 323 Device Status page 322 Event Log screen 325 Information tab 322 Settings 329 Supplies Status page 324 HP EWS Macintosh about 320 HP Install Network Printer Wizard INPW 8 HP Instant Support 39 HP Jetdirect Administrator s Guide 18 HP Jetdirect page printing 38 HP Network Registry Agent HPNRA 29 HP OpenVMS 8 HP PCL traditional drivers See PCL traditional drivers HP PCL unidrivers See PCL unidrivers HP Printer Utility Macintosh about 298 accessing 298 320 Bonjour Settings 318 Device Information 305 Duplex mode 310 E mail Alerts 316 Embedded Web Server access 319 File Upload 305 HP
41. e Medium Dark e Medium e Medium Light e Light e Lighter e Lightest Print Watermark The Print Watermark feature contains the following options e No default e All Pages e First Page Only Installable options This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer The following controls are available 192 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW e Tray3 e Duplex Unit for 2 sided Printing e Printer Hard Disk e Mopier Mode e Job Storage e VMOption Tray 3 This control specifies whether you have an optional 500 sheet feeder tray Tray 3 installed on the printer The default setting is Uninstalled Duplex Unit for 2 sided Printing The HP LaserJet P3005 printer is equipped with automatic two sided printing duplexing which allows you to print on both sides of supported media Automatic two sided printing is not supported for the following media types e Transparency e Labels e Cardstock e Tough Paper e X Envelope The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports smart duplexing The printer detects information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if printable information appears on the second side of the page Printer Hard Disk ET NOTE A printer hard disk is optional for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Do not select the Installed setting unless a hard disk is installed
42. follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Properties 6 Click the Device Options tab The Device Options tab communicates information about the hardware configuration to the print driver When the driver is opened from within a software program the Device Options tab includes only the Printer features controls When opened from the Printers folder the Device Options tab appears as shown in the following figure 7 Ll co TO a S EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo ENWW HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 185 HP LaserJet P3005 PS Properties 2 x General Details Sharing Paper Graphics Fonts Device Options PostScript Available printer memory in KB 2621 4 E p Printer features 34 FastRes 1200 User System Name If available PIN digit 1 for Private Job O y Change setting for FastRes 1200 Off X m Installable options Printer Hard Disk Not Installed Mopier Mode Enabled Job Storage Enabled Change setting for Job Storage Enabled X J Restore Defaults Figure 4 35 Device Options tab Changes that you make to the Device Options tab are not reflected in the Properties settings until the modified device settings have been applied and the Properties tabs have been re opened For example the duplexing unit will not appear until you modify the Device Options
43. from the Printers Menu 3 Choose a connection type e g Bonjour AppleTalk 4 Select the printer from the printer list 5 Verify that correct HP Printer Model is selected 6 Click Add to create Printer queue IMPORTANT if your printer has installable options e g duplex extra paper trays internal hard drive you must follow these steps in order to enable these options from the print driver 1 Select your printer queue in Print Center Printer Setup Utility 2 Click on Show Info 3 Click on the pop up menu and select Installable Options 4 Select the control setting that correspond to the options in your printer 5 After checking and closing this window these options will now be available from the print dialogs Installation powered by VISE X Figure 6 5 HP LaserJet Installer Read Me dialog GoBack Continue Click Print to open the Page Setup dialog for the default device and print a copy of the readme file Click Save to open the system Save dialog and save the readme file to disk Click Go Back to return to the previous screen Click Continue to continue the installation The License dialog appears 80 HP LaserJet v6 2 License 8 Introduction Read Me 6 License Note The limited warranty for this product and accompanying software is located in the product documentation that you received with this product Please review it at this time ATTENTION USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS
44. iste pepe ient are ode na ien Ele fece i taped seta e Edna 313 Lock Resources Serem td c teste dace Nit ette teet betreten il tees oA A 314 Enable Job Storing screen eer RR eerie bee RR 315 E mail AlertS Screen ure ete emet ee oh b rM 317 Network Settings SCIeern iecit RE e TE e aee ae o tae t E e ded 317 Networking SCreen iii e aedi be dde ua eR Deva eee aep deu 318 Bonjour Settings CES modo eese t e tae eee e tue reed e do dub hada a RR 319 Additional Settings screen ou cc ceccececeseeueecdeteebenccechessueeceecheseuecesetbanetececheseuecedebnaieeedectnneteeedenneasens 320 DEVICE Status SOON ao testo Se eth t etre eei sette etas Leere a eee Dd 321 HP EWS Device Status page i eite e hi tere eR Pee to RS RE ER MEER ARR aaa 323 HP EWS Configuration Page screen ssssssssssseeeeeeee eene enne enne enn 324 HP EWS Supplies Status page ssssssssssssssssessene ener er emen nennen nne 325 HP EWS Event LOg SCreen unio eec etre ede ipa cedi utes 325 Usage Page screen 1 Of 2 ornnes aT RM T tini ne RP 326 HP EWS Device Information screen sse ere enne 327 HP EWS Control Panel Snapshot screen ceceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteetenes 328 HP EWS Prlnt SCIeen iiec eode a cete eil A wR eka 329 HP EWS Configure Device screen ssssssssseeeeee eene nennen nennen nennen enn 330 HP EWS E mail Server screen
45. ordering ch Grae Send Don t Send gt Se HP respects your privacy Only information and status about your printer will be sent no personal information will be shared Please refer to the Shared Information page to know more about the data that will be transmitted Using this site means vo ept its terms 2005 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Figure 6 30 Transfer printer information to HP SureSUpply screen 302 Chapter6 Macintosh ENWW After either option is selected Send or Don t Send the Welcome to HP SureSupply Web page opens as shown in the following figure Select United _ United States English B Contact HP Search CA Welcome to HP SureSupply invent HP SureSupply HP SureSupply Select your region How HP SureSupply m A E p 3 To learn about what is works available to you select your How to get HP lt region from the links below SureSupply y HP SureSupply FAQs di United States 3 4 Canada HP SureSupply regions Alerts 7 4 Affica jin m United States when your printer s Asia Pacific Canada l Latin Europe Middle Eastand need to be replacec A Africa psc pe ER a Latin America Shopping for printing supplies is easy with HP SureSupply HP SureSupply alerts you when your HP printer is low on supplies tells you what you need to replace and helps you purchase genuine HP ink toner or other printer supplies How HP SureSupply wor
46. ordering supplies 22 orientation settings PCL traditional drivers 161 PS Emulation Driver 177 unidrivers 242 245 Other Links area 334 Other Pages paper settings PCL traditional drivers 149 unidrivers 224 outgoing mail configuration 331 output bins See bins Output Protocol settings PS Emulation Unidriver 262 Output Settings PCL traditional drivers 127 129 122 P page counts 326 Page Order settings PCL traditional drivers 125 unidrivers 210 244 page orientation settings PCL traditional drivers 161 122 ENWW PS Emulation Driver 177 unidrivers 242 245 Page Setup tab PS Emulation Driver 174 pages per minute 3 Pages per Sheet settings PCL traditional drivers 124 unidrivers 244 paper Alternative Letterhead Mode 171 210 custom sizes PCL driver support 348 custom sizes PCL traditional driver settings 141 custom sizes PCL unidriver settings 218 Include types in application source list setting 171 margins 347 Pages per Sheet settings PCL traditional drivers 124 Pages per Sheet settings unidrivers 244 Print Document On settings PCL traditional drivers 132 Print Document On settings unidrivers 231 Print on Both Sides settings unidrivers 239 Print on Both Sides PCL traditional drivers 119 PS Emulation Driver settings 175 size commands 347 Size is settings PCL traditional drivers 140 Size is settings unidrivers 217 sizes supported 4 source commands 344 Source is settings PCL traditional
47. 11 69 Length Millimeters 5 00 17 00 Figure 5 5 Custom Paper Size dialog box Use the Name text box to type a new name for a custom media size The name that appears in the Name text box depends on the following conditions If a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop down menu on the Paper Quality tab then the Name text box shows the name of the selected custom media size If a standard media size has been selected on the Paper Quality tab then the Name text box shows the default name of Custom If a new name has been typed into the Name text box for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size then that new name will remain in the text box until the new size is saved or the dialog box is closed If you type a new name into the Name text box but then do not click Save you can change the width and height values without losing the name However if you close the dialog box without clicking Save any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning 218 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Paper size Units Change the width and height values by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes in the Paper Size group box Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height control is rounded up
48. 2 HP LJ P3005 PCL6 Properties EA General Sharing Ports Advanced Security Device Settings About HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 6 60 53 644 0 Copyright 1996 2005 Hewlett Packard Co All Rights Reserved Driver Files HPC30056 GPD 6 30 2006 UNIDRV DLL 0 3 1296 4 UNIDRVUI DLL 0 3 1236 1 UNIDRV HLP 3 28 2003 Configuration Status Not Auto Configured No Administrator Preferences Last configured 07 28 2006 User Configured E g invent Figure 5 23 About tab 268 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW The About lists driver installation file names and their version numbers The About tab also indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured whether administrator preferences were set the date the driver was last configured and whether the configuration is default or user defined m O Y 0 y os 20 ED ssc ss Qa I ENWW About tab features 269 270 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW 6 Macintosh Introduction The HP LaserJet P3005 printer comes with printing software and installers for Apple Computer Inc Macintosh operating systems Topics e Macintosh printing system software e Macintosh install and uninstall instructions e Macintosh HP Printer Utility e HP Embedded Web Server EWS ENWW Introduction 271 Macintosh printing system software The HP LaserJet P3005 printing system fo
49. 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 e HP PCL 5 Unidriver for Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 e The HP postscript level 3 emulation Unidriver the PS Emulation Unidriver for Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 e The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me e The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me e The HP Traditional postscript level 3 emulation driver the PS Emulation Driver for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me ET NOTE During a Basic Installation or a Full Installation of the printing system software the HP PCL 6 Unidriver is installed by default for Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me Table 2 1 Print drivers included with the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Operating System PCL 6 PCL 5 PS emulation Windows 98 SE and Windows Me X X X Windows 2000 X X X Windows XP X X X Windows Server 2003 X X X Macintosh OS X O H H H 1 Not all device features are available from all drivers or operating systems See the online Help in the driver for information about the features that are available Select the best print driver HP print drivers are designed for different env
50. 32 or more than 126 Job Storage tab features 251 pan e Y 0 y os 20 L ssc ss Qa a characters the character is removed from the edit field along with all of the characters that follow it If you try to type more than 16 characters any character beyond 16 is truncated Job Name Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the device control panel The following are the Job Name settings e Automatic This option which is the default selection automatically generates the job name that is associated with the stored print job The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver Otherwise the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver Otherwise the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name e Custom Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job When you click the Custom the text field below the option becomes available In those languages for which Automatic cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters the driver uses a string of three dashes The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the device control panel display The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters and is limited to A through Z uppercase or
51. 95 Driver Details dialog box Windows 78 Driver Work Space DWS 171 drivers accessory configuration 28 Add Printer installation 85 availability by operating system 8 118 125 ENWW continuous export feature 33 diagnostics 35 Enterprise AutoConfiguration 29 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 33 included 23 Linux operating systems 7 lockable features 33 314 Macintosh 272 media supported 344 network preconfiguration 31 paper source commands 344 Point and Print installation 105 Print Quality options PS Emulation Driver features 173 settings 107 199 standalone 7 UNIX operating systems 8 Update Now 30 version numbers 26 See also PCL traditional drivers PS Emulation Driver unidrivers Drivers dialog box Customization Wizard 94 Drivers dialog box Windows 77 Duplex mode HP Printer Utility Macintosh 310 duplex unit models including 4 duplexing unit custom paper sizes 144 219 media supported 347 PCL traditional driver settings 119 167 print modes 120 PS Emulation Driver settings 178 193 testing Macintosh 310 unidriver configuration 264 unidriver settings 239 DWS Driver Work Space 171 126 E e mail alerts 331 AutoSend 332 outgoing configuring 331 return address configuring 331 server settings 330 e mail alerts HP Embedded Web Server 41 42 Macintosh 316 E mail Server page HP Embedded Web Server 41 E mail Server screen 330 Easy Printer Care 36 EconoMode unidrivers 228 Edit Other L
52. CD ROMs Macintosh 274 Windows 10 lockable features drivers 33 314 logging on password settings 333 LPR commands firmware updates 358 printing PDF files 364 M Macintosh operating systems Bonjour Settings 318 components software 276 Device Information 305 dialogs Mac OS X printing system software installation 278 direct printing 361 directory structure software CD ROM 273 e mail alerts 316 File Upload command 305 hardware requirements 272 HP EWS 320 HP Printer Utility 298 372 Index install notes 277 installing printing system software 277 localized software CDs 274 locking driver features 314 Mac OS 9 not supported 272 Mac OS X Classic not supported 272 network settings 317 online help 277 PDEs 276 PPDs 276 setting up devices with Mac OS X 290 software components 272 stored jobs 314 supplies status 301 support 6 tray configuration 313 uninstalling printing system software 297 Update Firmware 306 Upload Fonts 307 manuals See documentation margins PCL 6 driver 347 PS Emulation Driver 178 measurement units 145 media Usage Page 326 memory base 3 installation requirements for Macintosh 272 installation requirements for Windows operating systems 6 PCL traditional driver settings 171 PS Emulation Driver settings 187 PS Emulation Unidriver settings 262 unidriver settings 265 menus control panel 329 messages constraint PCL traditional drivers 111 unidrivers 203 Microsoft Point and Print inst
53. Device Management and then click All Devices or b Shift click to select devices that are to be included in the group and then click OK or c When prompted type a name for the new device group and then click OK 3 To modify several products in a group click the group name and then click Open 4 The drop down menu for Device Group Tools appears on the right side of the window Scroll if necessary to view it 5 Inthe Device Group Tools drop down box select an action Type the appropriate information Click Return to Device Group when finished 360 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Printing print ready documents Several methods are available for printing documents independently of the original software program that was used to create the document Normally the document is printed by opening the original application and printing it to a file or is printed by means of a distribution method such as internet downloading The following print ready file formats can be sent directly to the HP LaserJet P3005 printer without first opening the original software program e HP LaserJet printer control language PCL e Portable document format PDF e Postscript PS e Text TXT ET NOTE The examples that are used in this section are for printing PDF documents However any print ready file type can be substituted Es y O m 97 c Ta 0 0 97 c LL Use one of the following methods to send prin
54. ENWW ix Default watermark settings sen 235 Finishing tab features 2 ipee eet eoe rec ea Mee Ra Ra ep tani pp E Rura 237 Print Task Quick Sets dede ed idee el dec cadens dena ele ecu e ede eae ed dd 238 Document options doceo snare eee iere t eX ea in feculo aaa ete aa lee 239 Correct Order for Rear Bin sess eee 239 Pinton Both SIdes c ice ore ao oe eed 239 Automatically print on both sides ssse 240 Manually print on both sides sssss 240 Flip Pages Upton ies 242 Booklet layout 3 5 o ttr ome od 243 Book and Booklet Printing seee 243 Printa DOOKIGt itt ee e tie pid nt a bec 243 Pages per Mi MEHR RERO ER ERR 244 Print Page Borders 5 dant pee ve rds 244 Page Order hne bu en endende 244 Document preview image miii diee ce chee sebelah dae eei me ia ede va e adda 245 enc EE E 245 Job Storage tab features 4 oe A Ub due eal der ee ad eed 246 Print Task Quick Sets ien teo T eO TORT d e ct HE Reo Ede 249 Status QrOup bOX site II M A dees 249 Job Storage Mode ie a ote li t b Le Latte letrinas lbs 249 Osa set cte edocet toe eit dE Pei qe e s 249 Proof and Hold 5o dtt tete an es 249 Private Job iit duree nre idest EIS ria tisrde items 250 UCK CODY EU 250 Stored Job 2 ue one hee eR Ree AAA 250 Require PIN ooo len tr etie PED eed deere ad NE NR Rede a e DATO ee ERES 251 Job Notificatior Options c eee te a e LAT
55. FastRes setting emulates 1200 dpi printing but places fewer dots on the page and uses less toner and printing speed is faster than for documents printed on a ProRes setting The Resolution Enhancement technology REt feature is enabled by default The options are On or Off rather than the Light Medium Dark or Off settings in some print drivers The On setting corresponds to the Medium setting found in other HP printer drivers ENWW Finishing tab features 127 Use the Scale Patterns WYSIWYG feature to address the moir effect that is created when certain programs encounter certain patterns Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns but the printed result might look better The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns This option is selected by default The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default When the feature is selected the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color Color text is printed as black except for white text which remains white White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background This setting does not affect graphic images on the page nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic Edge to Edge Printing Select this check box to allow near edge to edge printing on the media size specified For example to achieve edge
56. Figure 4 5 Page order preview images py sl Si AA 2 8 8 5 by 11 inches 8 5 by 11 inches e 2 pages per sheet e 4 pages per sheet e 6 pages per sheet e 9 pages per sheet e 16 pages per sheet Document preview image The document preview image is a line drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text The 7 document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right side up The e 3 document preview image appears in the upper right corner of the following Properties driver tabs HE e Finishing LES S o e Effects So e Paper Du b a T e Basics I gt o Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image Move the mouse cursor over the document preview image the cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand Toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image The dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size The horizontal dimension is always first so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation changes Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units ENWW Finishing tab features 125 Print Quality The HP LaserJet P3005 print driver Print Quality group box provides options that control output settings and font settings The following options are available in the Print Quality group
57. Front Cover First Page Other Pages Last Page Back Cover NOTE When you change the Source Is and Type is settings for any of the covers or pages the settings remain configured until you close the software program from which you are printing For example if you select First Page and change the media source or type and then select Back Cover to change the media source or type the check mark remains beside Front Cover and the selected source and type settings remain in effect The settings are cleared only when you close the software program Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document or to include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document The following figure shows the Front Cover setting and options ENWW Paper Quality tab features 221 BS e E o e E ou a5 0 gt fe o S Paper Options Size is 8 5 x 11 inches Letter v Use Different Paper Covers First Page Dther Pages Last Page v Source is Automatically Select v Type is Unspecified v Figure 5 6 Front Cover options The following are the Front Cover options e Size is drop down menu e Adda Blank or Preprinted Cover check box e Source is drop down menu e Type is drop down menu The Size is setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job Changes made to the Size is setting here over
58. Guide e HP Jetdirect Administrator s Guide HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide The HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide describes the basic device features To view this guide from the software CD follow these steps 1 In the main screen of the CD browser click Printer Documentation 2 Click User Guide Interactive The guide opens as an MS Windows Help file CHM file This readable onscreen version of the guide is provided in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act ADA You can also gain access to the file by following these steps 1 Insert the software CD into the CD ROM drive 2 Navigate to the Manuals lt language gt folder 3 Open the file that has the appropriate file name LJP3005_USE_XXWW CHM 16 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW Ez NOTE The XX in the file name corresponds to the language For instance the file name for the French version of the guide is LJP3005 USE FRWW CHM The HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide is provided as a printable PDF file To print the guide follow these steps 1 Inthe CD Browser click Printer Documentation o Q fe o 0 Lo c o 2 O Q i gt a 2 Click User Guide Printer Friendly The guide opens 3 Print the guide You can also gain access to the file by following these steps 1 Insert the software CD into the CD ROM drive 2 Navigate to the Manuals lt language gt folder 3 Open the file that has the appropriate file name LJP3005_USE
59. HP EWS only the Information tab is available to users who do not log in by using the password If no password is set which is the default configuration all of the tabs are visible If a password has been set you must log on as an IT administrator or a service provider to gain access to the protected HP EWS tabs Settings and Networking Networking tab The HP EWS Networking tab is shown in the following figure E NOTE Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this STR For more information see the HP Jetdirect Administrator s Guide 44 Chapter2 Software description ENWW D HP LaserJet P3005 Network Settings f wxsPx Vi Appletalk Done A SNMP IPX SPX Enable IPX SPX Frame Type All Frame Types Auto v SAP Interval BU Seconds Note Use TI to disable SAPs Queue Server Configuration via NDS c 9 Print Server Name NPI937F3D a NDS Tree Name c NDS Context Job Poll Interval 2 Seconds 3 Oiar Links PJL Configuration 7 Banner Page eb p O End of Job Notification ats HP Home C Toner Low Notification 2 e o Figure 2 7 HP EWS Networking tab Network Settings screen The menu on the left side of the screen contains other networking options under three categories e Configuration e Security section e Diagnostics section Configuration e Network Settings From the Network Settings screen enable and configure the following network protocols e
60. I AA o ees 251 User Name EDD 251 Job Name eee Pete eet tee tcd ded tut ede e cee deat rd 252 Using job storage features when printing ssnn m 252 Releasing a job storage print job sssse e 253 Deleting a job storage print job sssssnm em 253 Services tab features deett iei ttbi De DRE HA GERE UE ERR He curte da teer te ties rec Macgeiesauteet 255 Internet Services id D Pneu 256 Device serviCes uite da eei bu iam tiet ct ntes 256 Device Settings tab features eee ePi Re tnn SERRE S RE ERR E ARA EHE AAA 257 Form to Tray AsslgntmTierit ose rial sa 258 Font Substitution Table i ice ee et nea diede rte i d eed et oe 259 External FOntS acc tt hee HR tet Leti eva D Dude gas Dos dua oL leve o LEER vae eod 260 Installing external fonts ssssssen nme 260 Removing external fonts ssssssssssssseeeeeeen nenne nennen 261 PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings ssssssssseen eene 261 Available PostScript Memory sssssenmm emm 262 Output Protocol i itt tte tt en Reeth ee HERE eee 262 Send Ctrl D Before Each Job iriri ian a Aaa TAA AAAA AA 262 Send CM D After Each JOD i tee bata 262 Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray ooooonccccnnnnnoccccccnnconccccnnnnonncnnncnnnnncnncnnnns 263 Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray sssssse 263 Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts s
61. Job e Send Ctrl D After Each Job e Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray e Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray e Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts e Job Timeout e Wait Timeout e Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline m e uem 0 y os 20 ED ssc ss Qa a ENWW Device Settings tab features 261 e Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline Available PostScript Memory This control specifies the amount of available postscript memory and provides a spin box for changing this value The available postscript memory is a subset of the device total physical memory It is usually best to set the postscript memory to match the total RAM that appears on the configuration pages To print the configuration pages from the device control panel follow these steps 1 Press theMenu button to open the menus 2 Press A the up arrow or V the down arrow to scroll to INFORMATION and then press v select 3 Press A up or V down to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION 4 Press select to print the configuration pages Output Protocol This control specifies the protocol that the device uses for print jobs The following options are available e ASCII default e TBCP e Binary Click ASCII to send data in ASCII format 7 bit which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I O channel such as a serial parallel or network port Click TBCP Tagged Binary Communications Protocol
62. Manually check box 2 Click OK The even number pages of the document print 3 When the control panel shows MANUALLY FEED insert the stack of media on which the even number pages have been printed as indicated in the following figure m e uem 0 y os 20 io ssc ss Qa a ENWW Finishing tab features 241 Print on Both Sides Instructions After the even numbered pages have printed a message will appear on the printer s display instructing you where to load the paper Follow the instructions below to print the odd numbered pages second sides 1 NOTE the location of the 2 Maintaining the same Touch the OK button at short edge of your paper orientation insert the paper the device to continue Remove the paper stack stack into Tray 1 printed side printing from the Output Bin Do down not discard blank sheets Figure 5 15 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box When you have completed the steps in the dialog box the second half of the print job prints on the back side of the sheets in the stack of media The driver does not require the program to specifically support odd and even page printing because the driver coordinates this function Flip Pages Up Use the Flip Pages Up check box is used to specify the duplex binding option By default the Flip Pages Up check box is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box dependin
63. Name IPv6 Prefix length Config By Valid Lftm Pref Lftm Address Support e80 214 3811 f093 7 3d 64 Link Local Infinite Infinite HP Home Other Links Help Default Route Information Address Expires In Refresh Figure 6 73 HP EWS Networking tab Network Settings screen The menu on the left side of the screen contains other networking options under three categories e Configuration e Security section e Diagnostics section Configuration e Network Setting From the Networking screen enable and configure the following network protocols e TCP IP settings e Network settings e Internetwork packet exchange Sequenced packet exchange IPX SPX e Data link control logical link control DLC LLC e Simple network management protocol SNMP e Other Settings e Privacy Settings e Select Language ENWW HP Embedded Web Server EWS 339 Security section e Settings e X Authorization e Mgmt Protocols e 802 1x authentication e Firewall Diagnostics section e Network Statistics e Protocol Info e Configuration Page Refer to the HP Jetdirect Administrator s Guide on the printing system CD for more information 340 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW 7 Engineering Details Introduction Topics e File to E mail utility e Media attributes e Remote firmware updates c y o a 2 o o Oo E Ww e Printing print ready documents ENWW Introduction 341 File to E mail utility
64. Options group box Off All of the pages No Covers use the same media Size is Paper tab Paper Options group box Letter Yes Source is Paper tab Paper Options group box Automatically Select Yes Type is Paper tab Paper Options group box Unspecified Yes Unlabeled group box Job Storage tab Status message No about the destination of the job Job Storage Mode Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode group box Off No Proof and Hold Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode group box Available not No selected Private Job Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode group box Available not No selected V Quick Copy Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode group box Available not No 3 selected fete oo Stored Job Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode group box Available not No T z selected c O 2 Require PIN to print Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable not No E option selected TO PIN to Print Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode group box Unavailable blank q o o MS Windows User Job Storage tab User Name group box Unavailable selected No I Name Lo Job Name Job Storage tab Job Name group box Unavailable No Automatic selected Display Job ID when Job Storage tab Job Notification Options Unavailable No printing group box Copy Basics tab Copies group box 1 Yes Orientation Basics tab Orientation group box Portrait Yes ENWW Finishing tab features 117 Table 4 1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer contin
65. Retesh _ Oam Timo Format Clock Drift Correction Apply Cancel Figure 6 69 HP EWS Date amp Time screen 336 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Date Time Format Use the Date Time Format screen to select the formats you prefer for displaying the date under Date Format and time under Time Format The following figure shows the Date Time Format screen O MMM CO YYYY O DOMMM YYYY O vYYYMMM DO 12 hours O 24 hours Figure 6 70 HP EWS Date Time Format screen Clock Drift Correction Use the Date amp Time clock drift correction screen to enable clock drift correction The following figure shows the screen erJet P3005 Printers Date amp Time clock drift correction EEE When enabled this feature will find a Network Time Server NTS if available and automatically correct the clock drift f another server ls peered enter that servers P address E Enable ClockOrift Correction Network Time Server Address 10 1048 15 Local Portto Receive Time from Server 1250 1100 1900 Time Server Status The server has been configured and i5 responding Automatically Find Server Note This feature corrects the clock drift it does not set the clock aa Figure 6 71 HP EWS Date amp Time clock drift correction screen To configure a network time server to correct the product clock drift use the following procedure ENWW HP Embedded Web Server EWS 337 ET NOTE This process keeps the clock
66. SUBJECT TO THE HP SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS SET FORTH BELOW USING THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE LICENSE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS YOU MUST RETURN THE SOFTWARE FOR A FULL REFUND IF THE SOFTWARE IS SUPPLIED WITH ANOTHER PRODUCT YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT FOR A FULL REFUND Installation Type Installing Finish Up HP SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS The following License Terms govern your use of the accompanying Software unless you have a separate written agreement with HP License Grant HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the Software Use v means storing loading installing executing or displaying the Iz Installation powered by VISE X Figure 6 6 License dialog ENWW Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 281 Click Print to open the Page Setup dialog for the default device and print a copy of the license agreement Click Save to open the system Save dialog and save the license agreement to disk Click Go Back to return to the previous screen Read the software license agreement and then click Continue to continue the installation A dialog appears asking you to accept the license agreement as shown in the following figure To continue installing the software you must E agree to the terms of the software license tir cet ncel the agreement Figure 6 7 Agree dialog Click Disagree to decline the agreement end the installation process
67. Send CTRL D before job check box Restore Defaults Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the PostScript tab to their original values 198 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows Introduction This chapter describes the features of the HP LaserJet P3005 printer unidrivers The unidrivers are the HP PCL 6 Unidriver the HP PCL 5 Unidriver and the HP Postscript 3 Emulation Unidriver PS Emulation Unidriver for Windows 2000 Windows XP 32 bit and 64 bit and Windows Server 2003 32 bit and 64 bit You can control print jobs from several places e Device control panel e Software program print dialog box e Driver user interface Generally for features that are duplicated in more than one location for instance the media input tray settings that are established in the software program take precedence over print driver settings Print driver settings in turn override device control panel settings When installing the print system software in Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 the HP PCL 6 Unidriveris installed by default Perform a Custom Installation to install the HP PCL 5 Unidriver and the PS Emulation Unidriver The following sections describe the options that are available on each tab of the HP PCL 6 Unidriver the HP PCL 5 Unidriver and the PS Emulation Unidriver This chapter also describes differences between t
68. Topics e Macintosh partition e CD versions Macintosh partition The HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD is divided into two partitions one for each of the following operating systems e MS Windows e Macintosh ENWW Macintosh printing system software 273 The HP Macintosh printing system software files all reside in the Macintosh partition The HP LaserJet Installer for Macintosh is at the root of the Macintosh CD Partition The user manuals in PDF format are grouped by language and are in the Manuals directory on the Macintosh partition of the printing system software CD CD versions The software CD for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer contains the files for installing the printing system software on the computer The HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD is available in three versions each of which contains printing system documentation in various languages as follows e CD 1 Americas part number Q7812 60111 e AR Arabic e DE German Deutsch e EN English e ES Spanish Espa ol e FR French Francais e EL Greek e IT Italian Italiano e NL Dutch Nederland e PT Brazilian Portuguese Portugu s e CD 2 Asia Pacific part number Q7812 60112 e ZHCN Simplified Chinese Chi Simp e ZHTW Traditional Chinese Chi Trad e EN English e KO Korean e TH Thai e CD 3 Europe Middle East Africa part number Q7812 60113 e CS Czech Cesky e DA Danish Dansk
69. Type dialog box opens see Figure 3 20 Installation Type dialog box on page 76 E 7 o z e Lo o Click Change Settings to open the Confirm Change Setting dialog box as shown in the following figure A WARNING When you change the TCP IP configuration by using the Change Settings button the actual settings are changed in the device Jetdirect card Make changes to these settings only with the advice of your network administrator ENWW Print driver installation instructions 69 HP LaserJet P3005 Setup e Confirm Changing Settings h Changing the network settings may result in a loss of connectivity to the printer j invent This printer is already communicating on the network Changing its settings may result in loss of communication Are you sure you want to change your printer s network settings Yes C No Click Help for more information lt Back Cancel Figure 3 13 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box Click No to retain the current settings and open the Installation Type dialog box see Figure 3 20 Installation Type dialog box on page 76 Click Yes to open the Change TCP IP Settings dialog box see Figure 3 18 Change TCP IP Settings dialog box on page 75 The Check Printer Connection dialog box which appears when the No want to install a different printer is selected in the Printer Found dialog box or if the system failed to detect the device over the ne
70. Wizard Welcome dialog box sss mem 88 Language dialog DOX sesasine nade el ccnl inae dn eed due diede d i dte eo d ded la rie 89 Printer Port dialog POX n dite tete dtr eene stats tege tie Fea t et dete ag eee 90 Browse for Printer dialog box i eeiec eterne etel eese di teen Ea nde delenda ee an 90 Printer Connection dialog boxset e pog RR ed e t UP o se aie 91 Specify TCP IP Port dialog bOx otopi riirii aiia nono ncnnnn nn cnc naar enne nn rca enne nre nere nnns 92 Port Creation Options dialog box sirenai AREE AEE enm eee nn AARNEN 93 Model dialog Boro db 94 Drivers didog POX tete dede o Dei rte n tem et hs 94 Driver Details dialog DOX a io REI ERREUR db n TE E HG PUR 95 Driver Configuration dialog box arets e a conc enne enne nennen nnne nnnm nnns 96 Driver Configuration dialog box 2 sssssssssseee enne eene rrr nennen nennen 97 Additional Software dialog DOX sssssssssessseeee eem nennen nennen nennen nnne nis 98 Additional software Details dialog box sssssssseeeee emm ee ennemis 99 Custom Installer Location dialog box ooooocccconnnoccccccnnnoanccccnnananncccnnn nana nem enne 100 Ready to Create Installer dialog box ooococconnnncccccnnnnocccccnanonancncccnnan nn kunniaan aii nni aiae akakataa 101 Printer Properties General tab oooococccccnccononoconconnnnconocnnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnn nennen rernm s nns n nns n nennen nnne 102 installing dialog DOX cc te nr t Eg ee d eee DELET
71. a configuration page on page 350 ET NOTE Before connecting to the device make sure that the device is not in Powersave mode Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control panel display Open a command window on the computer Type ftp TCP IP printer ADDRESS For example if the TCP IP address is 192 168 0 90 type ftp 192 168 0 90 Press Enter on the keyboard When prompted for the user name press Enter When prompted for the password press Enter Type bin at the command prompt Press Enter The message 200 Type set to I Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window Type put FILENAME where FILENAME is the name of the RFU file that was downloaded from the Web including the path For example type put C LJ P3005FW RFU and then press Enter EZ NOTE If the file name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example type the following path put c My Documents LJ P3005fw rfu The following series of messages appears in the command window 200 PORT command successful 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection 226 Ready 226 Processing Job 226 Transfer complete 354 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW After these messages appear a message containing transfer speed information appears 10 The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device This can take several minutes Let the process
72. and close the installer Click Agree to accept the agreement The Easy Install dialog appears as shown in the following figure Tra 7 7 3 7 O HP Laserjet v6 X Easy Install HJ 8 Introduction Click the Install button to install 6 Read Me Print 8 License Configuration 8 Installation Type e installir Finisf Disk space available gt 4GB Approximate disk space needed 55 056K Figure 6 8 Easy Install dialog The default option in the drop down menu at the top of the screen is Easy Install You can also choose Custom Install in the same menu as shown in the following figure 282 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW HP Laserjet v6 Custom Install 8 Introduction M Print O 6 Read Me M Configuration Q 8 License 8 Installation Type e Installing e Finish Up Disk space available gt 4GB Approximate disk space needed 50 564K Figure 6 9 HP LaserJet Installer dialog custom install The Custom Install screen displays all of the options that are available on the printing system software CD Use the check boxes on the list to install the components that you want to install The Configuration installation option installs the HP EWS Configuration Utility which is used to access the HP EWS program For more information see HP Embedded Web Server EWS on page 320 The Print installation option installs the print system files The printing system files are installed in the System Library folder on the Macintosh har
73. and then press select 5 Press A up or V down until DELETE is highlighted on the device control panel and then press v select 6 Press select 7 Ifa PIN number is assigned to the job press A up or V down to select the first digit of the PIN and then press v select The number in the device control panel display changes to an asterisk Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number If no PIN number is assigned to the job continue with the next step 8 Press y select to delete the job E mail Alerts The E mail Alerts screen is available if the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is installed over a network connection It is not available when the MFP is installed over a USB connection Choose E mail Alerts to configure the HP LaserJet P3005 printer to send e mail notifications to users If a user name and password have been set you might need to obtain them from the IT administrator For more information see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide 316 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Ed Duplex Mode E mail Alerts Economode amp The selected printer can be configured to notify you about errors and other Toner Density events via e mail messages You can view or change these settings by clicking the button below Ww Resolution EE reaps Configuration EOperE mait Aterto senings Em Lock Resources EN Stored Jobs La E mail Alerts ta Network Settings OS Bonjour al Setting
74. apply to all of the pages of the document The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections available by default r Paper Options Size is 11 x 8 5 inches Letter z Use Different Paper Covers Source is Type is Figure 4 12 Paper Options group box default The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper Covers check box is selected For convenience the settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order e Sizeis on page 140 e Source is on page 145 e Type is on page 146 e Use Different Paper Covers on page 147 e Custom on page 141 Size is The Size is setting is a drop down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes 140 Chapter4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Custom ENWW ES NOTE When the mouse moves over the dimensions label the cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units You can specify size for all of the settings in the Paper Options group box When the media size is set in the driver the entire print job output uses that media size That is if the print job uses Letter size media any option that you select from the available Use Different Paper Covers options must also use Letter size media Because print driver settings are overridden by media size settings in most software progr
75. as Vector Select this setting to send graphics to the device as a combination of HP Graphics Language version 2 HP GL 2 and raster images This setting might produce higher quality output It is the default setting e Send Graphics as Raster Select this setting to send all graphics to the device as images composed of individual dots This setting might improve printing speed in some cases e Alternative Letterhead Mode When selected this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a tray whether printing on one or both sides of the sheet Load the paper the same as for printing on both sides If the printer tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either face up or face down load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown When this option is selected use one of the following options in the Type is setting e Letterhead e Preprinted ES NOTE Alternative Letterhead Mode is available only if the printer is equipped with an automatic duplexing unit Layout Options The Layout Options setting contains the Page Order setting Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of the document are printed Front to Back prints the document so that page 1 prints first Back to Front prints the document so that page 1 prints last ET NOTE The page ordering operation works on whole sheets of media rather than on individual logical pages Accordingly if Pages per Sheet on the Finish
76. available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option The Source is setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here The Type is drop down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports First Page Use the First Page option to select an alternative media size type or source for the first page of a document The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper Covers check box The First Page setting is selected by default Paper Options Size is 8 5811 inches Letter Custom M Use Different Paper Covers Front Cover ist Page Other Pages Last Page x e D sal Carine Source is Automatically Select 5d Type is Unspecified w Figure 4 15 First Page options The following are the First Page options e Size is drop down menu e Source is drop down menu e Type is drop down menu The Size is driver setting for the first page applies to the entire print job When this is set the setting becomes unavailable for all the other Use Different Paper Covers options The Source is setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document The list of source trays depends on the device accessories tha
77. binding If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1 it automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet Changing the Pages per Sheet setting manually to 4 6 9 or 16 pages per sheet disables the booklet setting Topics e Book and Booklet Printing e Print a booklet Book and Booklet Printing The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports book and booklet printing A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages It can have a different media type for the front cover first page other pages last page or back cover Use the settings on the Paper tab available when you select the Use Different Paper Covers check box to select the following printing options for the book e Front Cover e First Page e Other Pages e Last Page e Back Cover A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can then be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media Use the Booklet Layout drop down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings Print a booklet ENWW Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs 1 Click File 2 Click Print 3 Click Properties 4 Click the Finishing tab Finishing tab features 243 e e E o e E ou a5 0 gt fe o S 5 Select the Print on Both Sides check box 6 Inthe Booklet Layout drop down menu select the type of booklet printing that you want for example Right Ed
78. changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box However clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New all of the changes are saved and only the current unsaved changes can be canceled Effects tab features 233 e um 09 it e ou ac gt fe Oo S Current watermarks The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks both the predefined watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that have been created To create a new watermark click New The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it The name that you type in the Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the Watermark Details dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab To name the new watermark type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box To delete a watermark select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete A warning appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item Click Cancel if you want to keep the watermark Click OK to delete the selected watermark ET NOTE No more that 30 watermarks can exist in the Current Watermarks list at one time When the limit of 30 watermarks is reached the New bu
79. computer for up to 1 minute During this time the installer might appear to be stalled 5 When software installation is complete click Quit 6 Continue with the steps for setting up a device The software program that you use to finish setting up the device varies by operating system The following table shows the print setup tools that are available Table 6 1 Adding a device in Macintosh operating systems Operating System Print Center Printer Setup Utility Print amp Fax Mac OS X V10 2 8 x Mac OS X V10 3 x x Mac OS X V10 4 x x Detailed Mac OS X installation Topics e Main Install dialog sequence Main Install dialog sequence This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the Easy Install the typical installation option Ez NOTE If you are installing the device using a network connection you can connect the device to the network before installing the software but if you are installing the device using a USB connection install the software before connecting the USB cable Insert the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD in the CD ROM drive If the CD screen does not open automatically when the CD is put into the CD ROM drive double click the HP LaserJet P3005 CD ROM icon on the desktop to open the installer folder 278 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW ENWW Figure 6 1 HP LaserJet P3005 printer CD ROM icon The HP LaserJet dialog opens HP Laser
80. dede 78 Ready to Install dialog DOX cen eerie ener nenne EEE 79 Printer PropertiesGeneraltab ooooooccccccnncnoocoonconconncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnn non nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnninnn 80 Printer Properties Sharing tab eere rer EEEE ERR S Eee 81 Installing dialog DOX ce eect te enn rt enn emm nade terse nnne EAEE E Aa PAKANAE EE 82 FINISH dialog Boro EE 83 HP LaserJet P3005 Next Steps dialog box oooooooccccconoocccccconconcccccannnnnnnccnnnnnnnnccnnnn mener 84 Test Page dialog DOxX s bdo ei pte pem ita a make i abad tuns 84 FP Registration SCreen iecore ce teeth deed dina 85 Language Selection dialog DOR e certet redadas 87 xvii Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 4 15 Figure 4 16 Figure 4 17 Figure 4 18 Figure 4 19 Figure 4 20 Figure 4 21 Figure 4 22 Figure 4 23 Figure 4 24 Figure 4 25 Figure 4 26 Figure 4 27 Figure 4 28 Figure 4 29 Figure 4 30 xviii Welcome to the HP LaserJet P3005 Installation Customization Wizard screen 88 Installer Customization
81. destination lists with up to 20 recipients on each list By selecting the Remove Control Panel Supplies Status Messages option available on the Alerts setup screen that appears when you press the New Destination List button you can suppress the Cartridge low or Cartridge out supplies status messages on the control panel The message is suppressed at the control panel only if one or both of these alerts has first been selected to be received The Alerts screen is shown in the following figure ET NOTE In order for alerts to function outgoing e mail must be enabled To enable outgoing mail see Configuring outgoing e mail on page 331 UJ a a 05 Printers invent Information Setting Alerts Alerts are currently configured tar the following destination lists To make changes click the appropriate button next to the list Move the pointer over a button for more information Note In order for alerts to function outgoing mail must bv configured on the E mail Server page Currently no destinabon lists are configured I receive alerts Click New Destination List 0 contigure a new destination list New Destination List Figure 6 63 HP EWS Alerts screen For information about using the Alerts screen see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide AutoSend Use the AutoSend screen to send product configuration and supplies usage information periodically to e mail destinations of your choice such as service
82. device off and then on again If the HP LaserJet P3005 Series PPD does not appear in the Print Using pull down list turn the computer off and then on again then restart the setup process For more troubleshooting information see Troubleshooting the printer setup on page 297 If you want to use the IP Printing method carry out the following steps a Click the IP Printer tab al eoo Printer Browser O CA ce gt y Default Browser IP Printer Search Protocol HP Jet Direct Socket 8 Address e Enter host name or IP address 4 Queue ing Leave blank for default queue Name Location Print Using Please select a driver or printer model More Printers Add Figure 6 15 Printer Browser IP Printer tab b Choose HP Jet Direct Socket from the Protocol pull down menu This is the recommended setting for HP devices c Print the configuration pages To print the configuration pages follow these instructions i Press theMenu button to open the menus ii Press A the up arrow or V the down arrow to scroll to INFORMATION and then press v select 288 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW iii Press A up or V down to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION iv Press select to print the configuration pages d On the first configuration page under IPv4 find the IP Address Type this address into the Address field on the add printer screen e The Name Location and Pr
83. dobe Systems Incorporated Copyright 1991 1995 Microsoft Corporation Files PSCRIPT DRV HPB30054 PPD Figure 4 30 About dialog box Restore Defaults Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Paper tab to their original values Graphics tab features To gain access to the Graphics tab follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Properties 6 Click the Graphics tab The Graphics tab specifies the resolution halftoning and scaling settings for the device The following figure shows the Graphics tab 7 Ll co O a S CN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo ENWW HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 179 HP LaserJet P3005 PS Properties rote dentes ren 600 dpi J Figure 4 31 Graphics tab The Graphics tab contains the following controls e Resolution e Halftoning e Special e Scaling e Restore Defaults Resolution Use the Resolution drop down menu to specify the resolution for printing Resolution is measured in dots per inch dpi The following options are available The dpi setting for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is 600 dpi e 1200 e 600 dpi This is the default setting e 300 dpi 180 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Halftoning The Halftoning options specify values for the number of lines per inch frequency and angle of the pa
84. does on the screen but printing might take longer Click Send Fonts As to specify the format in which the TrueType fonts are sent to the device Send Fonts As Use this option to specify how TrueType fonts are downloaded 72 Ll co O a S EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo ENWW HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 183 Send Fonts As 2 x TrueType fonts Send TrueType fonts as Threshold to switch between downloading bitmap or outline fonts measured in pixels in pixel size at the current resolution 100 Favor system TrueType fonts over printer fonts that have the same name m PostScript fonts Send PostScript fonts as In Native Format y Cancel Restore Defaults Figure 4 34 Send Fonts As dialog box The following options are available e Send TrueType fonts as This control offers the following settings e Outlines Use this setting for scalable outlines e Bitmaps Use this setting for bitmaps e Type 42 Type 42 fonts are TrueType fonts with headers that enable them to be rendered by the PS Emulation Driver e Don t Send Use this setting if you do not want any TrueType fonts to be downloaded e Threshold to switch between downloading bitmap or outline fonts measured in pixels in pixel size at the current resolution Use this control to specify the size of the font in pixels at which the PS Emulation D
85. drivers 145 Source is settings unidrivers 219 sources and destinations 344 type commands 349 Type is settings PCL traditional drivers 146 Type is settings unidrivers 220 types and sizes supported 344 types supported 347 Usage Page 326 Paper Handling Options PCL traditional drivers 166 Paper Options PCL traditional drivers 140 unidrivers 216 Paper tab PCL traditional drivers 139 Paper Output settings unidrivers 206 Paper Quality tab unidrivers 211 parallel port direct connect installation 59 passwords 333 PCL documents printing 38 PCL files command line printing 361 PCL traditional drivers About button 162 accessing 109 Alternative Letterhead Mode 171 Basics tab 160 Booklet Printing 123 Configuration Status 163 Configure tab 164 custom paper sizes 348 device image 151 Document Options 118 document preview image 125 133 151 162 duplexing unit settings 167 Effects tab 131 Finishing tab 114 Fit to Page settings 132 Graphic settings 129 Help system 111 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 33 Ignore Application Collation 171 Include types in application source list setting 171 included 24 Job Storage enabling 169 Index 373 Job storage settings 152 margins 347 media supported 344 memory settings 171 Mopier Enabled settings 167 More Configuration Options 169 operating system support 8 Optional Paper Sources 168 Output Settings 127 129 Paper Handling Options 166 Paper Options 140 paper size com
86. drivers for MS Windows Introduction This chapter describes the features of the traditional print drivers for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me Control print jobs from several places e the device control panel e the software program print dialog box e the driver user interface Generally for features that are duplicated in more than one location for instance select the media input tray from any of them settings that are established in the software program take precedence over print driver settings Print driver settings in turn override device control panel settings Install the print drivers by using the printing system installer in Windows 98 SE or Windows Me the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default You can install the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver by performing a Custom Installation This chapter describes the options that are available on each tab of the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver Properties print driver interface for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me This chapter also describes differences between the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver Topics e X Access to print drivers in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me e Help system 7 Li co tO o c cw O me oe u A o I gt pa Lo e Finishing tab features e Effects tab features e Paper tab features e Job Storage tab features e Basics tab fea
87. drivers to see whether the correct and most up to date print drivers are installed e Order supplies Open the HP SureSupply Web page and shop online for HP LaserJet P3005 printer supplies e Show me how Connect to a Web page that provides step by step instructions for performing specific tasks The following information is available Clear jams Load trays Load special media Print both sides Supported paper More Help If the computer has Internet access select any of these items and click Go to open the corresponding HP Web page Device services Click the Device and Supplies status icon to open the Device Status screen of the HP EWS 256 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Device Settings tab features The Device Settings tab is in the Properties window for the print driver To gain access to the Device Settings tab follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Properties 6 Click the Device Settings tab The Device Settings tab contains controls for media handling devices and controls for managing the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Available options depend on the driver and the particular feature The following figure shows the Device Settings tab for the HP PCL 6 Uni
88. e Change TCP IP Settings h Specify new TCP IP settings if invent Use the following TCP IP settings for the printer IP Address 10 48 119 Suggest Settings Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 10 10 483 J v Use Default Port Name lt Back Cancel Figure 3 18 Change TCP IP Settings dialog box If you make a change in the IP Address Subnet Mask or Gateway fields without clicking Next and then click Suggest Settings the fields refresh with the original information that was found by the installer and reported in the Printer Found screen Type a different TCP IP Address Subnet Mask or Gateway address and then click Next to open the Confirm Network Settings dialog box see Figure 3 12 Confirm Network Settings dialog box on page 69 If you clear the Use Default Port Name check box and click Next the Set Port Name dialog box opens see Figure 3 17 Set Port Name dialog box on page 74 Print driver installation instructions 75 E o z e po o HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Select your printer model Model HP LaserJet P3004 HP LaserJet P3005 lt Back Cancel Figure 3 19 Model dialog box Select the device model and click Next HP LaserJet P3005 Setup x Installation Type UJ P Select the installation type you prefer invent Basic Installation Installs the minimum set of drivers and software Recommended for servers or PCs
89. e AMD Athlon 64 AMD Opteron Intel Xeon or Pentium 4 with EMT64 e Apple Mac OS X V10 2 8 and later In MS Windows operating systems the following features are available with the HP LaserJet P3005 printer e Automatic configuration e Driver updates after a new configuration e Preconfiguration ET NOTE For the latest information about the printing system software components see the readme files on the CD For additional information about installing the printing system software see the Hewlett Packard LaserJet P3005 Series Printing System Install Notes on the printing system software CD All of the drivers provide access to paper handling and print quality features Topics e HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation drivers e Select the best print driver e Print driver version numbers for MS Windows operating systems ENWW MS Windows printing system software 23 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation drivers All of the MS Windows drivers are supported in Microsoft 32 bit operating systems Separate versions of the HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers are available for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 64 bit operating systems These 64 bit drivers are not included on the printing system software CD but they can be downloaded from the following HP Web site www hp com go lip3005_software The following drivers are available on the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD e The HP PCL 6 Unidriver for Windows
90. enable the folder view Select Tools then select Internet Options and then select the Advanced tab Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites Click OK to save the setting Print ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection If the HP LaserJet P3005 uses a direct network connection use file transfer protocol FTP to print a print ready file Complete the following steps for the operating system 1 N SOY CO e e 10 11 Take note of the TCP IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the Configuration page printout To print a configuration page see Print a configuration page on page 350 Open a command window on the computer Type ftp TCP IP printer ADDRESS For example if the TCP IP address is 192 168 0 90 type the following ftp 192 168 0 90 Press Enter on the keyboard When prompted for the user name press Enter When prompted for the password press Enter Type bin at the command prompt Press Enter The message 200 Types set to Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window Type put FILENAME where FILENAME is the name of the print ready file to be printed including the path For example type the following put C LJ P3005FW PDF Ez NOTE Ifthe file name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example type put c NMy Documents LJ P300
91. false or null MediaSource Automatically Select HP NA NA NA unidrivers Automatically Select HP 7 1 null false traditional PCL drivers or Printer Auto Select HP unidrivers e a l A A A A A KI E A A A AA CA CAEN A AA AA A MCI A A A A A AA 1 For the string value you must use include the quotation marks around the variable For example ubyte array TRAY2 MediaSource is the PCL 6 command for tray 2 Driver supported media sizes ENWW The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the Size Is drop down menu on the Paper tab The list order can vary depending on the device and operating system The list contains all of the following sizes and might contain sizes from other drivers Table 7 3 Supported media sizes and attributes Paper sizes Width Height PCL 6 Letter 216 mm 279 mm LETTER 8 5 inches 11 0 inches Letter R 279 mm 216 mm 11 inches 8 0 inches Statement 140 mm 216 mm STATEMENT 5 5 inches 8 5 inches 8K 269 mm 391 mm 10 6 inches 15 4 inches 8K 259 mm 368 mm 10 2 inches 14 5 inches 8K 273 mm 394 mm ROC8K 10 75 inches 15 5 inches 16K 184 mm 260 mm 7 24 inches 10 24 inches 16K 195 mm 197 mm 7 68 inches 7 75 inches 16K 273 mm 197 mm ROC16K 10 75 inches 7 75 inches Media attributes 345 eu O m 97 c Tes cb 0 97 c LL Table 7 3 Supported media sizes and attributes con
92. finish without further interaction with the device or the computer The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel ET NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update this can happen more than once At the end of the update process the READY message appears on the control panel Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message 11 Printa configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update 12 Atthe command prompt type bye to exit the FTP command 13 Atthe command prompt type exit to return to the MS Windows interface Remote firmware update through a local MS Windows port Es m O m 97 c Ta 0 0 97 c If the device is connected through a local port parallel then you can send the RFU file directly to the device by using a COPY command from a command prompt or an MS DOS window Topics e Windows 98 SE or Windows Me e Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 Windows 98 SE or Windows Me 1 From a command prompt or in an MS DOS window type the following Mode lptl p ET NOTE Ifthe device is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1 then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode command 2 Press Enter on the keyboard The response you receive should be si
93. in network environments Full Installation Installs pcl 6 driver and software including status alerting and troubleshooting tools Recommended For PCs in direct connect or in home small network environments C Custom Installation Provides more Flexibility For installing drivers and software Recommended For advanced users and system administrators Details lt Back Cancel Figure 3 20 Installation Type dialog box 76 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW If the device is directly connected USB or parallel Full Installation is the default If the device is network connected Basic Installation is the default ET NOTE The components of a Full Installation might vary from device to device Click Basic Installation to install the minimum set of drivers and software This is the recommended installation type for servers or computers in network environments If you click Basic Installation and then click Next the Ready to Install dialog box opens see Figure 3 23 Ready to Install dialog box on page 79 If you select Custom Installation and then click Next the Drivers dialog box opens as shown in the following figure HP Laser Jet P3005 Setup Drivers Select the printer drivers to install Drivers Driver Name Size HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 6 Driver 12208 KB CHP LaserJet P3005 PCL Se Driver 12208 KB oO HP LaserJet P3005 PS Driver 12208 KB Details Space Required
94. installed j invent a Please wait while the HP LaserJet P3005 is installed This may take several minutes Status Cancel Figure 3 26 Installing dialog box This dialog box remains on the screen until the status bar fills When the installation is complete the Finish dialog box appears as shown in the following figure 82 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Finish Your HP LaserJet P3005 has been successfully installed Click Finish to close the installer Figure 3 27 Finish dialog box Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and complete the installation ET NOTE Depending on the type of installation and selected options you might or might not be presented with some additional steps after you click Finish E o z e xe o The HP LaserJet P3005 Next Steps dialog box appears ENWW Print driver installation instructions 83 i HP LaserJet P3005 Next Steps E Congratulations D Now that your printer has been successfully installed here are some Y optional steps invent Print Driver Test Page Register Product Figure 3 28 HP LaserJet P3005 Next Steps dialog box To verify that the printer is connected click Print Driver Test Page Test Page HP LJ P3005 D j invent test page is now being sent to the printer Depending on the speed of your printer it may take a minute or
95. level 3 emulation PPD which is available on the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD or from the HP Web site When using the Adobe PostScript print driver users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements as stated on the Adobe Web site at the following Web site www adobe com support downloads license html See the Font support on page 50 section of this STR for a list of the additional fonts Help system The PS Emulation Driver includes the following Help systems to provide assistance with printing and configuration options ET NOTE Bubble Help a feature of HP traditional PCL drivers is not available in the PS Emulation Driver What s this Help Windows 98 SE and Windows Me support What s this Help You can gain access to What s this Help messages in any of the following ways e Right click a control and then click What s this A pop up Help window appears e Click the button at the upper right corner of the frame next to the X to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark Use this special cursor to select a control and the pop up Help window for that feature appears e Pressthe F1 key and the Help window for the currently selected control appears Context sensitive Help When you press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box a context sensitive Help message appears Paper tab features To gain access to the Paper tab follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Setti
96. lowercase and 0 through 9 so that the name can appear on the device control panel display If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters the character is removed from the edit field along with all of the characters that follow it If you try to type more than 16 characters any character beyond 16 is truncated When the dialog box is closed or as soon as the focus is removed from the control that is when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected an empty string is replaced with Automatic The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the device control panel display If Job Name Exists When you store a print job you can create a print job name or the device software can assign one automatically If a print job with the same name already exists the new print job will overwrite the existing print job To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job because both have the same name select Use Job Name 1 999 After you create the print job name or when one is created automatically the device software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the end of the print job name to make the name unique Select Replace Existing File if you always want the device software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name Using job storage features when print
97. media stack into the input tray to print the second side The device pauses while the user makes this adjustment Mopier Enabled The multiple original print mopy function is an HP designed feature that produces multiple collated copies from a single print job Multiple original printing mopying increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the device once and then temporarily storing itin memory The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created controlled managed and finished from the computer which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports the transmit once mopying feature when the device has a minimum total memory of 80 MB and the Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure tab is on Mopier mode and collation ENWW Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions The print driver performs mopying sending multiple original print jobs to the device Either the print driver or the document software program controls collation Click to clear the Mopier Enabled selection on the Configure tab to disable the feature Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Ignore Application Collation check box in the More Configuration Options dialog box that appears when you click More on the Configure tab You can clear the check box whic
98. menu 2 Change the width or height values 1 Select a saved item from the drop down menu 3 2 lt user typed text gt Save Click Save 3 E 3 Type something into the Name drop down menu 2 Change the width or height values 2 S 2 Select a saved item from the drop down menu 3 o 3 name of saved item Delete Click Delete 1 5 0 Type something into the Name drop down menu 4 E Change the width or height values 1 3 Select a saved item from the drop down menu 3 ENWW Paper tab features 143 Table 4 4 Name drop down menu text strings continued State Drop down menu Button label Action Next state contents 4 lt user typed text gt Rename Click Rename when the name is unique 3 Click Rename when the name is a duplicate 4 Type something into the Name drop down menu 4 Change the width or height values 2 Select a saved item from the drop down menu 3 Custom size width and height controls Change the width and height values either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes or by using the up and down arrows The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry See Custom width and height control limits on page 144 If units are in millimeters the cu
99. not available when Private Job is selected Type a 4 digit PIN number in the box provided The stored job is sent to the device where you must type the 4 digit PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job Job Notification Options Clicking a Job Storage Mode selection causes the User Name and Job Name options to become available The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default The Display Job ID when printing option causes a pop up dialog box to appear when the job storage print job is printed The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job as well as the device name port and location User Name ENWW Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the device control panel The following are the User Name settings e Windows User Name This option associates your MS Windows user name with the stored print job The MS Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the Windows User Name options e Custom Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job When you click Custom the text field below the option becomes available The User Name field can contain no more than 16 characters and is limited to A through Z and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the device control panel display If you try to type a lowercase character it automatically shifts to uppercase If you try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than
100. of the RFU file that you downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure If the filename is listed select it Click Upload to move the RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server Refresh the browser Select the RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop down menu Click Update Firmware HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected RFU file to the device The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device This can take several minutes Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel ET NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update this can happen more than once At the end of the update process the READY message appears on the control panel Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update Remote firmware updates 359 Es y O m 97 c Ta 0 0 e c HP Web Jetadmin V7 8 and later can also be used to perform multiple or unattended installations Complete the following steps for multiple or unattended installations 1 Start HP Web Jetadmin 2 Create a device group A simple way to do this is to follow these steps a Click
101. print the watermark in different orientations on the page All settings center the watermark string within the page the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement The following settings are available e Diagonal This is the default setting Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the lower left to upper right corners of the page e Horizontal Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid left and mid right edges of the page e Custom Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page Use the numeric spin box to select the angle Document preview image The document preview image is a line drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text The document preview image appears in the upper right corner of the Watermark Details dialog box The document preview image changes to reflect the modifications that you make in the Watermark Details dialog box Font Attributes Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading size and style of the font 136 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls e Name The Name drop down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system The default is language dependent e Color The Color drop down menu contains only one option Gray e Shading The de
102. queue with the incorrect type for example Generic PostScript Printer 3 Reinstall the device software 4 Turn the computer off and then on again 5 Reconnect the USB cable from the computer to the device If these steps do not resolve the problem delete the incorrect print queue click Add choose the device from the list and then browse manually for the HP LaserJet P3005 Series PPD Uninstall the Macintosh printing system ENWW Follow these instructions to uninstall the Macintosh Printing System 1 Browse to the folder containing the PPDs In Mac OS X V10 2 8 or later the PPDs are installed in System Library Printers PPDs Contents Resources lang lproj where lang is the appropriate language 2 Choose the HP LaserJet P3005 gz file and drag it to Trash Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 297 3 Empty the Trash 4 To uninstall the HP Device Configuration application and supporting files go to Applications HP EWS Device Configuration and run the HP Uninstaller application Macintosh HP Printer Utility The HP Printer Utility is a software program that gives you access to the device in Mac OS X The HP Printer Utility is available only in Mac OS X V10 2 8 and later The HP Printer Utility does not work when it is installed by using the AppleTalk protocol Use IP Bonjour or Rendezvous to enable the HP Printer Utility Topics e Access to the HP Printer Utility e Supplies Status o Devi
103. settings a Lower settings result in slightly reduced printing quality but save on toner usage re available 1 2 3 4 5 Resolution 312 Under Printer Settings choose Resolution to open the Default Resolution screen as shown in the following figure HP Support Y Printer Settings EL Duplex Mode Economode amp Toner Density Resolution O Trays Configuration EF Lock Resources jr Stored Jobs a E mail Alerts am HP Printer Utility Default Resolution Set the resolution setting to be used as the default for the selected printer Resolution FASTRES 1200 HJ Resolution Enhancement Technology REt Set the REt level to be used as the default for the selected printer REt Level MEDIUM 5 63 Printer Name NPI937F3D Model Name HP Laserjet P3005 Printer Status Idle Supplies Genuine HP Figure 6 43 Default Resolution screen The following dots per inch dpi settings are available in the Default Resolution drop down menu 300 600 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW e FASTRES 1200 e PRORES 1200 ET NOTE When a PRORES1200 setting is selected documents are printed using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 dpi This is the best print quality but printing speed is slower than for documents printed on the FASTRES 1200 setting which uses a resolution of 1200 x 600 dpi When the PRORES 1200 setting is selected documents are printed using a resolution of 1200 x
104. settings on the driver tabs control print job output and become the default settings for all software programs The following print driver tabs are available in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me e General e Details e Color Management e Sharing e Finishing ENWW Access to print drivers in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me 109 e Effects e Paper e Job Storage e Basics e Configure Only device specific HP driver tabs are described in this STR the other driver tabs are part of the operating system The following tabs are described e Finishing e Effects e Paper e Job Storage ET NOTE The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage setting is Enabled on the Configure tab Click OK on the Configure tab to make the settings take effect e Configure e Basics e Configure 110 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Help system The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver include a full featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options Topics e What s this Help e Context sensitive Help e Incompatible Options messages e Bubble Help What s this Help Windows 98 SE and Windows Me support What s this Help Gain access to What s this Help messages in any of the following ways e Right click a control and then click What s this A pop up Help window appears e Click the button at the upper right corner of the fram
105. spin box to select the angle Font Attributes Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading size and style of the font 234 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls Name The Name drop down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system The default is language dependent Color The Color drop down menu contains only one option Gray Shading The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop down menu e Lightest e X Very Light default e Light e Medium Light e Medium e Medium Dark e Dark e Very Dark e Darkest These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used Select Light to produce a lightly saturated gray watermark Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark Select Darkest to produce a black watermark Size Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu The default point size is language dependent Style The following settings are available e Regular e Bold e ltalic e Bold Italic The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular Default watermark settings ENWW The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks Effects tab features 235 BS e E
106. te tdt duc eoe de eem te pta dead 154 efztipecsr lop MM RT EE 160 About This Driver dialog box 2 iine etii de A dite ient ere Re eddie eee Binh 163 Configure tab cec C be e eee 165 More Configuration Options dialog DOX oo eee eee ee eee eee eene nnns 169 Configure Font Cards dialog box oooooccccconnnoccccccconononcnnccnnnnonncnncnnnnnnncnc cnn nan emen nne enne a 170 Paper tab ices ER 175 Custom designed size dialog box cccceecccceeeee eee annann erent nese nano nn enne 176 Page dimensions INCAS irritat ee i tob ie eate t e bate E EEE 177 Unprintable Area dialog box ooooooococcccccnnnccconccoccconannnnnnnccnnnnnn enne nennen nnne nennen nennen nnns 178 More Paper Options dialog box a E a a EEE E a E A 178 NS TN 179 ENWW Figure 4 31 Figure 4 32 Figure 4 33 Figure 4 34 Figure 4 35 Figure 4 36 Figure 4 37 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 5 23 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Figure 6 13 Figure 6 14 Figure 6 15 Figure 6 16 Figure 6 17 Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 ENWW Graphics tab eden ato ure t etit a ete d a t nte t Oe s 180 gencer lom nM 1
107. that runs from the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD The CD browser version of Acrobat Reader is in English only but can be used to open localized versions of PDF documents The Adobe Acrobat Reader software is not installed on the computer and can only run while the printing system software CD is in the CD ROM drive Adobe Acrobat Reader is also available at the following Web site www adobe com Support Click the following links to obtain optional software programs for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer and find support information on other HP Web sites e Click HP Web Jetadmin to download HP Web Jetadmin software from the Web for a Web browser based network management tool e Click Supplies for information about ordering HP LaserJet P3005 printer supplies e Click Product Information to open the HP Instant Support Web page for support information and updates for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer e Click hp com to go to the HP home Web page for information about products and services support drivers and HP online stores Installer features The common installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for the device The common installer is available for the Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems The common installer offers the following features e The HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD features an interactive software interface e Network connection is integrated so that yo
108. that the equivalent printer font does not support Select Download as Softfont to download TrueType fonts for printing instead of using printer fonts Advanced tab features 207 m e m 0 y os zo L ssc ss Qa a Document Options The Document Options setting contains the following controls e Advanced Printing Features e Print Optimizations Advanced Printing Features When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled metafile spooling is turned on and Finishing tab options such as Page Order Booklet Layout and Pages per Sheet are available depending on the device For normal printing leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at the default Enabled If compatibility problems occur disable the feature However some advanced printing features might still be available in the print driver even if they have been disabled Selecting an advanced printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the Advanced tab automatically makes the feature available Print Optimizations ET NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5 5 Unidriver They are not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled When this feature is enabled and a document contains overlapping text and graphics the text that is placed on top of a graphic might not print correctly If the printed output is not correct disable this feature Wh
109. the Device Settings tab to make the settings take effect Properties driver tabs This set of tabs controls the driver behavior and driver connections To gain access to the Properties tabs follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Properties The following Properties print driver tabs are available e General e Sharing e Ports e Advanced Security e Device Settings e About Only device specific HP driver tabs are described in this document the other driver tabs are part of the operating system The following Properties driver tabs are described in this document e Device Settings e About 202 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Help system The HP PCL 6 Unidriver the HP PCL 5 Unidriver and the PS Emulation Unidriver include a full featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options ET NOTE Bubble Help a feature of HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers is not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver HP PCL 5 Unidriver and PS Emulation Unidriver What s this Help Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 support What s this Help Access What s this Help messages in any of the following ways e Right click a c
110. the HPEWS conie oe tir ee nei ate 320 Information tabe eae eec Ute ae cepe dece ePi e Tee de ee 322 Device Otatus die ttd itla ades tbt a rca tea p ecce e aud aste 322 Contiguration page at ais 323 Supplies Status page de loa dees a i Bt 324 Event E092 ooi repete erii oti ied et nd 325 Usage Page ett ee get d repu teuer Poets 326 Device Information sssssssssssssenenenemnee n meer nnne 327 Control Panel Snaps Oi a A er l eene 327 Pres tado a dat ated um De o Reus a cosi oh acts 328 Printing a file or updating firmware from the Print screen 329 Settings TaD ras aaea E e pne E etie tetuer aden aio 329 Configure Device aie iwi wil aR Ab ed et e e el ad bd d tes 329 Using the menus on the Configure Device screen 330 Esmail Server senm e e i bt tete 330 Configuring outgoing e mail sse 331 Configuring the return e mail address ssesesss 331 Alerts oio ete A o ient tu tei n dm 331 Autoobend A eii i cuixIM MI M se acne M se Er e mage eiu d 332 Turn on the AutoSend feature sssssssssee 333 DECI A AE d ud t e bee dodo 333 Edit Other Einks i een niet ain ened eed idet Led de ia tbc dud 334 Adding A Maui dii eto ots 335 Removing a lINK ioien naisinime dne biete e denda 335 Device Information ise Hd o e et fee m eee eee 335 Eanguage nei det Lied ais 335 Date amp iMesh ele 336 Date Time Fo
111. the easiest method and is the best method to use if the device is installed on your local network IP Printing must be used if you are installing the device on a different network If you are using Bonjour carry out the following steps a Click the Default Browser tab e 66 Printer Browser ey A am Q o X Default Browser AP Printer f Search am Connection HP Color Laserjet CM1017 A55C5E Bonjour HP Laserjet 4100 Series AppleTalk HP LaserJet 8100 Series AppleTalk HP LaserJet 9000 MFP AppleTalk HP LaserJet P2015 Series 9EB24A Bonjour HP Laserjet P3005 AppleTalk HP Laserjet P3005 937F3D Bonjour Laserjet 4 Plus AppleTalk Name HP Laserjet P3005 937F3D Location Print Using HP LaserJet P3005 O na Figure 6 14 Default Browser tab b Choose the HP LaserJet P3005 from the list The software verifies that the device is connected to the network and the Print Using field is automatically populated with the correct PPD for the device Ez NOTE Ifyou are on a network that has more than one HP LaserJet P3005 print a configuration page and match the Bonjour Printer Name to the name on the list to identify the device you are installing See Print a configuration page on page 350 ENWW Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 287 NOTE If the HP LaserJet P3005 does not appear in the list verify that the device is on and connected to the network then try turning the
112. the following controls in the PS Emulation Unidriver 1200 dpi FastRes 1200 190 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW e 600 dpi e 300 dpi Watermark The Watermark feature contains the following options e None default e Draft e Company Confidential e Company Proprietary e Company Private e Confidential e Copy e Copyright e File Copy e Final e For Internal Use Only e Preliminary e Proof e Review Copy e Sample e Top Secret e Urgent e Custom Watermark Pages per Sheet The Watermark Pages per Sheet feature contains the following options e 1 default 7 La co TO ot EN O me oe Sw 0 c r2 i Lo e gt 2 Watermark Font The Watermark Font feature contains the following options e Courier Bold e Helvetica Bold default e Times Bold ENWW HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 191 Watermark Size Watermark Size Settings for the watermark size range from 24 points to 90 points The default is 48 points Watermark Angle Watermark Angle Settings for the watermark angle range from 90 to 90 in 15 intervals The default is a 45 angle Watermark Style The Watermark Style feature contains the following options e Narrow Outline e Medium Outline default e Wide Outline e Wide Halo Outline e Filled Watermark Intensity The Watermark Intensity feature contains the following options e Darkest e Darker e Dark
113. the following steps to install the print drivers by using the MS Windows Add Printer wizard E 2 o0 E e Lo E z o Ez NOTE If the computer is running a 64 bit MS Windows operating system you must install the corresponding 64 bit print driver after downloading it from the Web 1 Insert the CD in the CD ROM drive 2 Go to the Add a printer wizard in MS Windows In Windows XP click Start on the desktop click Settings and then click Printers and Faxes The Printers and Faxes window appears Click Add a printer The Add a printer wizard screen appears In Windows 98 SE SE Windows Me and Windows 2000 click Start on the desktop click Settings click Printers and then click Add a printer The Add a printer wizard screen appears 3 Use the Add a printer wizard to find and connect to the device The print drivers are loaded as a part of this process 4 Select the Have disk option and navigate to one of the print driver files on the software CD as shown in the following lists or navigate to the print driver file that has been downloaded from the Web ENWW Print driver installation instructions 85 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 e Toinstall the HP PCL 6 Unidriver select the following file Drivers your operating system PCL6 hpc3005c inf e Toinstall the HP PCL 5 Unidriver select the following file Drivers your operating system PCL5 hpc3005b inf e Toinstall the PS Emulation Un
114. the following table The models are as follows e P3005 HP LaserJet P3005 e X P3005n HP LaserJet P3005n e P3005tn HP LaserJet P3005dn e P3005dtn HP LaserJet P3005x Table 4 7 Printer model configuration settings Driver location Setting P3005 P3005n P3005tn P3005dtn Configuration tab Duplexing Unit Available not Available not Available not Selected selected selected selected Allow Manual Duplexing Selected Selected Selected Selected Mopier Enabled Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Selected Optional Paper Sources None None None HP 500 Sheet Input Tray More Configuration Options dialog box Printer Hard Disk Available not selected and not supported by the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Available not selected and not supported by the HP LaserJet P3 Available not selected and not supported by the HP LaserJet P Available not selected and not supported by the HP LaserJet P 005 printer 3005 printer 3005 printer Job Storage Enabled Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Selected Font Card s Available not Available not Available not Available not selected selected selected selected Alternative Letterhead Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Available not Mode selected Ignore Application Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Available not Collation selected Total Memory 48 MB 64 MB 64 MB 128 MB Driver work space DWS 6 0 MB 14 0 MB 14 0 MB 46 0 MB Inclu
115. these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings e Click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home Right click the device name Click Properties Click the Device Settings tab Select Job Storage o N 0 a p Select Disabled in the Change Job Storage Setting dialog box that appears ET NOTE When the job storage feature is disabled the Job Storage driver tab is not visible If the job storage feature is enabled with at least 80 MB of total memory three Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab e Off e Proof and Hold e Private Job Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed e Quick Copy e Stored Job The following figure shows the Job Storage tab Job Storage tab features 247 BS e E o e E ou ac 0 gt fe o S 2 HP LJ P3005 PCL6 Printing Preferences Advanced Paper Quality Effects Finishing Job Storage Services Print Task Quick Sets Default Print Settinas Y Your job will be printed but not stored on the printer Job Storage Mode User Name Off Windows User Name Proof and Hold Private Job Job Name Automatic Require PIN PIN to Print D when printing Figure 5 17 Job Storage tab ET NOT
116. thick media Manually printing on the second side of a page is available in the HP PCL 6 PCL 5 or PS emulation unidriver If a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver the printer automatically prints on both sides of media types that are supported for automatic duplexing Letter A4 Legal and 8 5 x 13 only and forces manual printing on both sides for media types that are not supported To make the Print on Both Sides Manually check box available in the document options select the Allow Manual Duplexing option on the Device Settings tab in the Properties print driver tabs 240 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW To print on both sides manually while using media thatis supported for automatic duplexing select and apply the Not Installed setting on the Duplex Unit for 2 Sided Printing option on the Device Settings tab Select the media type that corresponds to the media that you are using for the print job The following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side e Plain e Preprinted e Letterhead e X Prepunched e Bond e Recycled e Color e Rough Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side but no change occurs to the print mode Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side To print a multiple page document follow these steps 1 Select the Print on Both Sides
117. to edge printing for Letter size media use a larger than letter size media select the Edge to Edge Printing option and trim the margin so that the printed image extends to the edge of the page Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print quality settings in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver as shown in the following figure Print Quality Details x Current Setting 4 r Output Settings This is the Best Quality setting Resolution 600 dpi Graphics Settings 4 Rendering Mode Ecce Enhancement technology S C Send Graphics as Vector C on C Send Graphics as Raster Send Page as Raster v Scale Patterns WYSIWYG Print all Text as Black Font Settings Send TrueType as Bitmaps Figure 4 7 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver The following options are available Current Setting Graphic Settings Font Settings Output Settings 128 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Current Setting The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box the setting changes from the setting on the Finishing tab for instance This is the Best Quality setting the default setting or This is the Faster Printing setting to This is a Custom setting G
118. to send all data except special control characters in binary 8 bit format The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format When you click Binary all data except special control characters is sent in binary 8 bit format The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format Send Ctrl D Before Each Job This control specifies whether the device will be reset at the beginning of every postscript document The default setting is No Pressing Ctrl D resets the device to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job Using Ctrl D might cause a print job to fail if the device is connected through a network If the document fails to print when sent to a device connected through parallel or serial ports change No to Yes Send Ctrl D After Each Job This control specifies whether the device is reset at the end of every postscript document The default setting is Yes Pressing Ctrl D resets the device to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job Using Ctrl D might cause a print job to fail if the device is connected through a network If the document fails to print when sent to a network printer change Yes to No 262 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Convert Gray T
119. two before the page is printed The test page briefly demonstrates the printer s ability to print graphics and text and it provides technical information about the printer driver If the test page printed click OK If the test page did not print click Troubleshoot Troubleshoot Figure 3 29 Test Page dialog box If the test page prints correctly click OK to continue If it does not print click Troubleshoot to see what printer connection problems exist 84 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW If you have access to the Internet you can register your device online In the Congratulations dialog box click Register Now to open the HP Registration Web site 3A Sign up now Sign up now Welcome By taking just a few moments to sign up you can enjoy Quicker service and more efficient support to fit your busy lifestyle a Timely driver and software update notification The latest product support alerts to maximize your productivity a Customized e newsletters Inaded with tips and tricks HP respects your privacy With HP your personal information remains private and is not shared with anyone outside of HP By clicking Next you will transmit HP product and PC confiquration information to HP To view HP s full privacy statement visit wrew hp com Please connect to the Internet before clicking Next Figure 3 30 HP Registration screen Install print drivers by using Add Printer Use
120. update fails because the print engine firmware is corrupted SEND RFU UPGRADE If this message appears the update must now be sent only by a computer that is ON PARALLEL PORT attached to the parallel port of the device ET NOTE To verify that the firmware update succeeded print a new configuration page from the control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser Complete the following steps to update the printer firmware by using file transfer protocol FTP through a browser eu m m 97 c des o 0 e c LL ET NOTE Thefollowing instructions can be used on MS Windows or Macintosh operating systems 1 Make note of the TCP IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page The EIO Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout To print a configuration page see Print a configuration page on page 350 2 Open a Web browser window 3 Inthe address line of the browser type ftp lt IPADDRESS gt where lt IPADDRESS gt is the TCP IP address of your device For example if the TCP IP address is 192 168 0 90 type FTP 192 168 0 90 4 Locate the downloaded RFU file for the device 5 Drag and drop the RFU file onto the PORT1 icon or onto any open space in the browser window Ez NOTE If the PORT icon does not appear as a folder name you might have to enable folder viewing fo
121. when the down arrow is used When you click another group box or leave the Basics tab invalid entries into the edit box such as non numerical input numbers less than 1 or numbers greater than the maximum allowed are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box The default number of copies is 1 Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs conflicts between the software program that you are using and the driver can arise In most cases the software program and the driver communicate so that the number of copies set in one location such as the software program will appear in the other such as the driver ET NOTE For some software programs this communication does not take place and the copies values are treated independently For these software programs setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies 10 x 10 being printed It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the software program wherever possible Orientation ENWW Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page and does not affect the way that media feeds into the printer Specify the orientation of the print job from three available orientations portrait landscape and rotated The default orientation is Portrait ET NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page so the page orientation in the driver is us
122. 0 10 48 119 RAM DISK Storage 198 MB Capacity Installed DIMM Memory 256 MR On Board Memory System 64MB Total RAM 320 MB DWS 131 00 Automatic Resource Saving Enabled Control Panel Lock NONE Control Panel Password DISABLED Device Type RAM DISK Write Protect DISABLED File System Access PJL ENABLED PML ENABLED NFS ENABLED PostScript ENABLED DirectPors USRIFFF 1284 FNARLED Paper Trays and Options Default Paper Size LETTER Tray 1 Size ANY SIZE Tray 1 Type ANYTYPE Tray2 Size LETTER Tray2 Type PLAIN Duplex Unit Internal Input Trays 1 TRAY 1 100 Sheets 2 TRAY 2 500 Sheets Oulpul Bins 1 STANDARD TOP BN 250 Sheets Face Down v Figure 2 3 HP EWS Information tab Configuration Page screen ET NOTE This figure is provided only as an example 40 Chapter2 Software description ENWW Settings tab The following information is available on the HP EWS Settings tab Click the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Settings tab to view the information The Settings tab is shown in the Configure device on page 41 section Not all of the screens on the tab are shown in this STR For more information see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide e Configure Device Use the Configure Device screen to print device information pages and configure the device remotely e X E mail Server Use the E mail Server screen to configure e mail settings for outgoing e mail e Alerts IT administrators can configure the dev
123. 00 0 350 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site The remote firmware update RFU file and an associated readme file are packaged together as a self extracting EXE file For detailed instructions about how to download the EXE file go to the following URL www hp com go ljp3005 firmware The EXE file consists of a readme file and the RFU file ET NOTE For UNIX systems the remote firmware update file is a TAR file Downloading the new firmware to the device For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web go to www hp com support ljp3005 The device can receive an RFU update when the device is in a READY state The device waits for all of the I O channels to become idle before performing the update O m 97 e Tes o 0 e c LL Ez NOTE If the firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM any menu settings that are changed from the default settings will return to default settings The settings must be changed again if you want them to be different from the defaults Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types default symbol sets and Web access alerts The elapsed time for an update depends on the I O transfer time as well as the time that it takes for the device to reinitialize The I O transfer time depends on a number of things including the spe
124. 00 XP 2000 XP host with 2000 XP client Add Printer Direct Parallel connect USB Network Jetdirect TCP IP x x x x x IPX SPX x x x x x Standard TCP IP HP x x x x x TCP IP x x x MS IPX SPX x x x x x HP This column represents the following Microsoft Share configurations 1 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 Server host with Windows 98 SE or Windows Me client 2 Windows 98 SE or Windows Me host with any client Table 2 4 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments Method Connection type Novell Netware 4 x Netware 5 x Bindery queue NDS queue Bindery queue Installer Direct connect Parallel USB Network Jetdirect TCP IP x x x IPX SPX Standard TCP IP HP TCP IP MS IPX SPX HP Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell It is not supported with Microsoft Client Service for NetWare Update Now If the HP LaserJet P3005 printer configuration has been modified since installation the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication Use the Update Now feature to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver For example if the device is installed and an optional paper handling accessory is added later use the Update Now feature to query the device and update the settings to match the new device configuration 30 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW The Upd
125. 1 viewing documentation 15 Adobe Web site 174 Advanced Printing Features setting unidrivers 208 Advanced tab unidrivers 205 alerts e mail configuration 331 features 331 alerts e mail HP Embedded Web Server 41 42 Macintosh 316 Alternative Letterhead Mode PCL traditional drivers 171 unidrivers 210 ENWW Americans with Disabilities Act ADA compliance 16 application settings traditional drivers 107 unidrivers 199 ASCII output protocol PS Emulation Unidriver 262 asset number 327 autoconfiguration driver PCL traditional drivers 172 support for 28 unidrivers 264 autoconfiguration Enterprise about 29 Windows support 29 automatic two sided printing PCL traditional driver settings 119 PS Emulation Driver 178 unidrivers 239 autorun CD ROM Windows 21 AutoSend 332 availability Windows software components 8 B Back button Windows installation dialog boxes 57 Back Cover settings PCL traditional drivers 147 150 unidrivers 221 226 Back to Front printing unidrivers 210 Basic Installation choosing 21 dialog boxes Windows 59 Basics tab PCL traditional drivers 160 bidirectional communication about 28 Enterprise AutoConfiguration 29 binary output protocol PS Emulation Unidriver 262 binding settings PCL traditional drivers 122 unidrivers 242 bins custom paper sizes black printing all text as PCL traditional drivers 128 130 unidrivers 209 Bonjour Settings Macintosh 318 booklet printing settings PC
126. 12 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope Table 1 6 CD 2 Asia Pacific continued o Component ZHCN ZHTW EN KO TH 9 Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x Installer Customization Wizard x x x x x S CD Browser x x x x x i HP Easy Printer Care x x 3 Printer Usage Report x x x x a HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x Fonts x x HP Web Registration x HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide CHM file x x x x x HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide PDF file x x x x x Hewlett Packard LaserJet P3005 Series x x x x x Printing System Install Notes HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x x HP Jetdirect Administrator s Guide x x x x 250 Sheet Install Guide x x x x x Table 1 7 CD 3 Europe Middle East Africa Component CS DA EN FI HE HU NO PL RU SV TR HP Traditional Postscript 3 x x x x x x x x x x x Emulation Driver HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x x x x x x x HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x x x x x x x x x x HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x x x x x x x x HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x x x x x x x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x x x x x x x x Common MS Windows x x x x x x x x x x x Installer Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x x x x x x x x Installer Customization x x x x x x x x x x x Wizard CD Browser x x x x x x x x x x x HP Easy Printer Care x x x x Printer Usage Report x x x x x x x x x x x HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x x x x x x x x Fonts x x x x x x ENW
127. 1200 dpi This is the best print quality but printing speed is slower than for documents printed on the FASTRES 1200 setting which uses a resolution of 1200 x 600 dpi The following settings are available in the Resolution Enhancement Technology REt drop down menu e OFF e LIGHT e MEDIUM e DARK Trays Configuration Under Printer Settings choose Trays Configuration to open the Trays Configuration screen as shown in the following figure teo O HP Printer Utility J IN E gt Trays Configuration HP Support You can configure the default media type and size for each tray Y Printer Settings Trays Selected tray Tray 1 l S7 Duplex Mod S Duplex Mode pi Tray 2 Default Media Type 60 Economode l a Toner Density Any Ww Resolution Default Media Size f Any Size m Trays Configuration y E EP Lock Resources l jr Stored Jobs a Ly E mail Alerts A lt gt fe Printer Name NPI937F3D Printer Status Idle Model Name HP Laserjet P3005 Supplies Genuine HP Figure 6 44 Trays Configuration screen 1 Choose Trays Configuration to change media size and type for each of the trays installed on your device 2 To change the media type select a tray and then choose a different media type in the Default Media Type drop down menu ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 313 3 To cha
128. 12208 KB Space Available 64262404 KB E o z e po 9 lt Back Cancel Figure 3 21 Drivers dialog box An empty check box indicates that the driver will not be installed A check mark appears when you select to install that driver Information about the space required and the space available on your hard drive appears in the dialog box Select any combination of drivers for the installer No selection depends on any other selection It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver Select the drivers that you want to install or select none of them if you are not installing a driver Click Next to proceed with the installation To view details about the drivers click Details The driver Details dialog box appears ENWW Print driver installation instructions 77 Details The following printer drivers are available For installation HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 6 Driver The PCL 6 printer driver can provide the best overall performance and access to your printer features HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 5e Driver PCL 5 recommended for general office monochrome and color printing HP LaserJet P3005 PS Driver PS level 3 emulation printer driver allows you to print and access the features of your printer Figure 3 22 Driver Details dialog box All of the drivers that are available in the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box
129. 1548 TTF Taffy Regular PS 14507 TTF Univers 45 Light Regular PS 13501 TTF Univers 45 Light Bold PS 14023 TTF Univers 45 Light Bold Italic PS 14024 TTF Univers 45 Light Italic PS 13502 TTF Univers 47 CondensedLight Bold PS 14030 TTF Univers 47 CondensedLight Bold Italic PS 14040 TTF Univers 55 Regular PS 14021 TTF Univers 55 Italic PS 14022 TTF Univers 57 Condensed Regular PS 14029 TTF Univers 57 Condensed Italic PS 14039 TTF Univers ExtendedPS Bold PS 13548 TTF Univers ExtendedPS Regular PS 13547 TTF Univers ExtendedPS Bold Italic PS 14481 TTF Univers ExtendedPS Italic PS 14480 TTF Font support 55 E m 0 y z e Lo 2 Print driver installation instructions Topics e General MS Windows installation instructions e Detailed MS Windows install instructions e Seta default printer General MS Windows installation instructions Installation is similar for the Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems Installation for the Windows 98 SE Windows Me and Windows Server 2003 operating systems requires using the Add Printer wizard For instructions see Install print drivers by using Add Printer on page 85 E NOTE The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and the PS Emulation z Driver are available on the printing system software CD If the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is connected through a file or print server the printing system software must first be installed on the server b
130. 180 Scaling control 181 tray settings 177 Unprintable Area 178 version number 26 Watermark settings 191 Watermarks settings 191 Window duplexing unit settings 193 PS emulation fonts 52 Index 375 PS Emulation Unidriver of Normal Size 232 About tab 268 accessing 201 Advanced Printing Features 208 Advanced tab 205 Alternative Letterhead Mode 210 Automatic Configuration 264 booklets 243 Copy Count settings 207 Ctrl D settings 262 Device Services 256 Device Settings tab 257 Document Options 208 239 document preview image 227 232 245 duplexing 239 Effects tab 229 features 199 Finishing tab 237 Flip Pages Up 242 Font DIMM Installer 260 font settings 263 Font Substitution Table 259 Form to Tray Assignment 258 Graphic setting 207 Help system 203 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 33 included 24 Installable Options settings 264 Internet Services 256 JEPG Passthrough 267 Job storage settings 246 Layout Options 210 media supported 344 Mopier settings 265 operating system support 8 Output Protocol settings 262 Pages per Sheet 244 Paper Options 216 Paper Output settings 206 Paper Quality tab 211 PostScript Device settings 261 PostScript Memory settings 262 376 Index PostScript Options 208 PostScript Passthrough 266 Print Quality settings 227 Print Task Quick Sets 212 Printer Features 209 Printing Preferences tabs 201 Properties tabs 202 Resizing Options settings 231 Scale to Fit 231 Services
131. 5FW PDF The following series of messages appears in the command window 200 PORT command successful 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection 226 Ready 226 Processing Job Press Enter on the keyboard The print ready file prints 362 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW 12 Atthe command prompt type bye to exit the FTP command 13 Atthe command prompt type exit to return to the MS Windows interface Print ready printing by using a local MS Windows port The procedure for printing directly by using a local MS Windows port depends on the operating system Topics Windows 98 SE or Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 Windows 98 SE or Windows Me ENWW 1 From a command prompt or in an MS DOS window type the following Mode lptil p ET NOTE Ifthe product is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1 then substitute the correct LPT port number in the mode command Press Enter on the keyboard The response you receive should be similar to these examples gt LPT1 Not Rerouted gt Resident portion of MODE loaded gt Infinite retry on parallel printer time out At a command prompt type copy b FILENAME lt PORTNAME gt where FILENAME is the name of the print ready file including the path and lt PORTNAME gt is the name of the appropriate printer port such as LPT1 For example at the c gt command prompt type the following copy b c P3005FW PDF lptl
132. 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers When using an HP unidriver in a Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 environment follow these steps to find driver version information 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click Start Select Settings Click Printers and Faxes in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 or Printers in Windows 2000 Right click the printer icon Click Properties Click the About tab The Windows 98 SE and Windows Me operating systems support the HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 6 and PCL 5 traditional print drivers and the PS Emulation Driver Follow these steps to gain access to an HP traditional PCL driver 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click Start Select Settings Click Printers Right click the device name Click Properties to gain access to all print driver tabs Click the HP logo in the lower left corner of the following HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver tabs e Finishing e Effects e Paper e Job Storage e Basics e Configure 26 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW ENWW The PS Emulation Driver software provides postscript feature support for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Follow these steps to gain access to the print driver version number T 2 3 4 5 6 Click Start Select Settings Click Printers Right click the device name Click Properties to gain access to all print driver tabs Click About MS Windows printing system software 27 c fe 5 Q
133. 6 Finish Up tallatior wered by VISE X Continue C Qut Figure 6 11 Finish Up dialog Click Quit to exit the installer Click Continue to return to the HP LaserJet Installer Printer setup After installing the printing system software in Macintosh operating systems the device must be set up Topics e Setup a printer with Mac OS X V10 4 and later e Setup a printer with Mac OS X V10 3 e Setup a printer with Mac OS X V10 2 8 e Troubleshooting the printer setup Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10 4 and later Carry out these steps after the software installation is complete 1 If you are installing the device using a USB connection connect the USB cable between the HP LaserJet P3005 printer and the computer Turn on the device If you are installing using a network connection verify that the network cable is connected to the device and the device is on ENWW Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 285 2 Inthe Applications folder open the Utilities folder and then run the Printer Setup Utility The Printer List appears It looks similar to the one shown in the following figure eoe Printer List o Status Kind g HP Color Laserjet 2700n HP Color Laserjet g HP Color Laserjet 2700n 9D63FE HP Color Laserjet z SP Laserjet M5035 MFP HP Laserjet M5035 1 HP LaserJet P3005 HP LaserJet P3005 Figure 6 12 Printer List screen You can also configure the device using the Print amp Fax pane of Sys
134. 82 Font Substitution Table 2 2 2 2 eoe A ede Eae Re Ee d da uela 183 Send Fonts Asv dialog DOX airline 184 Device Options tab ooi td ete De fear etel gui ee o aevo alia ede 186 PostScilpttab zi meo nore datam tet ME FE cerei P a a 195 Advanced PostScript Options dialog box coooooccccccnncnnoononconcconcnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnonnnnnnnnnnnnnninnannnnnnns 197 An Incompatible Print Settings message sssssssssseee e nee 204 The default appearance of the Advanced tab sssssssssssssssseeseeme eene 206 Paper Quality taba tette e pr rende at dette de tg 212 Paper Options group DOX iih ERRRR I TERRE RR ARARR RR ERR EE aO TE E ERRAT SE aa HERR eaaa 217 Custom Paper Size dialog DOX iia ep lali bete n buta ici 218 Front Cover options ERU p RAM RI ER RR RENE ERR 222 FirstPage Options ica nedum Mee m dit eee tee ERE e d E es 223 Other Pages options ni e er e Re tede tUe co Rut OA 224 Last Page Ooptioris 1 nuire egredi reed dde tid ddl cd odd ee cdd dte ded dee cid de a pede aee dde 225 Back Gover OptlOFis 2 2 ere erede eta ta ede tue RT eh eeu AAA d Rx aa 226 esr LUE 230 Preview images Legal on Letter Scale to Fit off left and on right sssssses 231 Watermark Details dialog box sssssseeeeenm eene enne nnne nnne nnne ns 233 FINISHING tab eae a A tilda 238 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box oooonncccccnnnnnnccccconnnononnnnannnnnnnnnn
135. Click Next to continue The Searching dialog box opens as shown in the following figure 64 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW ENWW HP Laser Jet P3005 Setup e Searching h Setup is searching for printers if invent Searching the local network for available HP LaserJet P3005 printers Please wait e eses Figure 3 8 Searching dialog box Ez NOTE Ifyou are installing the device over a network you must let the search for the first subnet in the network finish in order to find all available printers After the first subnet is scanned for available HP LaserJet P3005 printers the results appear in the Printers Found dialog box However the installer continues to search the network for additional printers after the first results appear The results of searching the first subnet usually takes place within about 20 seconds lt might take some time for the installer to search the other subnets and for the full list of printers to appear in the Printers Found dialog box see Figure 3 10 Printers Found dialog box on page 67 depending on the configuration of the network NOTE The installation process includes the option of using the TCP IP address for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer which might be preferable to waiting for the installer to finish the search When performing a network installation and no printer is found the Printer Not Found dialog box appears as shown in the following figure
136. Color Laserdet xxxx Hardware Address MODE DEDODOD ODODODOODEE E OOO00E E 00000 DONE DEODOODE 000000000E00 QO000E E 00000 IP Address 192 168 0 11 192 168 0 12 192 168 0 13 192 168 0 14 192 168 0 15 192 168 0 16 v gt If the printer you want to install is not listed click Search Again Search Again Figure 3 10 Printers Found dialog box Select the printer to install and click Next The Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens see Figure 3 12 Confirm Network Settings dialog box on page 69 E o z e xe o If the printer to install is not listed and you want the installer to broaden the search to network subnet masks beyond the local network click Search Again The Check Printer Connection screen appears see Figure 3 14 Check Printer Connection dialog box on page 71 Select a search option and click Next to perform another search If the printer to install is not listed and you know its TCP IP address click Next The Confirm Network Settings dialog box opens See Figure 3 12 Confirm Network Settings dialog box on page 69 and follow the instructions for changing the TCP IP address If a single printer is found the Printer Found dialog box appears with a list of matching devices that have been found on the network The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure ENWW Print driver installation instructions 67 HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Prin
137. Ct Toner Density n y Ww Resolution a Trays Configuration Selecting a lower toner density for the currently selected printer will help use toner more economically Lock Resources a Stored Jobs M E mail Alerts TS Printer Status Idle 8 g emee o E Figure 6 42 Economode amp Toner Density screen Selecting this option extends the life of the toner supply and reduces cost per page However it also reduces print quality The printed image is lighter but it is adequate for printing drafts or proofs Macintosh HP Printer Utility 311 HP does not recommend the full time use of Economode If Economode is used full time when the average toner coverage is significantly less than 5 it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge If print quality begins to degrade under these circumstances you must install a new print cartridge even if toner remains in the cartridge ET NOTE The Turn Economode On setting might work only if a genuine HP print cartridge is installed HP print cartridges can measure the life of the mechanical parts as well as the quantity of toner If the Turn Economode On setting is used frequently the mechanical parts can wear out before the supply of toner is depleted increasing the risk of toner leaking Use genuine HP parts to avoid this problem Change the settings in the Toner Density drop down menu to save on toner use The following
138. D 48 119 3005 TCP IP Settings Summary Network Identification TCP IP v4 TCP IP v6 Config Precedence Advanced Host Name NPI937F30 IPv4 Status Enabled Fully Qualified Domain Name IPv4 NPI937F3D sakson corp Address 10 10 48 119 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Detautt Gateway 10 10 48 1 Config By DHCP DHCP Lease Time 259200 Seconds IPv6 Status Enabled Fully Qualified Domain Name IPv6 Other Links m Prefix length Config By Valid Lftm Pret Lttm _ Address Prefix ni imi Support fo80 214 38ff 093 713d 64 Link Local Infinite Infinite HP Home Default Route Information ESSE Address Expires In Figure 6 49 Networking screen Choose one of the following options in the Configuration drop down menu e DHCP e BootP e Manual You can also use this screen to modify the following settings e Host Name e IP Address e Subnet Mask e Default Gateway To save new settings click Apply Now To view and change other network settings click Additional Network Settings If a user name and password have been set you might need to obtain them from your IT administrator For more information see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide The HP EWS opens to the Network Settings screen For information about this screen see Networking tab on page 44 in this STR Bonjour Settings The Bonjour Settings screen is available if the HP LaserJet P3005 is ins
139. DY message appears on the control panel Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update Remote firmware update through an MS Windows network ENWW If the device is shared on an MS Windows network follow these instructions 1 From a command prompt or in an MS DOS window type copy b FILENAME lt COMPUTERNAME gt lt SHARENAME gt where FILENAME is the name of the RFU file including the path lt COMPUTERNAME gt is the name ofthe computer from which the device is being shared and lt SHARENAME gt is the device share name For example type the following C gt copy b c P3005fw rfu NNyour serverNyour computer ET NOTE Ifthe file name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example type C N copy b c My Documents NP3005fw rfu NNyour serverNyour computer Press Enter on the keyboard The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel The message 1 file s copied appears on the computer screen The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device This can take several minutes Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer The messages described in t
140. E EL d 103 Finish dialog DOX det nde di ect t E Ue be eee etate vend e o pi ee ge eee 104 A typical constraint message with an OK button ssssssseem emm 111 A typical page with a Bubble Help icon ssssssssseeeeee eene 112 The default Einishingitab ad A bee umi 114 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box ssseee eene 122 Page order preview Images temet eria as ab bas 125 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver eene 126 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver sesesseeese 128 Effects tab ioco neon edam etd ten tu d ted 131 Preview images Legal on Letter Scale to Fit off left and on right ssssssesssss 133 Watermark Details dialog box ooooooocccnnnniniccnnnnnnocccccnnononanoncnnnnnnnn nennen nennen enne 135 Paper tab e prete det oon e a dre ee ees e don Lt Nevis Le esto uus 139 Paper Options group box default sse eene mener ene 140 Custom Paper Size dialog box cette read tnde enata R Ea 141 Front Cover opltiOns 31 di eite p atre usi a aiti sti t teur M id a a antelaci n 147 First Page OPIO xo PREPARED ds EMO 148 Other Pages options idem de de de de eds deti tide 149 Last Page options 5 iei diu nid nig ni n id E REM tienes OR 150 Back Cover setting pet LH Ae iba 150 Job Storage tab tere tete e ie e re re re eite en
141. E This section also contains information about using the job storage feature when printing The Job Storage tab contains the following controls e Print Task Quick Sets e Status group box e Job Storage Mode e Quick Copy e Stored Job e Require PIN e Job Notification Options 248 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW e User Name e Job Name e Using job storage features when printing Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs Print task quick sets are either preset or user defined printing specifications such as media size and pages per sheet Status group box The unlabeled group box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet P3005 printer to store documents at the device and then control their printing at the device control panel The HP LaserJet P3005 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options e Off e Proof and Hold e Private Job Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed e Quick Copy e Stored Job Topics e Off e Proof and Hold e Private Job Of
142. ELOPE B5 0 07 e de oo e CUSTOM n 10 n 20 nn 0 POSTCARD QE n us mz band oo gt OPOSTCARD IS 0 10 e u 00 AS 0 0 5 e s 00 16K 197X273 MM 0 08 e 4 00 EXECUTIVE IS 0 11 0 22 on 0 AS o 02 a oo m BS JIS 0 10 oo 8 5X13 0 11 0 22 00 0 STATEMENT 0 05 se 001 164 19 270 MM 0 08 oo 16 104x760 MM n nn nn TOTAL PRINTER USAGE oo FUSER MODES USAGE Fuserllode Total NORMAL 0 HIGHT n HIGH2 0 LOW 0 Lowe 0 Total 0 PAPER PATH USAGE Source Coun Envelope Feeder Manual Feed Tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 External Tray Other Total Destination Count Face Up 0 Face Down 0 External Blin n 0 Other Total oeooocooo Black Print Coverage 0 000 Figure 6 57 Usage Page screen 1 of 2 326 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Device Information The Device Information screen shows the following information e Device name e Device location e X Asset number e Company name e Contact person e Product name e Device model e Device serial number The product name device model and device serial number are generated automatically You can configure the other information on this screen from the Device Information screen on the Settings tab Device Information Printer Name HP LaserJet P3005 Printer Location Asset Number Company Name Contact Person Detant IP Address 10 10 48 119 ProductName HP LaserJet P3005 Printer Model COOKA Printer Sertal Number OOOO
143. Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout To print a configuration page see Print a configuration page on page 350 2 From a command window type the following lpr P IPADDRESS S IPADDRESS o 1 FILENAME lpr S lt IPADDRESS gt Pbinps FILENAME where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP IP address or the host name of the product and where FILENAME is the file name of the print ready file ET NOTE The parameter o I consists of a lowercase O not a zero and a lowercase L not the numeral 1 This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode 3 The file prints but no messages appear in the command prompt window 4 Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window m O m 97 c Ta o 0 97 c ENWW Printing print ready documents 365 366 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Index Symbols Numerics of Normal Size setting PCL traditional drivers 133 unidrivers 232 A About button PCL traditional drivers 162 PS Emulation Driver 179 About tab unidrivers 268 accessibility documentation 16 accessories automatic configuration 28 ADA Americans with Disabilities Act compliance 16 Add Printer installation 85 Additional Software dialog box Customization Wizard 98 administrators alerts setting up 331 wake time settings 338 Adobe Acrobat Reader installing 22 printing PDF files without 36
144. Engineering Details ENWW Remote firmware update through a USB port If the device is connected over a USB connection follow these instructions 1 From a command prompt or in an MS DOS window type copy b FILENAME N COMPUTERNAME N SHARENAME where FILENAME is the name of the RFU file including the path lt COMPUTERNAME gt is the name of the computer from which the device is being shared and lt SHARENAME gt is the device share name For example type the following copy b 3000fw rfu NNyour computerNclj3000 499 f E NOTE Ifthe file name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example type C N copy b c My Documents VP3005fw rfu your_computer c1 43000 Press Enter on the keyboard The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel The message 1 file s copied appears on the computer screen The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device This can take several minutes Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel ET NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update this can happen more than once At the end of the update process the REA
145. Figure 6 58 HP EWS Device Information screen Control Panel Snapshot The Control Panel Snapshot screen shows the device control panel display as if you were standing at the device Because this view shows the device status it can help you troubleshoot problems with the device ET NOTE The appearance of the screen might vary depending on your device ENWW HP Embedded Web Server EWS 327 erJet P3005 Printers invent Control Panel Snapshot This is an inactive image of ine device Control Panel To update the image with current in rmabon click Retresh Image below Sleep mode on Relresh Image Figure 6 59 HP EWS Control Panel Snapshot screen Print ET NOTE The Print screen and the Print menu on the left is available only if it has been configured to appear on the Security screen under the Settings tab Use the Security screen to disable the Print screen if you do not want it to appear for security reasons For more information see Security on page 333 Use the Print screen to print print ready files or to update your device firmware remotely You can use the Print screen to print one file at a time from a device that supports the HP EWS This feature is especially useful if you are a mobile user because you do not have to install the print driver in order to print you can print anywhere at any time You can print print ready files such as documents that have been generated by using a print to file driv
146. G are printed as bitmaps resulting in faster printing e Enable When this option is selected images sent as JPEG are printed as JPEG JPEG passthrough e Auto When this option is selected the printer connection type is automatically detected For network TCP IP connections JPEG passthrough is disabled For parallel LTP DOT4 and USB connections JPEG passthrough is enabled m e uem 0 y os 20 ED ssc ss Qa E ENWW Device Settings tab features 267 About tab features The About tab is in the Properties for the print driver To gain access to the print driver Properties click Start on the MS Window task bar select Settings and then click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Properties 6 Click the About tab The About tab provides detailed information about the driver It contains an overall build number in parentheses following the model name together with specific information about each of the components The information varies according to the HP LaserJet P3005 model number driver date and versions The About tab is shown in the following figure
147. H KXd i Introduction 1 o Q e o 0 Lo c o O Q a Table 1 1 Software technical reference overview continued Chapter Content e HP Embedded Web Server e HP Web Jetadmin Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing This chapter provides instructions for installing the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in System components MS Windows operating systems by using various installation methods Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP traditional PCL 6 PCL 5 MS Windows and PS emulation print drivers for MS Windows 98 Second Edition Windows 98 SE and MS Windows Millennium Edition Windows Me This chapter also contains information about using job storage features when printing from the device control panel including the following topics e Releasing a job storage print job e Deleting a job storage print job Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS This chapter provides detailed descriptions of the HP traditional PCL 6 PCL 5 emulation unidrivers for MS Windows and postscript emulation print unidrivers for Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 This chapter also contains information about using job storage features when printing from the device control panel including the following topics e Releasing a job storage print job e Deleting a job storage print job Chapter 6 Macintosh This chapter p
148. HP LaserJet P3005 Printer Software Technical Reference HP LaserJet P3005 series Printer Software Technical Reference invent Copyright and license 2006 Copyright Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and Services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein Edition 2 1 2007 Trademark credits Adobe Adobe Photoshop Acrobat PostScript and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Corel is a trademark or registered trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel Corporation Limited EnergyStar and the Energy Star logo are US registered marks of the United States Environmental Protection Agency ENERGY STAR FireWire FireWire is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc registered in the U S and other countries Java is a US trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corpora
149. Jet v6 3 0 275 app 3 HP Laserjet v6 2 0 247 app gt 3 items Zero KB available Figure 6 2 HP LaserJet Software screen In the HP LaserJet Software screen double click the HP LaserJet v6 2 0 247 app icon This begins the HP LaserJet P3005 printer installation process In the HP LaserJet Software screen double click the PDF folder to view the Install notes Readme file The Authenticate dialog appears Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 279 Macintosh Authenticate HP LaserJet v6 X requires that you type your password A Name Login name Password gt Details O Figure 6 3 Authenticate dialog Type the correct admin name and password and click OK to continue The installer introduction screen appears Click Cancel to exit the installation 80 HP Laserjet v6 2 Introduction 8 Introduction Read Me O License Installation Type Installing Finish Up Installation powered by VISE X A SS Figure 6 4 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer Introduction screen Click Continue The Read Me dialog appears as shown in the following figure 280 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW 0 00 HP Laserjet v6 2 Introduction 8 Read Me License Installation Type Installing Finish Up Read Me To set up a printer queue for your HP LaserJet printer Mac OS X 1 Open Print Center Printer Setup Utility 2 Choose Add Printer
150. L traditional drivers 123 unidrivers 243 both sides printing on PCL traditional driver settings 119 PS Emulation Driver 178 unidrivers 239 Browse for Printer dialog box Customization Wizard 90 Bubble help 112 144 219 C Cancel button Windows installation dialog boxes 57 cardstock paper type commands 349 cartridges AutoSend feature 332 usage information 326 CD ROM directory structure Macintosh 273 Index 367 directory structure Windows 10 documentation 15 22 installer Windows printing System software 20 installing Macintosh printing System software 277 installing Windows printing system software 56 languages Macintosh 274 languages Windows 10 Change TCP IP Settings dialog box Windows 75 Check Printer Connection dialog box Windows 71 CHM files viewing 16 Citrix Terminal Server support 8 clock drift correction 337 clock settings 336 collation settings PCL traditional drivers 171 PS Emulation Driver 190 unidrivers 207 266 command line printing Windows 361 command line silent install for Windows 104 commands paper size 347 source 344 type 349 common installer features 22 components software availability 8 Configuration Page HP Embedded Web Server 40 Configuration Page HP EWS 323 Configuration section HP Embedded Web Server 45 339 Configure Device page HP Embedded Web Server 41 Configure Device screen 329 Configure tab PCL traditional drivers 164 Confirm Changing Setting d
151. LaserJet XXXXn XXXXXX HP Color LaserJet XXXXn XXXXXX HP Laserjet XXXX HP LaserJet XXXX XXXXXX Location Local Domain Printer Model HP HJ HP LaserJet XXXX HP LaserJet XXXX HT Figure 6 22 Add printer screen Choose the network connection protocol in the top drop down menu The two supported protocols are Rendezvous and IP Printing If you are using Rendezvous carry out the following step ET NOTE Rendezvous is the easiest method and is the best method to use if the device is installed on your local network IP Printing must be used if you are installing the device on a different network If you are using Rendezvous carry out the following step Select the HP LaserJet P3005 in the Name list The Printer Model and Model Name are selected automatically ET NOTE Ifyou are on a network that has more than one HP LaserJet P3005 print a configuration page and match the Rendezvous Printer Name to the name on the list to identify the device you are installing See Print a configuration page on page 350 NOTE Ifthe HP LaserJet P3005 does not appear in the list verify that the device is powered on and connected to the network If it still does not appear try turning the device off and then on again Finally turn the computer off and then on again then restart the setup process For more troubleshooting information see Troubleshooting the printer setup on page 297 Macintosh install and unins
152. Letter Left binding 5 Click OK in the print driver 6 Click OK in the print dialog box to print Pages per Sheet Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of media If you print more than one page per sheet the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed The Pages per Sheet drop down menu provides six settings e 1 page per sheet default e 2 pages per sheet e 4 pages per sheet e 6pages per sheet e 9 pages per sheet e 16 pages per sheet Selecting an option other than 1 page per sheet makes booklet printing unavailable Print Page Borders Related controls that are indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page Order which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1 Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page 124 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Page Order The Page Order drop down menu contains the following selections e Right then Down e Down then Right e Left then Down e Down then Left The document preview image changes to reflect alterations in these settings as shown by the examples in the following figure I Sl 11 by 8 5 inch y 8 5 inches B5 by 11 inches 11 by 8 5 inches
153. N 2 Select the check box for the information page that you want to view or print and then click Apply E mail Server Use the E mail Server screen to configure e mail settings for outgoing e mail Use the settings on this screen to send and receive e mail messages including product alerts The E mail Server screen is shown in the following figure 330 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW ca invent Information J Setoutgoing e mail server values If using e mail alerts or AutoSend v Enable Outgoing E mail SMIP Sener nonu DomainName DEVICE DOMAIN NAME NOTSET Device E mail Address device GDEVICE DOMAIN NAME NOT SET Set incoming e mail server values to enable remote requests and commands lo be sent to the device C Enable Incoming E mail POP3 Server Device POPS Userrrame Password Figure 6 62 HP EWS E mail Server screen Configuring outgoing e mail You must configure outgoing e mail if you intend to use the Alerts or AutoSend features 1 Gather the following information Your organization s network or e mail administrator typically provides the information that is required to configure outgoing mail e The TCP IP address of the simple mail transfer protocol SMTP mail server on your network The EWS uses the SMTP server TCP IP address to relay e mail messages to other computers e The e mail domain name suffix that is used to address e mail messages within your organization 2 Selec
154. Options Size is Sis x 11 inches Letter v Use Different Paper Covers First Page Other Pages Last Page B ro Source is Automatically Select v Type is Unspecified v Figure 5 10 Back Cover options The following are the Back Cover options e Size is drop down menu e Adda Blank or Preprinted Cover check box e Source is drop down menu e Type is drop down menu The Size is setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job Changes made to the Size is setting here override any previous Size is settings in other Use Different Paper Covers options When you select Back Cover also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting The Source is and Type is drop down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option ET NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting is enabled on the Finishing tab The back cover setting is unavailable because this page would be printed in the middle of a booklet The Source is setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here The Type is drop down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports ET NOTE Use the same size of media for the entire print jo
155. Options box ET NOTE When the job storage features are disabled that is when the Job Storage Enabled check box is not selected and the settings are saved the Job Storage tab is not visible If the job storage feature is enabled with at least 80 MB of total memory three Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab e Off e Proof and Hold e Private Job Two additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed e Quick Copy e Stored Job The following figure shows the Job Storage tab 7 Li co O a S cw O me oe u A o I gt pa Lo ENWW Job Storage tab features 153 HP LaserJet P3005 PCL6 Properties AF I ype new Quick Set name here ej Gh Ww plas vy EJ reip anua Figure 4 19 Job Storage tab Topics Print Task Quick Sets Status dialog box Job Storage Mode Quick Copy Stored Job PIN Job Notification Options User Name Job Name SETA BITE TA E sustan Jo T4 Bn Pe Automatic ES CISUSTOTIT D 1 OORT BITTE EST SES fuse Job Name 1198 z 154 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW e Using job storage features when printing Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs Print Task Quick Sets are either preset b
156. Options group Unavailable Off Yes box Paper Quality tab features 213 e um i 9 it e ou am gt fe o S Table 5 1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer continued Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for U S English Print Task Quick Sets Preconfigurable Pages per Sheet Finishing tab Document Options group 1 page per sheet Yes box Print Page Borders Finishing tab Document Options group Unavailable Yes box Page Order Finishing tab Document Options group Unavailable Yes box Orientation Finishing tab Orientation group box Portrait Yes Rotate by 180 Finishing tab Orientation group box Available notselected Yes degrees Resizing Options Effects tab Resizing Options group box Actual Size Yes Print document on Effects tab Resizing Options group box Available notselected Yes Size to print on Effects tab Resizing Options group box Actual Size Yes Scale to Fit Effects tab Resizing Options group box Unavailable selected Yes of Normal Size Effects tab Resizing Options group box Available notselected Yes Watermarks Effects tab none Yes Watermarks First Effects tab Watermark Details dialog box Unavailable not Yes Page Only selected Current watermarks Effects tab Watermark Details dialog box none Yes Click Edit for Watermark Details Watermark Effects ta
157. Press theMenu button to open the menus 2 Press A the up arrow or V the down arrow until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device control panel and then press v select 3 Press A up or V down to scroll to your user name and then press v select 4 Press A up or V down to scroll to the job name and then press v select 5 Press A up or V down until PRINT is highlighted on the device control panel and then press w select 6 Press y select ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 315 8 9 If a PIN number is assigned to the job press A up or V down to select the first digit of the PIN and then press v select The number in the device control panel display changes to an asterisk Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number If no PIN number is assigned to the job continue with the next step Press A up or Y down to select the number of copies to print Press v select to print the job Deleting a job storage print job Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the device memory You can do this from the device control panel 1 Press theMenu button to open the menus 2 Press A the up arrow or V the down arrow until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device control panel and then press select 3 Press A up or V down to scroll to your user name and then press v select 4 Press A up or V down to scroll to the job name
158. Print driver installation instructions 65 E 0 y z e xe o HP LaserJet P3005 Setup EJ e Printer Not Found h Setup was unable to detect any printers if invent Setup was unable to detect any printers on the network Click Next for assistance with finding the printer on the network Note If a firewall has been enabled on this computer this may be preventing the installer from detecting the printer Click Help for information on temporarily disabling the firewall to allow the installer to detect the printer lt Back Cancel Figure 3 9 Printer Not Found dialog box The device might not be connected to the network Ensure that the deviceis connected and is turned on If a firewall is blocking the installation and you want the installer to open a port through the firewall click Next The Searching dialog box appears see Figure 3 8 Searching dialog box on page 65 If a printer is found the Printers Found dialog box appears with a list of matching devices that have been found on the network The Printer Found dialog box is shown in the following figure 66 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW HP LaserJet XXXX Setup Printers Found Setup found the following supported printers Select the one you want to install HP Color Laserjet XXX HP Color LaserJet XXXX HP Color LaserJet XXXX HP Color LaserJet XXXX HP Color Laserjet XXXX HP Color Laserdet XXXX HP
159. Rendezvous carry out the following step Select the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in the Name list The Printer Model and Model Name are selected automatically ET NOTE If you are on a network that has more than one HP LaserJet P3005 print a configuration page and match the Rendezvous Printer Name to the name on the list to identify the device you are installing See Print a configuration page on page 350 ET NOTE Ifthe HP LaserJet P3005 does not appear in the list verify that the device is powered on and connected to the network If it still does not appear try turning the device off and then on again Finally turn the computer off and then on again then restart the setup process For more troubleshooting information see Troubleshooting the printer setup on page 297 292 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW ET NOTE If the automatic selection fails or if you want to manually select a PPD file click the Printer Model pull down menu select HP and then select the PPD file that you want to add If the HP LaserJet P3005 Series PPD does not appear in the Model Name list turn the computer off and then on again and restart the setup process If you are using IP Printing carry out the following steps a Choose Socket HP Jet Direct from the Printer Type pull down menu This is the recommended setting for HP devices b Print the device configuration pages To print the configuration pages follow these instructions i Pres
160. Status screen e Configuration Page e Settings tab e Configure device e X Alerts e Security e Networking tab Access to the HP EWS To open the HP EWS and view information about the HP LaserJet P3005 printer open a supported Web browser and type the device transmission control protocol internet protocol TCP IP address or host name in the address field ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 37 To find the device TCP IP address look for IP Address on the Embedded Jetdirect page in the TCP IP section To find the host name of the device look for Host Name in the TCP IP section The TCP IP address also appears on the device configuration page the Embedded Jetdirect page which can be printed from the device control panel display Follow these steps to print an Embedded Jetdirect page 1 Press Menu 2 Press V the down arrow to highlight INFORMATION and then press v select 3 Press V down to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION and then press v select to print the configuration pages The HP EWS frame Each screen in the HP EWS has a frame that contains a top banner three category tabs a left aligned navigation menu bar and a main content area Selecting one of the category tabs causes the corresponding left aligned navigation bar to appear The left aligned navigation menu includes links to content that is appropriate for that tab The main content area shows information and opens options in response to navigation ta
161. Support 308 Lock Resources 314 Network Settings 317 Supplies Status 301 Tray Configuration 313 Update Firmware 306 Upload Fonts 307 HP PS 3 Emulation Unidriver See PS Emulation Unidriver HP Registration dialog box Windows 85 HP Software License Agreement dialog box Windows 62 HP Toolbox not supported 19 HP Traditional postscript level 3 emulation driver See PS Emulation Driver ENWW HP Web Jetadmin downloading 22 47 Driver Preconfiguration Plugin 31 32 firmware updates 359 HP Embedded Web Server 37 HPNRA HP Network Registry Agent 29 HPPJL Encoding 188 HTML files viewing 16 l Ignore Application Collation PCL traditional drivers 167 171 inches settings 145 Include types in application source list option in drivers 171 Incompatible Print Settings messages See constraint messages Information tab HP Embedded Web Server 38 input trays See trays Install Network Printer Wizard INPW 8 install notes 17 Installable Options PS Emulation Driver 192 PS Emulation Unidriver 264 installation Add Printer 85 Adobe Acrobat Reader 22 command line silent 104 Customization Wizard for Windows 86 dialogs Mac OS X 278 File to E mail utility 342 hardware requirements for Macintosh 272 Macintosh printing system software 277 Point and Print 105 pre existing modifying 58 system requirements for Windows 6 Windows printing system software 56 Installation Type dialog box Windows 76 installers availability by oper
162. TCP IP e Internetwork packet exchange Sequenced packet exchange IPX SPX e AppleTalk e Data link control logical link control DLC LLC e Simple network management protocol SNMP e Other Settings e Privacy Settings e Select Language ENWW HP Embedded Web Server 45 Security section e Settings e X Authorization e Mgmt Protocols Diagnostics section e X Network Statistics o Protocol Info e Configuration Page 46 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW HP Web Jetadmin Use the HP Web Jetadmin and a browser to manage HP Jetdirect connected devices within an intranet HP Web Jetadmin is a browser based management tool and should be installed only on a single network administration server To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of host systems that support HP Web Jetadmin go to the following Web site www hp com go webjetadmin c fe 5 Q o 7 oO xo o Put c E pra e o ENWW HP Web Jetadmin 47 48 Chapter 2 Software description ENWW 3 Install MS Windows printing system components Introduction The HP LaserJet P3005 printer comes with software and installers for MS Windows and Apple Computer Inc Macintosh systems Linux and UNIX systems support the HP LaserJet P3005 and software is available on the Web This STR provides procedures for installing and removing the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software for MS Windows operating systems EZ NOTE If t
163. TUP EXE file Click Install Printer and continue to follow the instructions until the device is installed For detailed installation instructions see Detailed MS Windows install instructions on page 57 Detailed MS Windows install instructions A series of dialog boxes appear during installation of the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software in MS Windows environments Topics Help Back Next and Cancel buttons Modify a pre existing installation Direct connect installation through a USB or parallel port Basic Full and Custom Installation dialog box sequence Install print drivers by using Add Printer Installer Customization Wizard for Windows Point and Print installation for Windows 98 SE Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 Help Back Next and Cancel buttons ENWW Click the Help button on any screen where it appears to find suggestions for and explanations about the installation process Click the Back button on any installation dialog box to return to the previous dialog box The specific dialog box depends on your previous selections Select any options on a given screen and click the Next button to proceed to the next step in the installation sequence Print driver installation instructions 57 E o V z e Lo o To exit the installation sequence without installing the device follow these steps from any dialog box where the Canc
164. The driver is compatible with postscript level 3 and supports postscript font DIMMs Use the PS Emulation Unidriver in primarily postcript specific software programs such as Adobe and Corel HP universal print driver UPD The HP UPD allows users to install a single driver that will allow printing to most HP LaserJet printers The HP UPD provides similar functionality found in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and the HP PCL 5 Unidriver The HP universal print driver is recommended choice for e Any environment where multiple HP printer models are in use and where customers are wishing to reduce the number of drivers installed e Any environment where mobile printing users wishing to print to various locations on demand is desired The HP UPD can be downloaded from the following HP Web site www hp com go universalprintdriver ET NOTE The HP UPD does not support all of the features of the HP traditional drivers and the HP unidrivers ENWW MS Windows printing system software 25 Print driver version numbers for MS Windows operating systems Access to print driver version numbers varies depending on the operating system in which the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is installed ES NOTE Foralist of HP LaserJet P3005 print drivers updated HP printing system software and product support information go to www hp com go ljp3005 software The Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 operating systems support the HP PCL
165. Tool 35 Services tab unidrivers 255 Tru64 UNIX printing 8 TrueType font settings PS Emulation Unidriver 263 Send as Bitmap PCL traditional drivers 127 129 substitution table PS Emulation Driver 182 unidrivers 207 two sided printing PCL traditional driver settings 119 PS Emulation Driver 178 unidriver settings 239 TXT files command line printing 361 Type is settings PCL traditional drivers 146 unidrivers 220 Index 377 types paper Include in application source list setting 171 PCL traditional drivers settings 146 Print on Both Sides settings unidrivers 239 Print on Both sides PCL traditional drivers 119 supported 347 unidriver settings 220 U unattended installation command line 104 Customization Wizard 86 unidrivers of Normal Size 232 About tab 268 accessing 201 Advanced Printing Features 208 Advanced tab 205 Alternative Letterhead Mode 210 Automatic Configuration 264 automatic configuration 30 booklets 243 constraint messages 203 Copy Count settings 207 custom paper sizes 348 Device Services 256 Device Settings tab 257 Document Options 208 239 document preview image 227 232 245 duplexing 239 Effects tab 229 features 199 Finishing tab 237 Flip Pages Up 242 Font DIMM Installer font settings 260 Font Substitution Table 259 Form to Tray Assignment 258 Graphic setting 207 Graphics Mode 209 Help system 203 HP Driver Preconfiguration 33 260 378 Index Installable Options settings 264
166. W Printing system software 13 Table 1 7 CD 3 Europe Middle East Africa continued Component cs DA EN Fl HE HU NO PL RU sv TR HP Web Registration x HP LaserJet P3005 User x x x x x x x x x x x Guide CHM file HP LaserJet P3005 User x x x x x x x x x x x Guide PDF file Hewlett Packard x x x x x x x x x x x LaserJet P3005 Series Printing System Install Notes HP Embedded Web Server x x x x x User Guide HP Jetdirect Administrator s x x x x Guide 250 Sheet Install Guide x x x x x x x x x x x 14 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW HP LaserJet documentation ENWW On the main screen of the printing system software CD Browser click Printer Documentation to open the HP LaserJet P3005 Printer Documentation screen as shown in the following figure HP LaserJet P3005 Purpose and scope HP LaserJet P3005 Printer Documentation View the HP LaserJet P3005 Printer User Guide in a format compatible with most popular screen reading software chm User Guide Printer Friendly format This document includes information about product operation troubleshooting warranty and specifications supplies and support Install Notes Embedded Web Server Guide HP Jetdirect Guide Figure 1 1 Installation software CD printer documentation screen The following table lists HP LaserJet P3005 printer documents that are available for each operating system Table 1 8 Document availability Docume
167. _XXWW PDF Ez NOTE The XX in the file name corresponds to the language For instance the file name for E the French version of the guide is LJBP3005 USE FRWW PDF When the file is open click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location Hewlett Packard LaserJet P3005 Series Printing System Install Notes The Hewlett Packard LaserJet P3005 Series Printing System Install Notes in HTM format contains important information about device features instructions for installing the printing system software and technical assistance To view this guide from the software CD follow these steps 1 n the main screen of the CD browser click Printer Documentation 2 Click Install Notes You can also gain access to the file by following these steps 1 Insert the software CD into the CD ROM drive 2 Navigate to the Manuals lt language gt folder 3 Open the file that has the appropriate file name LJP3005_INSTALLNOTES_XXWW HTM ET NOTE The XX in the file name corresponds to the language For instance the file name for the French version of the document is LJP3005 INSTALLNOTES FRWW HTM HP Embedded Web Server User Guide The HP Embedded Web Server User Guide in PDF format provides information about device status settings and networking for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer ENWW HP LaserJet documentation 17 To view this guide from the software CD follow these steps 1 In the main screen of
168. a USB connection connect the USB cable between the HP LaserJet P3005 printer and the computer Turn on the device If you are installing using a network connection verify that the network cable is connected to the device and the device is on ENWW Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 293 2 Inthe Applications folder open the Utilities folder and then run the Print Center The Printer List screen appears LE Printer List E o u Make Default Add Delete Name A Status Kind 10 10 48 115 HP Laserjet P2015 Se HP Color Laserjet 2700n 9D63FE HP Color Laserjet 270C HP Laserjet P2015 Series Generic PostScript Prin HP Laserjet P3005 Generic PostScript Prin Figure 6 21 Printer List screen 3 Ifyou are installing the device using a USB connection verify that the device appears on the device list The Kind column in the device list should display HP LaserJet P3005 If this is the case the setup is complete Ez NOTE If the Kind column does not appear in the device list go to the View menu and choose Columns and then Kind If the device does not appear or if the correct information does not appear in the Kind column see Troubleshooting the printer setup on page 297 If you are installing the device using a network connection continue with the following steps 294 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW ENWW 4 Click Add to open the add printer screen Rendezvous H4 HP Color LaserJet XXXXn XXXXXX HP Color
169. a aa aa 29 Update Now A 30 HP Driver Preconflguratlori 2 rece ri ia a ii ia 31 Lockable features sse em nere nnne nennen 33 CONTINUOUS export 5 n erp een e OEC iii 33 HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool ssssssssseeene eene nnns 35 HP Easy Printer Cates m 36 HP Embedded Web Server eti ette de Rae A UR ER LA laa 37 Access to the IP EMO eene nnn ioni ERR ERRE Ke ERR ias Teen 37 The HP EWS frame eset ten acia 38 Information TAD mI 38 Links to off product sol tlons sotenan aa aa a E ENa 39 Device Status SCTEeN 39 Configuration Pag ici bata 40 SfulyeraioM M 41 Configure devie E 41 Ales oe A E sae a E a dut ETC EET 42 SGU none E E AE A EEA R 44 Networking ab acota nn ESE ENAT AEE AEAN Ai A AAAA AA 44 Configura ON ssd aN 45 Security secas 46 Diagnostics SECO teca da aaa 46 nA TNAM T 47 3 Install MS Windows printing system components nrere Uto terae Mec 49 Font SUPPO m EDU 50 Basic fohts one tete dd iia dd dea i 50 DOTQUITTON S 5 oor rte co sa a equae cates dax XR aad dune vasdaadiandaui edeatacdeaeaass 50 Print driver installation instructions cccccoconnnononinocononenenonoooronnnononoronononononnnonnnnnonnrnnrnnnannnnnrnnenanennnnens 56 General MS Windows installation instructions ccccoonncnconcccononencnoconacenonononoranonnona
170. about the availability ofthe HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software and related software and firmware Printing system software on a CD is available from HP fulfillment centers Topics e Printing system software on the Web 272 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW e In box printing system software CDs Printing system software on the Web All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software The Web site offers an option for automatic e mail notification about new software releases ET NOTE This STR describes drivers that are shipped with the printing system software CD This STR does not describe any drivers that might be released by support personnel Topics e Printing system software e Software component availability Printing system software The HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software is available for download at the following Web site www hp com support ljp3005 Software component availability The following HP LaserJet software components are installed e HP LaserJet P3005 PPD e HP LaserJet P3005 PDE e HPUSB EWS Gateway e HP Device Configuration Utility e HP Uninstaller for the HP Device Configuration Utility and HP USB EWS Gateway In box printing system software CDs The software CD for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer contains the files for installing the printing system software on the computer
171. aded fonts HP recommends that you install additional memory Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job storage features A minimum total memory of 80 MB is required to use the job storage features After additional memory is installed the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the device If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment the Update Now feature can be used to update the drivers To configure the drivers manually after installing additional memory follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings eo Click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home Right click the device name Click Properties Click the Device Settings tab DU amp oo o If additional memory has been installed select Printer Memory under Installable Options and then select either 96 MB 128 MB 160 MB 192 MB 256 MB 288 MB 320 MB 384 MB or 512 MB depending on the total amount of memory currently installed ET NOTE The HP LaserJet P3005 printer can be configured for a maximum of 320 MB 8 Click OK to make the job storage features available 246 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW ENWW ET NOTE The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if the job storage feature is enabled To disable the job storage feature follow
172. age is clipped If it is smaller then it is centered within the target media The following figure shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal size media with the Print Document On check box selected and the target size specified as Letter 8 5 by 11 inches 8 5 by 11 inches Figure 5 12 Preview images Legal on Letter Scale to Fit off left and on right Effects tab features 231 m e uem 0 y os 20 ED ssc ss Qa a When the size for which the document is formatted that is the logical size differs from the target size the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size of Normal Size The of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting The default setting in the entry box is 100 of normal size Normal size is defined as the media size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program if the software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer The limits of the range are from 2596 to 40096 and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control that is when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected Any change to the scale also changes the page preview which increases or decreases from t
173. al drivers 148 unidrivers 222 Fit to Page settings PCL Traditional Drivers 132 PS Emulation Driver 190 Flip Pages Up PCL traditional drivers 122 unidriver settings 242 Font Substitution Table PS Emulation Unidriver 259 fonts DIMM settings PCL traditional drivers 169 DIMM settings unidrivers 260 Euro symbol 263 370 Index External PCL unidrivers 260 features 4 PS 3 emulation 174 PS Emulation Driver settings 181 PS Emulation Unidriver 263 Send TrueType as Bitmap PCL traditional drivers 127 129 substitution table PS Emulation Driver 182 substitution table unidrivers 259 unidriver settings 207 Upload Fonts HP Printer Utility 307 Windows 50 52 Form to Tray Assignment unidrivers 258 Front Cover settings PCL traditional drivers 147 unidrivers 221 FTP direct printing Windows 362 Windows firmware updates 354 Full Installation choosing 21 dialog boxes Windows 59 G Graphic settings PCL traditional drivers 129 unidrivers 207 Graphics Mode HP PCL 5 Unidriver 209 Graphics tab PS Emulation Driver 179 grayscale settings PS Emulation Unidriver 263 guides See documentation H Halftone settings PS Emulation Driver 181 hard disk printer 265 PS Emulation Driver settings 193 unidriver settings 265 hardware requirements Macintosh 272 heavy paper paper type commands 349 help Bubble 112 Macintosh 277 PCL traditional drivers 111 PS Emulation Driver 174 unidrivers 203 Help button Windows installation
174. al print drivers for MS Windows ENWW 8 5 by 11 inches 8 5 by 11 inches Figure 4 9 Preview images Legal on Letter Scale to Fit off left and on right When the size for which the document is formatted that is the logical size differs from the target size the document preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size of Normal Size The of Normal Size option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting The default setting in the entry box is 100 of the normal size The normal size is defined as the media size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program if the software program does not negotiate the media size with the driver The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer The limits of the range are from 2596 to 40096 and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control that is when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected Any change to the scale also changes the document preview image which increases or decreases from the upper left corner of the preview The slider bar controls the scale directly The value in the edit box changes as the slider bar indicator is dragged and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale Each click on the arrows increases or decreases the sc
175. ale by 1 Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10 You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider bar indicator Instead either use the slider bar indicator to approximate the value and then use the arrows to refine the value or type the value into the entry box The following settings disable of Normal Size e Print Document On on the Effects tab is selected e Pages per Sheet on the Finishing tab is not 1 Document preview image ENWW The document preview image is a line drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text The document preview image appears in the upper right corner of the following Properties driver tabs e Finishing e Effects Effects tab features 133 7 i co O a S EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo e Paper e Basics Watermarks Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark create a custom watermark text only or edit an existing watermark The Watermarks group box contains the following controls o Current Watermarks e First Page Only e Edit Current Watermarks The following watermarks are preset in the driver e none e Confidential e Draft e SAMPLE The drop down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system plus the string none which indicates that no watermark is selected This is the default setting Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the documen
176. ality Print Task Quick Sets The first group box in the upper portion of the Finishing tab is Print Task Quick Sets Because they are all the same control any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the tab affects the Print Task Quick Sets group boxes on all of the Properties driver tabs that have the Print Task Quick Sets settings e Finishing e Effects e Paper e Job Storage e Basics Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other print driver tabs Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network administrator settings or user defined printing specifications such as media size pages per sheet and so on By default the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here When you change any of the default settings on any of the Properties driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here type the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set and then click Save The Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry To delete a Print Task Quick Set select it in the drop down menu and click Delete Ez NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users These administrator Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users but usually cannot be modified by users Users can also define Pri
177. allation 105 millimeters settings 145 mirror image PS Emulation Driver 181 mobile devices printing from 328 model number 327 model scripts UNIX 8 models features 3 PCL traditional driver settings 165 moire effect handling Mopier settings PCL traditional drivers 167 PS Emulation Driver 193 unidriver 265 More Configuration Options PCL traditional drivers 169 More Options PS Emulation Driver 178 MS Windows Cluster Server 8 support 8 128 129 N negative image PS Emulation Driver 181 Network settings HP Embedded Web Server 45 339 Networking tab HP Embedded Web Server 44 338 networks direct printing 364 Embedded Jetdirect page printing 38 firewalls 64 firmware updates 357 HP Driver Preconfiguration 31 HP Jetdirect Administrator s Guide 18 HP Web Jetadmin downloading 47 Macintosh settings 317 Point and Print installation 105 TCP IP Settings Windows installation dialog box 75 Windows printing system software installation 57 ENWW Next steps dialog box Windows 84 Novell NetWare operating systems Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 30 number of copies setting PCL traditional drivers 161 PS Emulation Driver 177 unidrivers 207 266 O ON OFF schedule 338 online help See help operating systems availability of software components 8 Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 29 standalone drivers 7 support 6 Optimizations option PCL unidrivers 208 Optional Paper Sources PCL traditional drivers 168
178. alled separately have a separate Installable Options setting The input trays listed here are also listed as media sources on the Paper Quality tab Configuring the trays 1 Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list 2 Use the drop down menu to select the media size or form that is loaded in that tray 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays 4 Click OK to enable the settings or if necessary click Cancel to reconfigure all the trays and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper Quality tab Font Substitution Table Use the Font Substitution Table settings to install and remove external fonts for the device External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts Click the Font Substitution Table option to open a list of fonts as show in the following figure Use the settings to change the TrueType to printer font mappings 2 HP LJ P3005 PCL6 Properties General Sharing Ports Advanced Security Device Settings About e gd Font Substitution Table 3Of Don t Substitute gt o Arial Unicode MS Don t Substitute gt Albertus Don t Substitute gt Albertus Extra Bold Don t Substitute gt Albertus Medium Don t Substitute gt Antique Olive Don t Substitute gt Antique Olive Compact Don t Substitute gt ArborText Don t Substitute gt Arial Don t Substitute gt Arial Baltic Don t Substitute gt Arial Black Don t Su
179. ams it is generally best to use the print driver to set media size only when printing from software programs that lack a media size setting such as NotePad or when producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes ET NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media sizes within a single document When you change the print driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the device a control panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or select another tray For information about media sizes see Media attributes on page 344 When the Use Different Paper Covers check box is selected and different options are configured the Size is Source is and Type is menus change offering a variety of options The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper tab The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box Ez NOTE The Custom button is not available when Use Different Paper Covers is selected and any setting other than First Page is also selected Custom Paper Size x r Name y m Size Width Height no Ha j j Use Millimeters Close Help Figure 4 13 Custom Paper Size dialog box Paper tab features 141 72 Ll co O a S EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo Name When the Custom Paper Size d
180. anel Mopier Mode The multiple original print mopy function is an HP designed feature that produces multiple collated copies from a single print job Multiple original printing mopying increases performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the device once and then storing it in memory The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed All documents that are printed in mopier mode can be created controlled managed and finished from the computer which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier ET NOTE The Mopier Mode function is not available without a hard disk The HP LaserJet P3005 supports the transmit once mopying feature when the Mopier Mode setting on the Device Settings tab is Enabled Use the HP PCL 6 Unidriver HP PCL 5 Unidriver or PS Emulation Unidriver to perform mopying in one of two ways either through the software or through the device hardware When the mopier is enabled mopying takes place through the device hardware by default One copy of a multiple page print job is transmitted once through the network to the device together with a printer job language PJL command directing the device to make the specified number of copies When the mopier is disabled mopying is not necessarily disabled The driver can perform mopying through the software rather than the device hardware the mopying path that is disabled when you change the Mopy Mode setting to Disabled However s
181. aper Options Size TS 9 5 11 inches Letter IV Use Different Paper Covers Front Cover Y First Page Dther Pages xj Source is automatically Select Type is Unspecified hd Figure 4 17 Last Page options The following are the Last Page options e Source is drop down menu e Type is drop down menu The Source is setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here The Type is drop down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports Back Cover Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document The Back Cover setting and options are shown in the following figure m Paper Options Size ss 85x11 inches letter v Use Different Paper Covers Y First Page Dther Pages Last Page IV Add Blank or Preprinted Cover Source is Automatically Select Y Type is Unspecified hed Figure 4 18 Back Cover setting 150 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW The following are the Back Cover options e Adda Blank or Preprinted Cover check box e Source is drop down menu e Type is drop down menu When you select Back Cover also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting The Source is and Type is d
182. ar the Duplexing Unit check box on the Configure tab 120 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Select the media type that corresponds to the media that you are using for the print job The following media types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side e Plain e Preprinted e Letterhead e Prepunched e Bond e Recycled e Colored e Rough Cardstock media can be manually printed on the second side but no change occurs to the print mode Transparencies and labels should not be manually printed on the second side To print a multiple page document follow these steps 1 Select the Print on Both Sides Manually check box 2 Click OK The even number pages of the document print 3 When the control panel shows the MANUALLY FEED message insert the stack of media on which the even number pages have been printed as indicated in the following figure LE c 0 o c cw O me oe u A o I gt pa Lo ENWW Finishing tab features 121 Print on Both Sides Instructions After the even numbered pages have printed a message will appear on the printer s display instructing you where to load the paper Follow the instructions below to print the odd numbered pages second sides 1 NOTE the location of the 2 Maintaining the same Touch the OK button at short edge of your paper orientation insert the paper the device to continue Remove the paper stack sta
183. ate Now feature automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears on the Configure tab of the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver or HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and on the Device Settings tab of the HP PCL 6 PCL 5 or PS emulation unidriver ET NOTE The Update Now feature is not available with the HP Traditional postscript level 3 emulation driver To activate the Update Now feature for the HP PCL 6 PCL 5 or PS emulation unidriver follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Printing Preferences 6 Click Device Settings 7 If necessary click Installable Options to expand it and show the options 8 In the Automatic Configuration drop down menu select Update Now 9 Click OK to save the setting ET NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows 2000 or Windows XP hosts To activate the Update Now feature for the HP traditional PCL 6 or PCL 5 driver follow these steps 1 Click Start Select Settings Click Printers Right click the device name Click Properties to gain access to all print driver tabs Click Device Settings Click the Configure tab In the Automatic Configurati
184. ate fails in an MS Windows operating system the RFU file must be resent If a remote firmware update fails in a Macintosh operating system contact support from an HP Customer Care Center The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective action required for each situation Table 7 8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure Reason for firmware update failure Corrective action The RFU file is corrupted The device recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update Download the file again and send the new file to the device Download the file from www hp com go ljp3005 firmware The wrong device is contained in The device recognizes the printer mismatch and rejects the update Download the the RFU file correct file and send it to the device Download the file from www hp com go ljp3005 firmware The upgrade was interrupted See Table 7 9 Update messages on page 352 A flash hardware failure occurred Although it is extremely unlikely the device might have a hardware failure Call technical support to address the problem see the flyer that came with the device for a local telephone support list Three messages appear during a normal update process others RESEND UPGRADE and RFU LOAD ERROR appear only if the update process does not succeed Table 7 9 Update messages Printer message Explanation RECEIVING UPGRADE This message appear
185. ating system 9 common features 22 customizing 86 Windows 20 Installing dialog box Customization Wizard 103 Installing dialog box Windows 82 Instant Support 39 Internet Services unidrivers 256 IP address locating 38 IT administrators alerts setting up 331 wake time settings 338 J Jetadmin See HP Web Jetadmin Jetdirect Administrator s Guide 18 Job Cancel button 333 Job Notification Options PCL traditional drivers 157 Job storage enabling in PCL traditional drivers 169 Macintosh 314 PCL traditional drivers 152 PS Emulation Driver 188 193 unidriver settings 246 265 job storage features 3 Job Timeout settings 196 263 JPEG Passthrough 267 L landscape orientation settings PCL traditional drivers 122 161 PS Emulation Driver 177 unidrivers 242 245 Language screen 335 Language Selection dialog box Customization Wizard 87 89 Language Selection dialog box Windows 60 languages CD ROMs Macintosh 274 CD ROMs Windows 10 Index 371 HP Embedded Web Server 41 Language Selection dialog box Windows installation 60 Last Page settings PCL traditional drivers 149 unidrivers 224 Layout Options unidrivers 210 Layout settings PS Emulation Driver 176 letterhead alternative mode PCL traditional drivers 171 unidrivers 210 license agreement dialog box Windows 62 links 334 links HP Embedded Web Server 39 41 Linux operating systems driver availability 7 local port command line printing Windows 363 localized
186. ation Wizard 90 Printer Properties dialog box Customization Wizard 101 Printer Properties dialog box Windows 79 Printer Settings dialog box Windows 73 printer setting default 106 printing direct in a Windows network 364 direct in UNIX 364 direct using FTP 361 direct using local Windows port 363 direct using LPR command 364 files using HP Embedded Web Server 38 User Guide 17 printing files 328 329 Printing Preferences tabs 201 Private job settings PCL traditional drivers 156 unidrivers 250 PRN files 328 PRN files printing 38 product support 39 Proof and Hold job settings PCL traditional drivers 155 unidrivers 249 Properties tabs unidrivers 202 protocols PS Emulation Unidriver 262 Windows installation dialog box 75 PS 3 font emulation 174 PS Emulation Driver About 179 accessing 173 collation settings 190 context sensitive help 174 copies number of 177 Device Options tab 185 features 173 Fitto Page 190 Fonts tab 181 Graphics tab 179 halftone settings 181 Help system 174 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 33 HPPJL Encoding 188 included 24 Installable Options 192 job storage settings 188 193 Layout settings 176 media supported 344 memory settings 187 mirror image printing 181 Mopier Mode 193 More Options 178 negative image printing 181 operating system support 9 Page Setup tab 174 Postscripttab 194 Printer features group box 187 Printing on Both Sides 178 PS 3 font emulation 174 resolution settings
187. atures for complex jobs or if you often print complex graphics print postscript PS documents or use many downloaded fonts HP recommends that you install additional memory Added memory also gives you more flexibility in supporting job storage features A minimum total memory of 80 MB is required to use the job storage features After additional memory is installed the driver must be configured to reflect the changes in the device If bidirectional communication is enabled in your environment the Update Now feature can be used to update the drivers To configure the drivers manually after installing additional memory follow these steps 1 Click Start Select Settings Click Printers Right click the device name Click Properties Click the Configure tab Under Other Options click More o we Ug A A A DS If additional memory has been installed change the setting in the Total Memory drop down menu If you select at least 80 MB of total installed memory this also selects the Job Storage Enabled check box 9 Click OK to make the job storage features available To disable the job storage feature follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 152 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Click Printers Right click the device name Click Properties Click the Configure tab Click More 0 N O A m e Click to clear the Job Storage Enabled check box in the More Configuration
188. b All Use Different Paper Covers options use the last Size is setting that you select in any one of the Use Different Paper Covers options When you change the type and source of the media and covers the settings that you select remain configured until you close the software program 226 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Document preview image The document preview image is a line drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right side up The document preview image appears in the upper right corner ofthe following Printing Preferences driver tabs e Paper Quality e Effects e Finishing Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image When the mouse cursor moves over the document preview image the cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand Toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image Print Quality The Print Quality group box contains the following controls e Print Quality drop down menu e EconoMode Print Quality drop down menu ENWW The Print Quality drop down menu contains the following controls in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver e ProRes 1200 170 Ipi e ProRes 1200 141 Ipi e FastRes 1200 e 600 dpi ET NOTE When a ProRes1200 setting is selected documents are printed using a resolution of 1200
189. b Watermark Details dialog box none Yes Message Click Edit for Watermark Details Message Angle Effects tab Watermark Details dialog box Diagonal Yes watermark Click Edit for Watermark Details Watermark Effects tab Watermark Details dialog box Unavailable unless Yes message angle Click Edit for Watermark Details the Angle option is angle selected 52 degrees Name watermark Effects tab Watermark Details dialog Arial Yes font box Font Attributes group box Color watermark Effects tab Watermark Details dialog Gray Yes font box Font Attributes group box Shading watermark Effects tab Watermark Details dialog Very Light Yes font box Font Attributes group box Size watermark Effects tab Watermark Details dialog 80 No font box Font Attributes group box Style watermark Effects tab Watermark Details dialog Regular Yes font box Font Attributes group box Size is Paper Quality tab Paper Options group Letter Yes box Use Different Paper Paper Quality tab Paper Options group box Available not selected No 214 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Table 5 1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer continued Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for Preconfigurable U S English Print Task Quick Sets Source is Paper Quality tab Paper Options group Automatically Select Yes box Type is Pa
190. b selections and menu bar selections Information tab The following information is available on the HP EWS Information tab Click the menu items on the left side of the HP EWS Information tab to view the information E NOTE If an HP EWS password has been set the Information tab is the only visible tab until the user logs in See Security on page 44 for more information Not all of the screens on the tab are included in this STR For more information see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide e Device Status This screen provides current status information about the device e Configuration Page This screen shows the values of all of the settings that are available in the printer e Supplies Status This screen provides information about the print cartridge and the total pages that have been printed and the serial number of the device e Event log This screen provides information about reported printer errors e Usage page This screen provides a page count for each size of media that has passed through the device as well as the number of duplexed pages that have been printed e Device Information This screen shows device information such as the device TCP IP address and serial number e Control Panel This screen shows the device control panel e Print Use this screen to print documents that are print ready such as those generated by a print to file driver option PCL documents PS documents PDF files and te
191. both sides of the sheet Load the paper the same as for printing on both sides If the printer tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either face up or face down load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown When this option is selected you must select one of the following options in the Type is setting e Letterhead e Preprinted Ignore Application Collation This setting overrides collation options that are selected in the print options of a software program When Ignore Application Collation is selected the print driver collates in the most appropriate way for the print job The performance of this feature depends on the software program that you are using Printer Memory The Total Memory value shows the total amount of memory that is physically installed in the printer The Total memory value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific configuration of the printer The default values for total printer memory are specified on the Configuration tab The Driver Work Space DWS value shows the amount of memory that is available for keeping track of fonts that are downloaded from the driver The driver deletes downloaded fonts if it has exceeded the available memory value The DWS value is a dynamic value that varies depending on the specific configuration of the printer Use the DWS option to specify the amount of work space memory that is available to the printer An accurate DWS value optimizes dr
192. box The Print Quality Details dialog box opens The Print Quality Details dialog box has different options depending on the driver that you are using Changing resolution might change the formatting of the printed document e Best Quality setting e Faster Printing setting e EconoMode check box e Details button Best Quality Select this option to print documents at the optimal resolution of the printer This option provides the best quality Faster Printing Select this option to print faster than with the Best Quality setting but with slightly lower quality This setting uses 300 dpi for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and 600 dpi for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print quality settings in the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver as shown in the following figure Print Quality Details 2 x r Current Setting gt Output Settings This is the Faster Printing setting Resolution FastRes 1200 Font Settings Resolution Enhancement technology REt ic On Off v Scale Patterns WYSIWYG Print all Text as Black Cancel Help Figure 4 6 Print Quality Details dialog box for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver The following options are available e Current Setting 126 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW e Font Settings e Output Setting
193. bstitute gt Arial CE Don t Substitute gt Arial CYR Don t Substitute gt Arial Greek Don t Substitute gt Arial Narrow Don t Substitute gt Arial TUR Don t Substitute Figure 5 21 Font Substitution Table m e uem 0 y os 20 ED ssc ss Qa I ENWW Device Settings tab features 259 External Fonts ET NOTE The External Fonts option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and PCL unidrivers It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver Use the External Fonts option to install and remove external fonts for the device External fonts can be soft fonts or DIMM fonts Click the External Fonts option to make the Properties button available Click Properties to open the HP Font Installer dialog box which is shown in the following figure HP Font Installer Printer Font File Location Browse Font s to be Added Installed Font s Figure 5 22 HP Font Installer dialog box Topics e Installing external fonts e Removing external fonts Installing external fonts Follow these steps to install external fonts 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings e Click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home Right click the name of the device Click Properties Click the Device Settings tab gt a PF Click the External Fonts option The Pro
194. cate a firmware upgrade file and install it on the device The Update Firmware screen is shown in the following figure 306 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Y Information And Support Update Firmware Select a file containing a firmware update and transfer that file to the printer aki Supplies Status to update it RE Device Information File Name Not selected E File Upload Update Firmware A Upload Fonts HP Support y Printer Settings i Figure 6 34 Update Firmware screen Click Choose to open a navigation screen Browse to the firmware file and click Open The Update Firmware screen shows the file name Click Update Upload Fonts In the Information and Support menu click Upload Fonts to gain access to fonts that you can upload to the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Y Information And Support Upload Fonts Select a file containing printer fonts and transfer that file to your printer The uk Supplies Status fonts you transfer will then be available for use in print jobs gems Device Information Fonte in printers Memory E File Upload h Albertus ExtraBold Albertus Medium amp Update Firmware jAntiqueOlive AntiqueOlive Bold AntiqueOlive Italic Arial Arial Bold Y Printer Settings lia ia HP Support 3 Duplex Mode Remove The drop down menu in the Upload Fonts pane has the following option e Memory Fonts that are available in the device memory are listed To remov
195. ce Information e File Upload e Update Firmware e Upload Fonts e HP Support e Duplex mode e Economode e Resolution e Trays Configuration e Lock Resources e Stored Jobs e E mail Alerts e Network Settings e Bonjour Settings e Additional Settings Access to the HP Printer Utility In Mac OS X V10 3 follow these steps to gain access to the HP Printer Utility 1 Open the Finder 2 Find and double click Printers The Select Printer screen appears 298 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW In Mac OS X V10 4 follow these steps to gain access to the HP Printer Utility 1 Click Go 2 Click Utilities 3 Double click HP Printer Selector The Select Printer screen appears E fe o 17 Name HP Color Laserjet 3600 A20C54 a HP Laserjet 5200 g NPIC9047A Figure 6 24 Select Printer screen printer not selected If the device does not appear click More Printers The Connection Type screen appears as shown in the following figure ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 299 Connection Type Model Name Serial Number Canes Ada Figure 6 25 Connection Type screen Choose the connection type USB or TCP IP The device name appears under Model Name as shown in the preceding figure On the Connection Type screen click Add The Select Printer screen appears showing device information To open the HP Printer Utility directly select the device an
196. ck Hardware Address MAC type the device hardware address in the field and then click Next to continue the installation The Set Port Name dialog box opens as shown in the following figure E o z e po o To install the device using the TCP IP address click IP Address type the device TCP IP address in the field and then click Next to continue the installation The Set Port Name dialog box opens as shown in the following figure ENWW Print driver installation instructions 73 HP LaserJet P3005 Setup ES e Set Port Name h Specify a name for the network port being created for this printer j invent Port Name NOTE In most cases the default port name should be acceptable If desired specify a different name lt Back Cancel Figure 3 17 Set Port Name dialog box Type a port name in the Port Name field and click Next to open the Installation Type dialog box see Figure 3 20 Installation Type dialog box on page 76 Click Next to proceed with the installation The Installation Type dialog box opens see Figure 3 20 Installation Type dialog box on page 76 Ez NOTE Select Yes in the Confirm Changing Setting dialog box see Figure 3 13 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box on page 70 to open the Change TCP IP Settings dialog box as shown in the following figure 74 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW ENWW HP Laser Jet P3005 Setup E
197. ck into Tray 1 printed side printing from the Output Bin Do down not discard blank sheets Figure 4 4 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box When you have completed the steps in the dialog box the second half of the print job prints on the back side of the sheets in the stack of media The driver does not require the program to specifically support odd and even page printing because the driver coordinates this function Flip Pages Up Use the Flip Pages Up check box which is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected to specify the duplex binding option By default the Flip Pages Up check box is not available The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box depending on the media orientation that is selected on the Basics tab Table 4 2 Page orientation Orientation Basics tab Flip Pages Up selected Flip Pages Up not selected Portrait Short edge binding Long edge binding Landscape Long edge binding Short edge binding When Print on Both Sides is selected the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page In addition a folded over corner appears in the lower right portion of the preview image indicating that printing occurs on the back side An arrow on the folded over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together 122 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Window
198. creen Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10 3 1 If you are installing the device using a USB connection connect the USB cable between the HP LaserJet P3005 printer and the computer Turn on the device If you are installing using a network connection verify that the network cable is connected to the device and the device is on 290 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW 2 Inthe Applications folder open the Utilities folder and then run the Printer Setup Utility e008 Printer List el NAAA Stats Kid g HP Color Laserjet 2700n HP Color Laserjet g HP Color Laserjet 2700n 9D63FE HP Color Laserjet z SP Laserjet MSO35 MFP HP Laserjet M5035 1 HP Laserjet P3005 HP Laserjet P3005 Figure 6 18 Printer List screen You can also configure the device using the Print amp Fax pane of System Preferences from the Apple menu choose System Preferences then choose Print amp Fax eoo Print amp Fax E a Printing Faxing Sharing In Menu Printer HP Color LaserJet 2700n a HP Color LaserJet 2700 HP Laserjet M5035 MFP ame RECHSORSERWS gt Location Directly attached via usb HP Laserjet P3005 Kind HP Laserjet P3005 Status Idle Y M M Supplies for this printer Print Queue 3f Printer Setup 3 Selected Printer in Print Dialog Last Printer Used Hey Default Paper Size in Page Setup US Letter 4 O M id Click the lock to prevent further changes Fig
199. cript tab follow these steps 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click Start Select Settings Click Printers Right click the device name Click Properties Click the PostScript tab The PostScript tab controls the PostScript functions for the PS Emulation Driver The following figure shows the PostScript tab 194 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW HP LaserJet P3005 PS Properties 2 xi General Details Sharing Paper Graphics Fonts Device Options PostScript PostScript output format PostScript optimize for speed m PostScript header Download header with each print job Assume header is downloaded and retained Send Header Now IV Print PostScript error information PostScript timeout values Job timeout jo E seconds Wait timeout 240 Y seconds Advanced Restore Defaults Cancel Apply Figure 4 36 PostScript tab The PostScript tab contains the following controls and options e PostScript output format e PostScript header e Print PostScript error information e PostScript timeout values e Advanced e Restore Defaults 7 La co O ot EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo PostScript output format Use the PostScript output format list to specify the format for postscript files The following options are available e PostScript optimize for speed Use this setting for printing most documents
200. cted Flip Pages Up Finishing tab Document Options group box Unavailable not Yes selected Booklet Printing Finishing tab Document Options group box Unavailable Off Yes Pages per Sheet Finishing tab Document Options group box 1 Yes Print Page Borders Finishing tab Document Options group box Unavailable Yes Page Order Finishing tab Document Options group box Unavailable Yes Print Quality Finishing tab Print Quality group box Default Yes Current Setting Finishing tab Print Quality Details dialog box This is the Default Click Details on Finishing tab setting Raster Compression Finishing tab Print Quality Details dialog box Automatic HP Traditional Click Details on Finishing tab PCL 6 Driver only Rendering Mode Finishing tab Print Quality Details dialog box Automatic HP Traditional Click Details on Finishing tab PCL 5 Driver only Send TrueType as Finishing tab Print Quality Details dialog box Available not Yes Bitmaps Click Details on Finishing tab selected Output Settings Finishing tab Print Quality Details dialog box Scale Patterns Click Details on Finishing tab WYSIWIG selected Print Document On Effects tab Fit to Page group box Off print on the size Yes that is specified on the Paper tab Size to print on Effects tab Fit to Page group box Actual size specified Yes on the Paper tab Scale to Fit Effects tab Fit to Page group box Unavailable selected Yes Watermarks Effects tab Watermarks dialog box none Yes Fi
201. d then click Next to proceed with the installation The Printer Connection dialog box opens as shown in the following figure 62 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW ENWW HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Printer Connection How will your HP LaserJet P3005 printer be connected C USB Cable C Parallel Cable r Wired Networking lt Back Cancel Figure 3 6 Printer Connection dialog box ET NOTE The HP LaserJet P3005 printer does not support infrared connections If you select USB Cable a direct connection using a USB 2 0 cable and then click Next the Model dialog box opens This is the default option If you select Parallel Cable a direct connection using a parallel cable and then click Next the Model dialog box opens ET NOTE The printing system software should be installed before the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is connected to the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on During the installation process the software will prompt you to connect the device To continue with the default installation sequence see Figure 3 19 Model dialog box on page 76 If you are installing the HP LaserJet P3005 printer over the network select Wired Networking in the Printer Connection dialog box For a network installation the HP LaserJet P3005 printer must be connected to the network and turned on before the printing system software is installed so that the
202. d Ctrl D settings 198 262 Send TrueType as Bitmaps PCL traditional drivers 127 129 serialnumber 38 327 service providers alerts setting up 331 Services tab 255 Set Port Name dialog box Windows 74 settings continuous export 33 locking 33 overriding 107 199 ENWW Print Task Quick Sets PCL traditional drivers 115 Print Task Quick Sets unidrivers 212 Settings tab HP Embedded Web Server 41 Settings tab HP EWS 329 Settings tab HP EWS Device Configuration utility 329 shutdown setting wake time 338 silent installation command line 104 Customization Wizard 86 sizes paper commands 347 custom 348 margins 347 PCL Traditional Driver settings 140 Print on Both Sides settings unidrivers 239 Print on Both sides PCL traditional drivers 119 PS Emulation Driver settings 175 supported 344 unidriver settings 217 sleep mode 3 smart duplexing 239 Source is settings PCL traditional drivers 145 PS Emulation Driver 177 unidrivers 219 sources paper See trays Specify Printer dialog box Windows 72 Specify TCP IP Port dialog box Customization Wizard 92 speed specifications 3 standalone drivers 7 status alerts 331 devices 39 Macintosh supplies 301 supplies 38 Status tab HP EWS 322 storage job enabling in PCL traditional drivers 169 Macintosh 314 ENWW PCL traditional drivers 152 PS Emulation Driver 188 193 unidriver settings 246 265 substitution table for fonts PS Emulation Driver 182 supplies AutoSen
203. d Options Default Paper Size LETTER Tray 1 Size ANY SIZE Tray 1 Type ANYTYPE Tray 2 Size LETTER Tray 2 Type PLAIN Duplex Unit Internal Input Trays 1 TRAY 1 100 Sheets 2 TRAY 2 500 Sheets Oulpul Bins 1 STANDARD TOP BN 250 Sheets Face Down IK Figure 6 54 HP EWS Configuration Page screen Supplies Status page The Supplies Status page displays the status of all of the supplies used by the device including the black print cartridges 324 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW HP LaserJet P3005 Printers Supplies Status Ordeidng Information HewienPackard Supplies can be orderedon the Internet on line through your printer software or by calling an authorized reseller Rieter to your User Guide for instructions etn orsa 000 Cs Approximate Pages Remaining 6310 edn vary depending on types of documents printed Low Reached NO OutFleached NO Serial Number 6317262 Pages printed with this supply 190 Page Count by Paper Size Legal 0 AKL eter 12 ASBSiExpcutive 0 Custom Other 0 Number of Jobs Processed 28 First Install Date 20050831 LastUsedDate 20060817 Return amp Recycling Please return your genuine HP supplies for recycling to Hewlett Packard For more information please visit us at hip Mereres ho comian ys ka Figure 6 55 HP EWS Supplies Status page Event Log Use the Event Log screen to track the events that occur on the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Eve
204. d PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Paper Options Size is 8 5 x 11 inches Letter v l Use Different Paper Covers w Front Cover First Page Other Pages Rack Power M Source is Automatically Select v Type is Unspecified v Figure 5 9 Last Page options The following are the Last Page options e Size is drop down menu e Source is drop down menu e Type is drop down menu The Size is setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job Changes made to the Size is setting here override any previous Size is settings in other Use Different Paper Covers options The Type is drop down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports ET NOTE Use the same size of media for the entire print job All Use Different Paper Covers options use the last Size is setting is selected in any one of the Use Different Paper Covers options When you change the type and source of the media and covers the settings remain configured until you close the software program Back Cover Use the Back Cover options to include a blank or preprinted back cover on a document or to include a back cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document The following figure shows the Back Cover setting and options ENWW Paper Quality tab features 225 BS e E o e E ou a5 0 gt fe o S Paper
205. d click Launch Utility Y HP Laserjet M5035 MFP 10 10 48 119 Figure 6 26 Select Printer screen printer selected On the Select Printer screen click Settings to open the Device Status screen in the HP EWS 300 Chapter6 Macintosh ENWW To open the HP Printer Utility select the device and click Launch Utility Ifthe HP Printer Utility software detects a condition that might need attention the Printer Status screen appears Fr gt 000 Printer Status The following error conditions have been detected on your printer Paper level is low Please select the error name in the list above to get the explanation advice Please add some paper to the input tray PA Figure 6 27 Printer Status screen Address the condition and click OK to close the screen The HP Printer Utility opens The following sections describe the screens and features that are available in the HP Printer Utility Supplies Status The HP Printer Utility opens to the Current Supplies Levels screen 3 0 A HP Printer Utility Y Information And Support Current Supplies Levels HE Supplies Status The current supplies levels for the selected printer is shown below Device Information E File Upload e Update Firmware Black 100 A Upload Fonts HP Support Detailed Supplies Information y Printer Settings Ed Duplex Mode Shop for Supplies Printer Status Idle Supplies Gen
206. d drive Click Go Back to return to the previous screen Click the icon to the right of each item in the list to open a screen that describes the component Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk The Installing screen appears as shown in the following figure If installed the HP Device Configuration Utility is installed under the Application directory in a directory labeled HP EWS Device Configuration An uninstaller utility for the HP Device Configuration Utility is also installed in this directory ENWW Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 283 OD HP Laserjet v6 2 Installing 8 Introduction Read Me License Installation Type 8 Installing e Finish Up Items remaining to be installed 327 Installing classes nib Stop Figure 6 10 Installing dialog The Installing dialog shows installation progress No action is required unless you want to stop the installation Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process When installation is complete the LaserJet ReadMe rtf icon appears on the desktop The Finish Up dialog appears stating that the installation was successful as shown in the following figure 284 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW BAD 3 Finish Up 8 Introduction Installation was successful If you are finished click Quit to leave 6 Read Me the Installer If you wish to perform additional installations click Continue 8 License 8 Installation Type 8 Installing
207. d feature 332 AutoSend page HP Embedded Web Server 41 features 5 Macintosh status 301 ordering 22 usage AutoSend page 41 usage information 326 viewing status 38 Supplies Status page HP EWS 324 Support tab HP Printer Utility 308 support product 39 system requirements Windows 6 T TBCP output protocol PS Emulation Unidriver 262 TCP IP address e mail configuration 331 locating 327 TCP IP address locating 38 Test Page dialog box Windows 84 text files command line printing 361 text files printing 328 text printing all as black PCL traditional drivers 130 unidriver 209 time settings 336 time settings HP Embedded Web Server 41 timeout settings 196 263 Toolbox not supported 19 traditional drivers See PCL traditional drivers PS Emulation Driver transparencies paper type commands 349 128 trays Alternative Letterhead Mode 171 210 autoconfiguration 28 custom paper sizes 144 219 included 5 344 Installable Options PS Emulation Driver 192 Macintosh configuration 313 media supported 4 347 paper source commands 344 paper type commands 349 PCL traditional driver settings 168 PS Emulation Driver settings 177 Source is settings PCL traditional drivers 145 Source is settings unidrivers 219 unidriver configuration 264 unidriver Form to Tray Assignment 258 Usage Page 326 troubleshooting duplexing unit Macintosh 310 File to E mail utility 342 firmware upgrades 351 HP driver Diagnostic Printer Check
208. d since then the Name drop down menu shows the name of the last selected custom media size e Ifthe width or height controls have been changed since a custom size was selected or saved or if a saved media size has just been deleted then the Name drop down menu shows the default name of Untitled e lfanew name has been typed into the Name drop down menu for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size then that new name will remain in the drop down menu until a saved custom media size has been selected from the drop down menu If you type a new name into the Name drop down menu but then do not click Save you can change the width and height values without losing the name However if a saved media size name is selected from the drop down menu any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning and replaced by the values of the selected custom media size 142 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Save Delete or Rename The dynamic command button located under the Name drop down menu has three possible labels Save Delete and Rename e Saveis the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the most recent save action or since the selection of an existing custom media size Clicking the button causes the name in the Name drop down menu to be compared against each of the saved names If a duplicate is found a dialog box appears asking if it is okay to replace t
209. de Types in Selected Selected Selected Selected Applications Source List If it is installed and working the bidirectional mechanism will detect the correct model and update the configuration accordingly either during installation or when you select Update Now on the Configure tab However the printer model name that appears in the Printer Model text box is set to Autoconfigured Paper Handling Options The Paper Handling Options group box contains the following controls 166 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW e Duplexing unit e Allow Manual Duplexing e Mopier Enabled e Optional Paper Sources Duplexing unit The HP LaserJet P3005dn and HP LaserJet P3005x printer models are equipped with automatic 2 sided printing duplexing which you can use to print on both sides of supported media Automatic 2 sided printing is not supported for the following media types e Transparency e Labels e Cardstock e Tough Paper e Envelope ET NOTE These printer models support smart duplexing The device uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and runs the pages through the duplexing unit only if there is printable information on the second side of the page Allow Manual Duplexing Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media except transparencies envelopes and labels To use this feature reinsert the
210. ding system files are placed at the root of the directory that appears in the Location field Be sure that enough space is available on the directory before continuing E o z e xe o Click Printer Properties to open the Printer Properties dialog box and modify the printer properties This dialog box has one tab e General ENWW Print driver installation instructions 101 Printer Properties General Printer Name HP LJ P3005 Note A printer will be created For each driver being installed The driver type will be appended to the name specified above Example HP Model 1000 PCL6 Location Comment V Use this printer as the default printer For Windows based programs Default Driver Figure 3 49 Printer Properties General tab On the General tab change the printer name by typing a new name in the Printer Name field Use the Location and Comment fields to describe the printer You can also leave these fields blank If you want to use the HP LaserJet P3005 printer as your default printer select the Use the printer as the default printer for MS Windows based programs check box and select the default driver Click OK to return to the Ready to Create Installer dialog box Click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the printing system software folders and files to create the custom installer The Installing dialog box appears This dialog box remains on the screen until t
211. driver 2 HP LJ P3005 PCL6 Properties General Sharing Ports Advanced Security Device Settings About HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 6 Device Settings E a Form To Tray Assignment Printer Auto Select Letter Manual Feed in Tray 1 Letter Tray 1 Letter Tray 2 Letter Tray 3 Not Available E m Font Substitution Table External Fonts E E Installable Options Automatic Configuration OFF Tray 3 Installed Duplex Unit For 2 Sided Printing Installed Allow Manual Duplexing Enabled Printer Memory 320 MB Printer Hard Disk Not Installed Job Storage Enabled re o S Figure 5 19 HP PCL 6 Unidriver Device Settings tab 0 gt fe o S The following figure shows the Device Settings tab for the PS Emulation Unidriver C fe E 0 es D he 5 a ac ENWW Device Settings tab features 257 2 HP LJ P3005 PS Properties General Sharing Ports Advanced Security Device Settings About HP LaserJet P3005 PS Device Settings a Form To Tray Assignment H y Font Substitution Table Available PostScript Memory 6144 KB Output Protocol ASCII Send CTRL D Before Each Job No Send CTRL D After Each Job Yes Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray Mo Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray No Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts Yes Job Timeout O seconds Wait Timeout 300 seconds Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline 100 pixel s Maxim
212. dy ExtraBold Regular PS 12545 TTF Goudy Italic PS 12543 TTF Helvetica Condensed Regular PS 14526 TTF Helvetica Condensed Bold PS 14528 TTF Helvetica Condensed Bold Italic PS 14529 TTF Helvetica Condensed Italic PS 14527 TTF Hoefler Text Regular PS 24519 TTF Hoefler Text Black Regular PS 24521 TTF Hoefler Text Black Italic PS 24522 TTF Hoefler Text Italic PS 24520 TTF Hoefler Text Ornaments Regular PS 24523 TTF Joanna MT Regular PS 14503 TTF Joanna MT Bold PS 14505 TTF Joanna MT Bold Italic PS 14506 TTF Joanna MT Italic PS 14504 TTF Letter Gothic Italic PS 13778 TTF Letter GothicPS Regular PS 13777 TTF Letter GothicPS Bold PS 13779 TTF Letter GothicPS Bold Italic PS 13780 TTF Lubalin Graph Regular PS 12675 TTF Lubalin Graph Bold PS 12677 TTF Lubalin Graph Bold Italic PS 12625 TTF Lubalin Graph Italic PS 12623 TTF MarigoldPS Regular PS 94073 TTF Mona Lisa Recut Regular PS 14525 TTF Monaco Regular PS 24524 TTF New York Regular PS 24510 TTF Optima Regular PS 12506 TTF Optima Bold PS 12510 TTF Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW ENWW Table 3 2 Additional PS emulation fonts continued Font name Font style File name Optima Bold Italic PS 12511 TTF Optima Italic PS 12507 TTF Oxford Italic PS 14072 TTF StempelGaramond Roman Italic PS 11546 TTF StempelGaramond Roman Regular PS 11545 TTF StempelGaramond Roman Bold PS 11547 TTF StempelGaramond Roman Bold Italic PS 1
213. e File Upload Update Firmware A Upload Fonts HP Support Y Printer Settings Ed Duplex Mode E n Upload l bo Economode amp E e Printer Name NPI937F3D Printer Status Idle Apply Now e Model Name HP Laserjet P3005 Supplies Genuine HP ae Figure 6 33 File Upload screen The File Upload command is supported for file types that can be sent directly to the device without first being opened through a software program Some files can be uploaded to the device but some cannot Documents in the following file formats can be printed by using a command line That is they do not need to be opened in a software program that supports the file format such as the Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader programs for PDF files but can be sent directly to the device by using the File Upload command e HP LaserJet printer command language PCL e Portable document format PDF e Postscript PS e Text TXT On the File Upload screen click Choose to open a navigation screen Locate the file you want to upload and click Open On the File Upload screen click Display response from the device to see whether the upload was successful If the file loads successfully no message appears On the navigation screen select the file and click Open The file name appears in the File Upload screen of the HP Printer Utility Click Upload Update Firmware Choose Update Firmware to lo
214. e next to the X to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark When using this special cursor to select a control the pop up Help window for that feature appears e Pressthe F1 key and the Help window for the currently selected control appears Context sensitive Help When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box a context sensitive Help message appears Incompatible Options messages Incompatible Options settings constraint messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific print driver selections These messages appear in response to selections that are illogical or impossible given the device capabilities or the current settings of other controls For example if you click Print on Both Sides and then change the media type to Transparency a message appears asking you to resolve this conflict ET NOTE Constraint messages are limited and the underlying software architecture might accept some settings that are illogical or impossible for the device to perform Sending a job with incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results If print jobs do not print as expected check the device documentation to ensure that the device has the expected capabilities Incompatible Options x gt The selected paper type cannot be used with the Print on Both Sides duplexing feature 7 La co O a S EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo Figure 4 1 A typical constra
215. e EN English e FI Finnish Suomi e HE Hebrew e HU Hungarian Magyar e NO Norwegian Norsk 274 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW e PL Polish Polski e RU Russian Russ e SV Swedish Svenska e TR Turkish Turk e ENWW Macintosh printing system software 275 Macintosh install and uninstall instructions The HP LaserJet P3005 printer comes with software and installers for MS Windows and Apple Computer Inc Macintosh systems This STR provides procedures for installing and removing the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software for Macintosh operating systems Topics e Macintosh component descriptions e Install the Macintosh printing system e Uninstall the Macintosh printing system Macintosh component descriptions The device includes the following software for Macintosh computers e HP LaserJet P3005 PPD e HP LaserJet P3005 PDE e HP USB EWS Gateway e HP Device Configuration Utility e HP Printer Utility e HP Uninstaller for the HP Device Configuration Utility and HP USB EWS Gateway Topics e HP LaserJet PPDs e PDEs e HP Embedded Web Server e Install notes Readme file o Online help HP LaserJet PPDs In Mac OS X V10 2 8 and later the PPDs are installed in Library Printers PPDs Contents Resources lang lproj where lang is the appropriate localized folder The PPDs in combination with the driver provide access to the device configuration settings and installable opt
216. e HP LaserJet P3005 printer comes with software and installers for MS Windows and Apple Computer Inc Macintosh systems Linux and UNIX systems also support the HP LaserJet P3005 and software is available on the Web For information about specific system installers drivers and components see the section that corresponds to that system NOTE The HP Toolbox is not available on the HP LaserJet P3005 printer c fe 5 Q i5 7 oO xe o Put c E pra e o Topics e MS Windows printing system software e MS Windows driver configuration e HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool e HP Easy Printer Care e HP Embedded Web Server e HP Web Jetadmin ENWW Introduction 19 MS Windows printing system software Topics e Printing system and installer e HP LaserJet print drivers Printing system and installer Topics e HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD for MS Windows systems e Installer features HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD for MS Windows systems In the MS Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems insert the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD into the CD ROM drive to open an interactive CD browser Use the CD browser to install the print driver and related components and to gain access to online user documentation Adobe Acrobat Reader software and optional HP software In the Windows 98 SE Windows Me and Windows Server 2003 op
217. e Macintosh printing system On a Macintosh computer the installation procedures are basically the same for a network administrator a network client and a single user Install the software on any computer that has access rights to the device The computer user must also have administrative rights on the computer in order to install the software Topics e General installation for Macintosh operating systems e Detailed Mac OS X installation e Printer setup General installation for Macintosh operating systems 1 If you are connecting the device to a network connect the network cable to the device network port If you are connecting the device to a computer using a USB cable install the software before connecting the USB cable 2 Insert the Macintosh printing system software CD into the CD ROM drive ET NOTE Ifthe CD screen does not open automatically double click the HP LaserJet P3005 CD ROM icon on the desktop to open the CD ROM window 3 Double click the appropriate HP LaserJet v app icon ENWW Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 277 ET NOTE The Continue button appears only after you type the admin password in the Authenticate dialog The main Installer dialog appears Click Install and follow the onscreen instructions to complete the software installation ET NOTE When you are installing the printing system software be patient The installer must perform an initial search of the
218. e Source Is and Type is settings for any of the covers or pages the settings remain configured until you close the software program from which you are printing For example if you select First Page and change the media source or type and then select Back Cover to change the media source or type the check mark remains beside Front Cover and the selected source and type settings remain in effect The settings are cleared only when you close the software program Front Cover Use the Front Cover options to include a blank or preprinted front cover on a document or to include a front cover from a source tray that is different from the one that is used for the remainder of the document The Front Cover setting and options are shown in the following figure r Paper ptions Size Is 85x11 inches o Letter co TO a S V Use Different Paper Covers S Y First Page Ke 2 Other Pages m E Last Page TO PECES SI zl IV Add Blank or Preprinted Cover q eb Source is I Automatically Select xe Type is Unspecified Se Figure 4 14 Front Cover options ENWW Paper tab features 147 The following are the Front Cover options e Adda Blank or Preprinted Cover check box e Source is drop down menu e Type is drop down menu When you select Front Cover also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting The Source is and Type is drop down menus become
219. e Welcome dialog box appears 60 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Welcome to the HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Wizard This wizard will help you set up your HP LaserJet P3005 printer It is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Version 1 2 70 1 2005 Copyright Hewlett Packard Development Company L P cm Figure 3 4 Welcome to the HP LaserJet 5200 Setup Wizard dialog box When installing the device on a supported operating system click Next on the Welcome screen to continue the installation The Software License Agreement dialog box appears as shown in the following figure E o z e xe o ENWW Print driver installation instructions 61 HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Software License Agreement Please read the license agreement below License Agreement Note The limited varranty for this product and accompanying software is located in the product documentation that you received with this product Please review it at this time ATTENTION USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO THE v If you accept the terms of the Software License Agreement select I agree IF not click Cancel to close setup I agree C Idisagree Figure 3 5 Software License Agreement dialog box The disagree option is selected by default Read the software license agreement select agree an
220. e a font choose it and click Remove ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 307 To add a font click Add The Upload Fonts screen appears as shown in the following figure Upload Fonts Upload Font Name Add System Font Add Font File Cancel Figure 6 36 Upload Fonts dialog To add a system font click Add System Font The Add System Fonts screen appears as shown in the following figure Available System Fonts AlBayan a AlBayan Bold n AmericanTypewriter AmericanTypewriter Bold AmericanTypewriter Condensed AmericanTypewriter CondensedBold AmericanTypewriter CondensedLight AmericanTypewriter Light AndaleMono Apple Chancery AppleGothic AppleMyungjo AppleSymbols Arial Black Cancel Add to List Figure 6 37 Add System Fonts screen To add a font click Add to List To close the screen click Cancel To add a font file click Add Font File in the Upload Fonts screen A navigation screen opens Navigate to the font file and click Open To close the screen click Cancel HP Support Click HP Support to open the HP Online Support screen 308 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW ENWW HP Printer Utility y Information And Support HP Online Support The HP Instant Support page on the HP Web site provides technical assistance ati Supplies Status and support for your printer a n Instant Support Device Information qn The Order Supplies button connects you to a web page that
221. e best support experience please click the Continue button Continue Y cance acy Statement Using this site means you accept its terms 5 2005 Hewlett Packard Development Company LP Figure 6 39 HP Instant Support link Click the Hewlett Packard Online Privacy Statement link to open a screen that shows the HP privacy statement Click the Product Support link if you do not want to send information to HP but would like to receive generic product support Click Continue to open a page where you can select the device and find further information about product support Click Cancel to return to the HP Online Support screen in the HP Printer Utility Click Shop for Supplies to open the Order Supplies Web page see Figure 6 30 Transfer printer information to HP SureSUpply screen on page 302 Macintosh HP Printer Utility 309 Click Online Registration to open the HP Registration Web page and register the device HP Home Contact HP Search a DU HP Registration Welcome invent HP Registration Register today with HP to Your user profile Product registration Subscriber s Choice Frequently asked questions e Access support and services and get the most out of your HP products e Manage your profile and register your products e Sign up for free support alerts driver notices and personalized newsletters HP registration Lam a new visitor Lam a returning visitor Please
222. e changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark or click New all of the changes are saved and only the current unsaved changes can be canceled 138 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Paper tab features To gain access to the Paper tab in Windows 98 SE or Windows Me follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Properties 6 Click the Paper tab Use the Paper tab to specify the size type and source of the media You can also use this tab to specify different media selections for the front cover first page other pages last page and back cover of the document The following figure shows the Paper tab aseet P3005 PCL6 Propertii 8 5 x 11 inches Automatically Select T Ll c O D o c c SS ee UO oe 5y Lo I2 i O Figure 4 11 Paper tab ENWW Paper tab features 139 The Paper tab contains the following controls e Print Task Quick Sets e Paper Options e Document preview image e Device image Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by the administrator or user defined printing specifications such as media size and pages per sheet Paper Options The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper tab
223. e du a obl eed diva 136 Default watermark settings ss 137 Paper tab features iio A CA THEN etie dC eese cree ede Edda e 139 Print Task Quick Sets et td te rite te dete enis ett Re tete ende 140 Paper Geli o AR 140 SIZe is co tiet da cel lol tette tn te 140 Le Me T IET 141 A mE 142 Save Delete or Rename coocccccccnocnccconocnnnnnoncnnncnonnnncnonrnnnnononcnnonnos 143 Custom size width and height controls ssssesss 144 Custom width and height control limits sseseeeeeeess 144 Dynamic measurement units 145 GlOSG 5 it re tei er refte Ie e E euentu tvs ieee fenton 145 DOUNCE IS E 145 Types at a eset 146 Use Different Paper Covers sss 147 Front COVER cine E qat eiii eden 147 First Page da 148 OtherPages eoe ede temet es 149 Last Page disti tit Eie utere dep Io eiat esie 149 Back COVEN m 150 Document preview image ceret rentre dle T EAEAN ERR nU ERIA AE ERAKETAREN 151 Devicemage x deest p mue tee dime pio erre 151 Job Storage tab features ote 152 Print Task Quick Sets ici p ee eee osi idea edle eue ed eee edd 155 Status dialog DOK ctt rct ttt A tede x eee 155 Job Storage Mode civilidad p oa gabe tet 155 eu EE 155 Proof and Fold iie ttp et diete an E ERE gr 155 Private Job zn debt ite e aatem eate ett babies ertet ibit ene la eite 156 QUICK COPY a A a C e E 156 Stored Jobax a 156 ON 157 Job Notification OP
224. e is setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed Any optional source trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here The Source is drop down menu can contain the following options depending on what has been installed on the device e Automatically select e Printer Auto Select Paper Quality tab features 219 e y o i e E ou am gt fe o S Manual Feed in Tray 1 Tray 1 100 sheet multipurpose tray Tray 2 500 sheet tray Tray 3 optional 500 sheet tray The default setting is Automatically Select When this setting is selected the HP LaserJet P3005 uses the source tray that supports the selected media size If you select a source tray other than Automatically select make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray For information about media sources see the Media attributes on page 344 section of this STR Type is The Type is drop down menu shows all ofthe media types that the HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports When you use the default setting Unspecified the printer uses the default media type which is usually Plain No mechanism exists for manually adding custom media types through the driver Custom types can be added only by using the bidirectional communication mechanism so they must already exist in the device when
225. e pages through the duplexing unit only if printable information appears on the second side of the page 264 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports smart duplexing The device uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and only runs the pages through the duplexing unit if printable information appears on the second side of the page Allow Manual Duplexing Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any size and most types of media except transparencies envelopes and labels To use this feature reinsert the media stack into the input tray to print the second side The device pauses while the user makes this adjustment This setting is enabled by default Printer Memory This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the device The driver generates ranges of memory that can be selected up to the maximum that the device can accept 320 MB for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer The driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the device memory Printer Hard Disk ET NOTE A printer hard disk is optional for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Do not select the Installed setting unless a hard disk is installed Job storage When Job Storage is enabled the device can store print jobs so that you can gain access to those print jobs later at the control p
226. e the print driver This section outlines the procedures for installing print drivers by using Point and Print If these procedures are not successful contact Microsoft Hewlett Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature but this is a function of the MS Windows operating systems not of HP print drivers Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 drivers from HP support only Intel X86 processor types To install the print driver on a Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 operating system you must have administrator privileges To completely install the Windows 2000 print driver on the Windows 2000 server you must have administrator privileges on the server The Windows 2000 Printer INF file must contain the same device name as the Windows 98 SE or Windows Me printer INF file Point and Print installation of a postscript driver is supported only with a Windows 98 SE or Windows Me PS Driver V4 0 or later In a homogenous operating system environment one in which all of the clients and servers are running in the same operating system the same print driver version that is vended from the server to the clients in a Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the server However in a mixed operating system environment one in which servers and clients might run on different operating systems conflicts can occur when client computers run a version of t
227. eck Tool runs the devices that are currently installed on the computer appear in a list The tool gathers information about the device drivers and system setup in order to diagnose the software driver configuration and check the print driver When the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool is open select the HP device that you want to check The tool verifies whether the latest driver is installed informs if an incorrect driver is in use and indicates if an updated driver version is available Click the latest driver version to download and install it The data that the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers is stored anonymously so that HP can analyze and continuously improve its diagnostic tools No private data is gathered from the computer ENWW HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool 35 HP Easy Printer Care HP Easy Printer Care software is designed for end users and for those who keep devices up and running in small and large business groups You can view the status of up to 15 supported HP LaserJet devices set up device and supply alerts generate printer usage reports and reorder supplies from HP or a choice of resellers The HP Easy Printer Care Software is available through a link in the printing system software CD or on the Web at the following Web site www hp com go easyprintercare 36 Chapter2 Software description ENWW HP Embedded Web Server The HP Embedded Web Server HP EWS is a standard feature on t
228. ectional communication is enabled in a supported environment set up this tab by clicking Update Now If your environment does not support bidirectional communication the Update Now button is unavailable so you must manually configure the options on this tab The Configure tab is available when the driver is opened from the Printers folder by clicking Properties When you open the driver from within a program the Configure tab is not visible with a few exceptions such as when using Excel 5 0 or Corel amp Chart 4 0 When opened from the Printers folder the Configure tab looks like the following figure 164 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW HP LaserJet P3005 PCL6 Properties Figure 4 22 Configure tab The Configure tab contains the following controls e Printer Model e Paper Handling Options e Other Options 7 Ll co TO ot E EN O Lo oe San 0 c I gt pan Lo e Automatic configuration e Printer image Printer Model In the Printer Model group box the driver title depends on the printer model that is being used Selection of any model in the drop down menu makes the appropriate changes to other configuration options on the tab ENWW Configure tab features 165 The Printer Model setting automatically changes to User Configured whenever you change any of the device configuration settings on the tab The list of models and the changes they produce are described in
229. ed and then click Next The Port Creation Options dialog box appears 92 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW HP Installer Customization Utility Port Creation Options D z Select an installation option below 2 invent If the printer is not found when the customized installer is run do you want to create the port C No do not create the port the printer will not be installed The printer s hardware address MAC will be required to create a new port if the printer cannot be found Hardware address ctn cms Figure 3 39 Port Creation Options dialog box Select No do no create the port the printer will not be installed if you do not want to create a port and then click Next The Model dialog box appears Select Yes create the port and click Next The Model dialog box appears E o z e Lo 9 If the printer cannot be found type the printer hardware address in the Hardware Address field and click Next The Model dialog box appears ET NOTE To print a configuration page where the printer hardware address is listed see Print configuration page on page 350 ENWW Print driver installation instructions 93 HP Laser Jet P3005 Setup Model Select your printer model Model HP LaserJet P3004 HP LaserJet P3005 lt Back Cancel Figure 3 40 Model dialog box Select the printer model and click Next The Dr
230. ed of the host computer that is sending the update and the I O method parallel or network The reinitialization time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the device such as the number of EIO devices installed the presence of external paper handling devices and the amount of memory that is installed Finally any print jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is processed Use one of the methods described in this manual to update the printer firmware Printer messages during the firmware update The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update Table 7 7 Troubleshooting a firmware update Cause Result The job was cancelled from the control panel No update has occurred A break in the I O stream occurred during send for example No update has occurred the parallel cable was removed A power cycle occurred during the RECEIVING UPGRADE No update has occurred process A power cycle occurred during the PERFORMING No update has occurred Resend the update through a parallel UPGRADE process port A power cycle occurred during the INITIALIZING process The update has been completed ENWW Remote firmware updates 351 Print jobs that are sent to the device while an update is in process do not interrupt the update All HP LaserJet devices leave the factory with the most recent firmware version installed If a remote firmware upd
231. ee HP Web Jetadmin Web sites Adobe 174 Citrix Terminal server support 8 downloading software 9 firmware download 351 firmware updates 328 HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool 35 HP Easy Printer Care 36 HP Embedded Web Server links 39 41 HP Embedded Web Server user guide 37 HP OpenVMS 8 HP Web Jetadmin downloading 47 Linux product support 6 Macintosh software 273 SAP printing 8 support links 22 Tru64 UNIX printing 8 UNIX model scripts 8 UNIX support 6 Welcome dialog box Customization Wizard 88 ENWW Welcome dialog box Windows installation Full Installation 61 What s this Help PS Emulation Driver 174 unidrivers 203 Windows operating systems Add Printer installation 85 availability of software components 8 CD ROM print system 20 default printer setting 106 dialog boxes 59 direct printing FTP 361 direct printing local port 363 direct printing networks 364 directory structure software CD ROM 10 driver versions 26 Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 29 fonts supported 50 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 33 Installer Customization Wizard 86 installers 9 installing printing software 56 LPRcommands 364 Point and Print installation 105 PS Emulation Driver features 173 PS emulation fonts supported 52 remote firmware update 355 support 6 system requirements 6 unidriver features 199 ENWW Index 379 380 Index ENWW O 2006 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P www hp com
232. efore being installed on any client systems If the HP LaserJet printing system software is not first installed on the server then bidirectional communication and some driver autoconfiguration methods are not available to the client systems For Windows 2000 and Windows XP administrator rights on the system are necessary to install the software When the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system installer runs the HP LaserJet uninstaller is always added to the system Topics e Install from the printing system CD o Install from a network or from downloaded files Install from the printing system CD Follow these instructions to install the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system from the CD that came with the device 1 Quit all software programs 2 Insert the CD into the CD ROM drive ET NOTE If the CD does not start automatically click Start click Run and then browse to and double click the SETUP EXE file in the root directory of the CD 3 Click Install Printer and follow the onscreen prompts 56 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW Install from a network or from downloaded files Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web or if you are installing the printing system files from a network You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the printing system software file 1 2 3 Browse to the location of the SETUP EXE file Double click the SE
233. eful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation Basics tab features 161 7 La co O a S EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 Lo The Orientation group box contains three options Portrait The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media Landscape The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media Rotate by 180 degrees This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180 This setting is useful for printing prepunched media Toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image If selecting the Rotate by 180 degrees check box does not change the document preview image Document preview image The document preview image is a line drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text The document preview image appears in the upper right corner of the following Properties driver tabs About Finishing Effects Paper Basics When you click About on the Basics tab or you click the HP logo on any of the driver Properties tabs the About This Driver dialog box appears To close it perform any of the following actions Click OK Press Esc Press Alt F4 Press Enter The following figure shows the About This Driver dialog box The information that it contains varies according to driver date and version 162 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW About This Driver
234. el button appears 1 Click Cancel A dialog box opens that prompts you with this question Are you sure you want to cancel the installation HP LaserJet P3005 Setup j Are you sure you want to cancel the installation Mo Figure 3 1 Are you sure you want to cancel the installation dialog box 2 Click Yes The Cancel dialog box opens stating that the setup was interrupted HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Cancel The installation has been cancelled Setup was unable to complete the installation Please click Finish to exit this installation then run the installer again Figure 3 2 Cancel dialog box 3 Click Finish to close the installation screens Modify a pre existing installation If an HP LaserJet P3005 printer has been previously installed the appearance of the main install screen changes on the CD Browser and the install printer setting changes to modify installation A pre existing installation also changes the sequence of installation screens that are presented depending on the selections that are made 58 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW Direct connect installation through a USB or parallel port The printing system software should be installed before the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is connected to the computer through a parallel or USB connection and turned on During the installation process the software will prompt you to connect the device Basic Full and Cu
235. elected for the customized installer The language selection is recorded in the response file Select a language from the Language drop down menu and then click Next The Printer Port dialog box appears ENWW Print driver installation instructions 89 HP Installer Customization Utility EJ o Printer Port D Select a printer port For the PCs Ehat use this customized installer invent e Network Path Example server share EAE C Local direct connect port C New TCP IP Port lt Back Cancel Figure 3 35 Printer Port dialog box Select Network Path to make the text field available for a queue name entry If you select Network Path and then click Browse the Browse for Printer dialog box appears Browse for Printer amp J My Network Places E Entire Network Figure 3 36 Browse for Printer dialog box 90 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW Navigate to a device and click OK to record the path in the Network Path field in the Printer Port dialog box Click Cancel to close the Browse for Printer dialog box Type a network path in the query name text field or use the Browse button to populate the field and then click Next The Model dialog box appears See Figure 3 40 Model dialog box on page 94 Select Local Port and then click Next The Printer Connection dialog box appears The Printer Connection dialog box includes all types of local ports regardless o
236. en this feature is disabled print optimization features such as substituting device fonts for TrueType fonts and scanning for horizontal and vertical rules are turned off PostScript Options ET NOTE Print Optimization settings are available only in the PS Emulation Unidriver They are not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5 Unidriver Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Output Options drop down menu e Optimize for Speed This is the default setting e Optimize for Portability Use this setting to create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring Conventions ADSC Each page of the document is a self contained object For example use this option to create a postscript file and print it on a different printer e Encapsulated PostScript EPS Use this setting to include the file as an image in another document that is to be printed from another program e Archive format Use this option to create a postscript file that you can use later Select one of the following settings in the TrueType Font Download drop down menu e Automatic This is the default setting The PS Emulation Driver determines which format is best e Outline Select this option if you want to download the TrueType font as a scalable outline font e Bitmap Select this option to download the TrueType font as a bitmap font e Native TrueType If the printer is a TrueType rasterizer printer select this option to download
237. ending a multiple copy print job when the mopier is disabled eliminates the advantage of transmitting the print job once because the job is sent through the network for each copy ENWW Device Settings tab features 265 e y o it e ou ac gt fe o S Mopier mode and collation Mopying and collating print jobs are independent but closely related functions The print driver performs mopying sending original print jobs to the device Either the print driver or the document software program controls collation The mopying mode is selected by default in the driver and can be disabled by changing the Mopier Mode setting on the Device Settings tab to Disabled Control collation through the print driver by selecting or clearing the Collated check box on the Advanced tab Clear the check box which is available only when the Copy Count option is set to more than 1 copy to allow the software program to control collation To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job you must clear the Collated check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected The following table shows the relation between mopier mode settings and collation settings in the software program and the driver The first three columns show the settings The last column Expected result shows how a 3 page print job would appear Table 5 5 Driver mopier mode and collation settings
238. er 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Services tab features To gain access to the Services tab follow these steps ENWW T 2 3 6 Click Start Select Settings Click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home Right click the device name Click Printing Preferences Click the Services tab The Services tab is shown in the following figure 2 HP LJ P3005 PCL6 Printing Preferences 9 gt m T SE t Figure 5 18 Services tab F amp I Advanced Paper Quality Effects Finishing Job Storage Services Internet Services Select a destination Includes troubleshooting manuals etc Device services Device and Supplies status Services tab features 255 The Services tab contains the following features e Internet Services e Device services Internet Services The Internet Services group box contains the Select a destination drop down menu with the following selections e Online diagnostic tools Open the HP Instant Support Web site to find interactive tools and contacts for troubleshooting e Support and troubleshooting Open the product page for the HP Business Center e Product manuals Open a Web page to view or download HP LaserJet P3005 printer manuals e Check for driver updates Automatically check the print
239. er Covers w Front Cover First Page Last Page Rack Power Source is v Automatically Select v Type is Unspecified v Figure 5 8 Other Pages options The following are the Other Pages options e Size is drop down menu e Source is drop down menu e Type is drop down menu The Size is setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job Changes made to the Size is setting here override any previous Size is settings made in other Use Different Paper Covers options The Source is setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here The Type is drop down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports ET NOTE Use the same size of media for the entire print job All Use Different Paper Covers options use the last Size is setting is selected in any one of the Use Different Paper Covers options When you change the type and source of the media and covers the settings remain configured until you close the software program Last Page Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media size type or source for the last page of a document The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when you select the Use Different Paper Covers check box 224 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 an
240. er option Print ready files commonly have file name extensions such as PS postscript PDF Adobe Portable Document Format and PRN Windows print ready File You can also use the Print screen to update the devicefirmware This feature is especially useful because you do not have to install additional software in order to update the device firmware When updated firmware files are available for your device you can download them your product support Web site www hp com support ljp3005 The Print screen is shown in the following figure 328 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Print Device Status Sleep mode on Identity the document you want to print by using either option shown below then select the Apply bution Note To print printready documents 9 9 ps pat pel xt enter the document file name Select the cncument to aywnioad tmm your hard sk or network tile server Choose File Input the address of the document lo access via the web Type the address in a form such as hitn fvwww ynur server comisometiie ps Adaress Anony Cancel Figure 6 60 HP EWS Print screen Printing a file or updating firmware from the Print screen Use the following procedure to print a file or update product firmware from the Print screen 1 Select a file that resides on your machine or on your network by clicking Browse to browse to a file that you want to print 2 Click Apply Settings tab The Settings tab allows you to
241. erating systems use the Add Printer installation The following figure shows the main screen of the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD If the screen does not appear when you insert the software CD into the CD ROM drive follow these steps to open the CD browser 1 Click Start 2 Click Run 3 Click Browse and navigate to the root directory of the software CD 4 Double click the SETUP EXE file to start the installer 20 Chapter2 Software description ENWW ENWW HP LaserJet P3005 HP LaserJet P3005 Install Printer CD Browser Install HP s easy to use printer Installer Customization Wizard maintenance tool This software helps you easily track and maintain your printers by providing simple status and alerts usage and supplies information for one or multiple printers Ideal for the person who keeps your printers up and running Register Product Printer Documentation Support Figure 2 1 Installation software CD browser The main screen of the software CD contains installation options in the upper left panel and documentation and support options in the lower left panel Moves the cursor over each option to see a description of the option ET NOTE Options on devices might differ from the illustration Install Printer The installation wizard guides the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software installation Select a Basic Installation a Full Installation or a Custom Installation If you se
242. es ES by 11 ches TM inch 11 11 by 8 5 inches Ai 8 5 by 11 inches 8 5 by 11 inches Figure 5 16 Page order preview images e 2 pages per sheet e 4 pages per sheet e 6 pages per sheet e 9 pages per sheet e 16 pages per sheet Document preview image The document preview image is a line drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right side up The document preview image appears in the upper right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs e Paper Quality e Effects e Finishing Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image When the mouse moves cursor over the document preview image the cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand Toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image Orientation ENWW Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page and does not affect the way that media feeds into the printer Specify the orientation of the print job from the three available orientations are portrait landscape and rotated The default orientation is Portrait ET NOTE Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation The Orientation group box contains three options e Portrait The t
243. es a queue creation program that can be used to create printer queues on any Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 or workstation The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin adds a number of screens to the existing queue creation workflow from which the drivers that are being installed for the queues can be customized as part of the process The plug in is limited to Internet Explorer browsers Netscape Navigator is not supported The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin is available at the following Web site www hp com sbso tpm web jetadminplugin html e Installer Customization Wizard The Installer Customization Wizard features an install time mode of HP Driver Preconfiguration IT administrators can use the utility to preconfigure the drivers for a printing system software driver installation that uses the silent installer 32 Chapter2 Software description ENWW For detailed information about gaining access to and installing these tools download the HP Driver Configuration Utility software from the following Web site www hp com go hpdpc_sw The HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide is included in the download Topics e Lockable features e Continuous export Lockable features The following driver features can be locked to prevent end users from changing settings e Print on Both Sides duplex The options are True or False e Print in Grayscale The options are Disable or Enabled e Media Type
244. estination list Go to the Information tab to see examples of these pages O Supplies Status Page O usage Page O Configuration Page EventLog Page Select this option if one of the alert destinations you have chosen to receive alerts is an automated computer system XMLData Figure 2 5 HP EWS Settings tab Alerts screen ox Cancel HP Embedded Web Server Il 43 c o o O Y o o i E tY e o ET NOTE This figure is provided only as an example Security The HP EWS screens and settings that appear vary according to how the HP EWS is accessed Three modes of user access are possible e General user o IT administrator e Service provider To control access to the HP EWS screens set a password on the Security page 0 10 48 P3005 Printers A security password can be set to prevent unauthorized users rom remotely configuring the printer or gaining access to functionality reserved for the network administrator Usemame admin New Password Verify Password v Print Page Display On Device Status Page LJ Cancet ioh v PauseResume v Continue Button DirectPorts USB IEEE 1284 Disabling these ports will allow users to print only through a network connection LI Disahle Direct Ports Note The device will automatically turn off then on after this setting is applied Figure 2 6 HP EWS Settings tab Security screen In a password protected
245. estinations The following table indicates the standard and optional media sources and destinations for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Table 7 1 HP LaserJet P3005 media sources and destinations Media sources 100 sheet multipurpose tray tray 1 Standard 500 sheet paper tray tray 2 Standard 500 sheet paper tray tray 3 Optional standard on the HP LaserJet P3005x printer model Media destinations Standard 250 sheet top bin Standard Media source commands The PCL 6 attribute for paper source is ubyte MediaSource Orubyte array string MediaSource See the following table for values of For example ubyte 4 MediaSource is the command for tray 2 The PCL 5 escape sequence for media source is Esc amp 1 H the I is a lowercase L rather than the numeral 1 See the following table for values of For example Esc amp 11H is the command fortray 2 Table 7 2 Media source commands Media source PCL 6 PCL 5 PostScript ubyte 4 MediaSource Esc amp liH MediaPosition orubyte array ManualFeed true string false or null MediaSource Manual feed in tray 1 2 2 3 true Tray 1 100 sheet 3 4 3 false Tray 2 500 sheet 4 1 0 false Tray 3 500 sheet 5 5 1 false 344 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Table 7 2 Media source commands continued Media source PCL 6 PCL 5 PostScript ubyte MediaSource Esc amp l H orubyte_ array MediaPosition ManualFeed true string
246. ette te a dae rne dg a b ub d eg ERR n Redde 201 Printing Preferences driver tabs sssssssss emen 201 Properties driver tabs icone eet at 202 lyon 0 O dk ee ea ease na dengan doce sande Sede ed odes acetate deed aioe 203 Whats this Help crias 203 Context sensitive Help ooooooooccccnnnccccoocoononconncnnncnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn en ee eren nennen nennen nnns 203 viii ENWW Incompatible Print Settings MESSAGES ooonnnncciconnnccocinonononcnncnnonnno eee 203 Advanced tab featur eSa i a a a aa a a aaa aaea aaa a a aaa 205 P per Q UtpUt rei D 206 COPY COUM a erred th eet diee ERA ter A RAA 207 Collated eont our Ure A ee t abu bia ines 207 Graphic a tta e eet ett tee t D de dm emet died 207 True Type Font die edo ld dva ud 207 Document Options Asna ems a tiere dte t ot teo to dodi e aer tn 208 Advanced Printing Features essssssss eene eene 208 Print Optimizations so ott t atii bau 208 PostScript ODIODS ostrea eadein 208 Printer Features ett eb pasate eti diio teat 209 Layout Options acea tert e Rer RE Rd XE vines IRE RR RUNE NX RA AED ERE Re ERA 210 Paper Quality tab features miii ias 211 Print Task Quick Sets o itii rete Ere EcL ob tle 212 Default Print Settings ooo nnooncccnnnnnnnoccccnnncnnnnnannnnncccnnnn no nennen 213 User Guide Print Settings eiii ente THREE eda 215 Default Print Settings erasian eiaeia iee 216 Papet Options LEE 216 SIZE NN 217 QustomrPaper SIZe
247. ext to PostScript Gray This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value RGB in text to the gray that the PS Emulation Driver provides The following settings are available o Yes e No This is the default setting Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray This control specifies whether to convert the true gray value RGB in graphics to the gray provided by the PS Emulation Driver The following settings are available o Yes e No This is the default setting Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts This control specifies whether to add the Euro symbol to the printer fonts The following settings are available e Yes This is the default setting e No Job Timeout This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the device before the device stops trying to print the document If you specify 0 seconds the device continues trying to print indefinitely The default setting is 0 seconds Use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32 767 seconds Wait Timeout This control specifies how long the device waits to get more postscript information from the computer After the specified time passes the device stops trying to print the document and prints an error message When printing a very complicated document increase this value If you specify 0 seconds the device waits indefinitely The default setting is 300 seconds Use the spin box to change this value up to a
248. f When selected this option turns the job storage feature off it is disabled which means that the print job will not be stored in the device Proof and Hold To use the Proof and Hold option the job storage feature must be enabled When selected this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job allowing you to check the first copy If the document prints correctly you can print the remaining copies of the pan e uem 0 y os zo io ssc ss Qa I ENWW Job Storage tab features 249 print job at the control panel You can set the number of proof and hold print jobs that can be stored in the device at the control panel After it is released for printing the proof and hold job is immediately deleted from the device If more copies are needed you must reprint the job from the software program If you send a second proof and hold job to the device with the same user name and job name as an existing proof and hold job and you have not released the original job for printing the job will overwrite the existing job Proof and hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the device ET NOTE The device configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick copy or proof and hold jobs The number is set at the device control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu and the default is 32 When this preset limit is reached the new document overwrites the oldest held document Also a document that has the same
249. f local support It also includes all custom network ports that are available on the local system To use any custom network port for the customized installer the port must be created identically on the system where it will be used HP Laser Jet P3005 Setup A e Printer Connection D How will your HP LaserJet P3005 printer be connected invent e Parallel Cable V USB Cable E 0 V z e po 9 lt Back Cancel Figure 3 37 Printer Connection dialog box Select the type of connection that you are using and then click Next The Model dialog box appears See Figure 3 40 Model dialog box on page 94 Select New TCP IP Port and then click Next The Specify TCP IP Port dialog box appears The Specify TCP IP Port dialog box includes all custom network ports that are available on the local system To use any custom network port for the customized installer the port must be created identically on the system where it will be used ENWW Print driver installation instructions 91 HP Installer Customization Utility Specify TCP IP Port Specify the network settings of the printer Choose one of the Following to identify the printer to be installed IP Hostname C Hardware Address Note The Hardware Address cannot be used to search for printers across a subnet Do you want to use a default port name or specify your own Use Default C Specify cta eme Figure 3 38 Specify TCP IP Po
250. f these conditions is not met except the first a Bubble Help appears next to Booklet Printing to tell you why it is disabled Topics e Book and Booklet Printing e Print a booklet Book and Booklet Printing The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports both book and booklet printing 7 La co TO a S EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo A book is a print job that consists of at least two pages It can have a different media type for the front cover first page other pages last page or back cover Use the settings on the Paper tab available when you select the Use Different Paper Covers check box to select the following printing options for the book e Front Cover e First Page e Other Pages ENWW Finishing tab features 123 e Last Page e Back Cover A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media type Use the Booklet Printing drop down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings Print a booklet Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs 1 In the software program click File click Print and then click Properties 2 Click the Finishing tab 3 Select the Print on Both Sides check box 4 In the Booklet Printing drop down menu select the type of booklet printing that you want The booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding for example
251. fault Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop down menu e Lightest e X Very Light default e Light e Medium Light e Medium e Medium Dark e Dark e Very Dark e Darkest These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used Select Light to produce a lightly saturated gray watermark Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark Select Darkest to produce a black watermark e Size 7 gt Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu The default point size is language E E dependent The default point size for preset watermarks is language dependent mc e Style E a oS The following settings are available Ea Be e Regular 50 o he e Bold I E e l talic Es e Bold Italic The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular Default watermark settings The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks ENWW Effects tab features 137 Table 4 3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks Setting New watermark Preset watermark Name Arial Varies by language Color Gray Gray Shading Very Light Very Light Size 80 Varies by language Style Regular Regular Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box Clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes If you mak
252. fere with the update until you see this message 3 Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update Remote firmware update by using the LPR command ET NOTE This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows 2000 Windows XP and E Windows Server 2003 Complete the following steps to update the firmware by using the LPR command 1 From a command window type lpr P IPADDRESS S lt IPADDRESS gt o 1 FILENAME OR lpr S lt IPADDRESS gt Pbinps FILENAME Where lt IPADDRESS gt can be either the TCP IP address or the hostname of the device and where FILENAME is the filename of the RFU file ET NOTE The parameter o consists of a lowercase O not a zero and a lowercase L not the numeral 1 This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode 2 Press Enter on the keyboard The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel 3 The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device This can take several minutes Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel 358 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW 5 ET NOTE The device automatically turns o
253. ff and then on again to activate the update this can happen more than once At the end of the update process the READY message appears on the control panel Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin ENWW This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin V7 8 or later on the computer Complete the following steps to update a single device through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the RFU file from the HP Web site 1 2 10 11 12 Start HP Web Jetadmin Type the TCP IP address or IP host name of the device in the Quick Device Find field and then click Go The device Status window opens Open the Device Management folder in the drop down list in the Navigation panel Navigate to the Device Lists folder Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices Locate the device that you want to update in the list of devices and click to select it Locate the drop down box for Device Tools in the upper right corner of the window Select Update Printer Firmware from the choose action list If the name of the RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images dialog box click Browse in the Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location
254. following forms An e mail address e g your name amp your com pany com A mobile device e g 200 555 5555 amp mobile com pany net A posting tn a wehsite e g lt http we ynur server cam OtherLinks fist i Separate alert destinations using a semi colon ora comma Order Supplies utwame PO Product Support Alert Destinations Show Me How Select the alerts that you would like the alert destinations to receive The most common alerts are listed here AlertName Selected Order Cartridge Replace Cartridge Non HP Supply Installed Hemove Paper Jam Close Drawers Doors And Covers E m m m m m Tray Open orEmpty Load Additional Alerts To view all of the alerts for this product click tha Show All Alerts button Threshold j2 mann nement 12 minutes elapsed i minutes elapsed minutes elapsed Changes to threshold values apply to all destinations for this device Note Clicking this button saves your current changes and opens the page that lists all of the alerts options ShowAll Alerts Select Control Panel Me Select the message s below that you do not want to show on the device control panel The option is available only if the corresponding e mail alert has been selected in the previous step Order andReplace Cartridge 3 Select e mail attachments optional Select the attachments that you want to include with each e mail alert message in this d
255. from drifting losing or gaining time but does not synchronize the clock with the network time server clock 1 Select the Enable Clock Drift Correction check box 2 Inthe Network Time Server Address field type the TCP IP address of the clock which you want to use for correction of the product clock drift ET NOTE Alternatively you can click the Automatically Find Server button to find a time server on your network and automatically fill in this field 3 Inthe Local Port to Receive Time from Server field type the number of the appropriate port 4 Click OK E NOTE Use this screen only to configure the time server for clock drift correction not to set the clock To set the clock use the main Date amp Time screen For further information see Date amp Time on page 336 Wake Time An IT administrator can use the Wake Time screen to schedule product wakeups on a daily basis For example the product can be set to wake up at 07 30 so the product has finished initializing and calibrating and is ready to use by 08 00 The administrator sets only one wakeup setting per day however each day can have a different wakeup setting Additionally to save energy the sleep delay can be set to turn the product off after a specific period of inactivity HPL HP LaserJe invent Wake Time Selling a Sleep Schedule is useful for ensuring the product is Ready al a certain lime and not in Sleep Mode For example to make
256. g boxes 86 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW e Distribution Run the Installer Customization Wizard Start the Installer Customization Wizard from the software CD It runs separately from the common Microsoft Installer MSI and has its own interface Running the Installer Customization Wizard produces one installation package and a response file RESPONSE INI for a single system installation The installation package might work for multiple systems that have the same response information or the RESPONSE INI file can be directly edited for system configuration differences The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which provides the exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE INI file is available at the following Web site www hp com support ljp3005 Start the Installer Customization Wizard 1 Insert the HP LaserJet P3005 software CD into the CD ROM drive 2 Inthe CD Browser main screen click Installer Customization Wizard To complete the Installer Customization Wizard follow the instructions in the dialog boxes Dialog boxes The Language Selection dialog box appears HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Language Selection D H Select the language for the installation invent E 2 o z e xe 9 Language TE cma Figure 3 31 Language Selection dialog box Select a language and click OK The Welcome dialog box appears ENWW Print driver installation
257. g controls and default settings e Resolution The options are e 600 dpi default e 300 dpi e The Resolution Enhancement technology REt feature is enabled by default The options are On or Off rather than the Light Medium Dark or Off settings in some print drivers The On setting corresponds to the Medium setting found in other HP printer drivers 7 Ll co TO a S EN O me oe 50 0 o r2 i Lo e Use the Scale Patterns WYSIWYG feature to address the moir effect that is created when certain programs encounter certain patterns Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns but the printed result might look better The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns This option is selected by default e The Print All Text as Black feature is not selected by default When the feature is selected the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color Color text is printed as black except for white text which remains white White text is a reliable method of printing reverse ENWW Finishing tab features 129 typeface against a dark background This setting does not affect graphic images on the page nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic e Edge to Edge Printing Select this check box to allow near edge to edge printing on the media size specified For example to achieve edge to edge printi
258. g on the media orientation selected on the Finishing tab Table 5 4 Page orientation Orientation Finishing tab Flip Pages Up selected Flip Pages Up not selected Portrait Short edge binding Long edge binding Landscape Long edge binding Short edge binding When Print on Both Sides is selected the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page In addition a folded over corner appears in the lower right portion of the preview image indicating that printing occurs on the back side An arrow on the folded over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together 242 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Short side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar Long side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book Booklet layout The Booklet Layout drop down menu visible when Print on Both Sides is selected offers choices that are based on the current media size The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop down menu is Off The other settings have the following format where paper size depends on the media size that is set on the Paper Quality tab e Left Edge Binding e Right Edge Binding Selecting Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding changes the document preview image to show the location of the
259. ge Binding 7 Click OK in the print driver 8 Click OK in the print dialog box to print Pages per Sheet Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of media If you print more than one page per sheet the pages appear smaller and are arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed The Pages per Sheet drop down menu provides six settings e 1page per sheet this is the default e 2pages per sheet e 4 pages per sheet e 6 pages per sheet e 9 pages per sheet e 16 pages per sheet ET NOTE Selecting an option other than 1 page per sheet makes booklet printing unavailable Print Page Borders Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page Order which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1 Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page Page Order The Page Order drop down menu contains four selections e Right then Down e Down then Right e Left then Down e Down then Left The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings as shown by the examples in the following figure 244 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW d z 7E Si ISi Dil l 11 11 by 8 5 inch
260. ge tab features 159 Basics tab features To gain access to the Basics tab in Windows 98 SE or Windows Me follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Properties 6 Click the Basics tab The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation of the print job You can also use it to retrieve information about the driver HP LaserJet P3005 PCL6 Properties Figure 4 20 Basics tab 160 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW The Basics tab contains the following controls e Print Task Quick Sets e Copies e Orientation e Document preview image e About Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by the administrator or user defined printing specifications such as media size and pages per sheet Copies Use the Copies option to specify the number of copies to print The number of copies that you request appears in the Copies group box You can select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999 The copies value will not advance from the maximum number 9999 to 1 when the up arrow is used or change from 1 to the maximum number 9999
261. grading firmware involves three steps 1 Determine the current level of firmware that is installed on the device 2 Goto the HP Web site and download the latest firmware to the computer 3 Download the new firmware to the device Topics e Print a configuration page e Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site e Downloading the new firmware to the device e Printer messages during the firmware update o Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser e Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection e Remote firmware update through a local MS Windows port e Remote firmware update through a USB port 9 Remote firmware update through an MS Windows network e Remote firmware update for UNIX systems o Remote firmware update by using the LPR command e Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin Print a configuration page To determine the current level of firmware view the configuration page To print a configuration page follow these instructions 1 Press theMenu button to open the menus 2 Press A the up arrow or V the down arrow to scroll to INFORMATION and then press v select 3 Press A up or V down to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION 4 Press y select to print the configuration page 5 Look in the Printer Information section on the configuration page for the firmware date code The firmware date code looks something like this 20051002 07 0
262. guration dialog box 2 In the Driver Configuration dialog box click the Printing Preferences tab Scroll through the list and select the settings for the custom installation file In the Driver Configuration dialog box click the Device Settings tab Select the settings for the custom installation file and then click Next The Additional Software dialog box appears E o o E e Lo E o ENWW Print driver installation instructions 97 HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Additional Software Select the additional software to install Additional Software Name User Guide Install Notes Screen Fonts Details lt Back Cancel Figure 3 45 Additional Software dialog box To view details about the additional software click Details The additional software Details dialog box appears ENWW 98 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components Details The following printer software is available For installation Screen Fonts 26172 KB Printer matching TrueType fonts to help ensure screen match printing Install Notes Includes information about installing your printer s software User Guide Includes information about the product operation troubleshooting warranty and specifications supplies and support Figure 3 46 Additional software Details dialog box All of the software selected in the Additional Software dialog box is described in the Details dialog box Cl
263. h is available only when the Mopier Enabled setting on the Configure tab is selected to allow the software program to control collation Configure tab features 167 7 Ll co D o c EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo To receive uncollated multiple copies of a print job with the mopier enabled clear the Ignore Application Collation check box and make sure that the software program collation feature is not selected The following table shows the relation between Mopier Enabled settings and collation settings in the software program and the driver The first three columns show the settings The last column Expected result shows how a three page print job would appear Table 4 8 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings Mopier Enabled Application collation Ignore Application Expected result Collation Not selected Not selected Not available 3 copies uncollated Not selected Selected Not available 3 copies collated Selected Not selected Not selected 3 copies uncollated Selected Not selected Selected 3 copies uncollated Selected Selected Not selected 3 copies collated by printer Selected Selected Selected 3 copies collated by printer Optional Paper Sources The Optional Paper Sources drop down menu lists optional media source trays for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer The list of available source trays varies depending on the printer its input accessories and the printer configuration settings on the Config
264. hanges the arrow to a gloved hand which indicates that the area underneath the pointer is selectable 112 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW When the bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the keyboard a message box appears that contains a brief explanation about why the control is disabled and what can be done to enable it If the control is not disabled the message is a tip or a precaution that you should be aware of when using that particular feature 72 Li co O a S cw s me oe u A o I gt pa Lo ENWW Help system 113 Finishing tab features To gain access to the Finishing tab in Windows 98 SE or Windows Me follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Properties 6 Click the Finishing tab Use the Finishing tab to print on both sides of the page to control the printed output on the page and to print booklets The following figure shows the Finishing tab HP LaserJet P3005 PCL6 Properties dob Storage Type new Quick Set name here l i LI Aig ages p BOO Me eiihunge a 8 5 x 11 inches Pant age T GTGETS Sag Ine x Figure 4 3 The default Finishing tab 114 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW The Finishing tab contains the following controls e Print Task Quick Sets e Document Options e Document preview image e Print Qu
265. he Drivers dialog box On the Drivers dialog box after selecting the drivers for the custom installer click Next to continue the installation The Driver Configuration dialog box appears ENWW Print driver installation instructions 95 HP Installer Customization Utility Driver Configuration The following driver s support pre configuration HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 5e Windows 2000 XP and 2003 HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 6 Windows 2000 XP and 2003 HP LaserJet P3005 PS Windows 2000 XP and 2003 Do you want to configure these drivers now C Yes allow me to configure the drivers No I don t want to configure the drivers lt Back Cancel Figure 3 43 Driver Configuration dialog box Click Yes allow me to configure the drivers and then click Next The Driver Configuration dialog box appears Click No I don t want to configure the drivers and then click Next The Additional Software dialog box appears See Figure 3 45 Additional Software dialog box on page 98 96 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Driver Configuration Configure the driver settings before installation Printing Preferences Device Settings Print on Both Sides Duplex False Orientation Portrait Print Quality ProRes 1200 141 Ipi Paper Size Letter Media Type Unspecified Services Enabled Paper Source Printer Auto Select Description teo coc Figure 3 44 Driver Confi
266. he HP PCL 6 Unidriver the HP PCL 5 Unidriver and the PS Emulation Unidriver Unless otherwise noted features described here apply to all three Topics e A Access to print drivers in Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 e Help system e Advanced tab features e Paper Quality tab features e Effects tab features e Finishing tab features 0 gt fe o S e Job Storage tab features i e E o e ou ac ENWW Introduction 199 e Services tab features e Device Settings tab features e About tab features 200 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Access to print drivers in Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 Depending on which operating system the print drivers are installed access to the print drivers and different print driver interfaces is available in several ways e Device control panel e Software program print dialog box e Print driver user interface Device control panel For information about controlling print jobs from the device control panel see the HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide that came with the device or download it from following Web site www hp com go ljp3005 software Software program print dialog box To gain access to the print driver settings from within most software programs follow these steps 1 Click File 2 Click Print 3 Click Properties The appearance a
267. he computer is running a 64 bit MS Windows operating system install the corresponding 64 bit print driver by using Add Printer For instructions see Install print drivers by using Add Printer on page 85 Topics e Font support e Print driver installation instructions E 2 V z e Lo o ENWW Introduction 49 Font support The following sections list the fonts that are included with MS Windows software and the fonts that are available on the CD that came with the device Topics e Basic fonts e Default fonts Basic fonts MS Windows software includes these basic fonts which can be used with any HP printing device e X Arial e Courier New Italic e Times New Roman Italic e Arial Italic e Courier New Bold e Times New Roman Bold e Arial Bold e Courier New Bold Italic e Times New Roman Bold Italic e Arial Bold Italic e Symbol e Wingdings e Courier New e Times New Roman Default fonts The following default fonts are installed through a Full Installation of the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software Table 3 1 Default fonts Font name Font style File name Albertus Extra Bold Regular ALBR85W TTF Albertus Medium Regular ALBR55W TTF Antique Olive Regular OLVR55W TTF Antique Olive Bold OLVR75W TTF Antique Olive Italic OLVR56W TTF 50 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW ENWW Table 3 1 Default fonts continued
268. he existing item If you click Yes the old item is updated with the new values If you click No the driver returns to the Custom Paper Size dialog box where you can type a different name The new name is compared only against the list of user defined custom media names and not against the standard media size names Whenever the command button has the Save title it is the default button e Delete is the button title whenever the name of an existing previously saved custom media size appears in the Name drop down menu such as immediately after selecting an item from the drop down menu or clicking Save Clicking Delete causes the saved custom media size to be deleted after which the Name drop down menu changes to Untitled the height and width controls are unchanged and the button title changes to Save e Rename is the button title when you type something into the Name drop down menu after selecting an existing custom media size from the drop down menu If no duplicate is found then the name of the stored custom media size changes to match the contents of the Name drop down menu The following table illustrates the relationships between the Name drop down menu the command button and the actions that take users from one state to another Table 4 4 Name drop down menu text strings State Drop down menu Button label Action Next state contents 1 Untitled Save Click Save 3 Type something into the Name drop down
269. he following HP LaserJet P3005 printer models when they are connected through a network e HP LaserJet P3005n e HP LaserJet P3005dn e HP LaserJet P3005x The base model HP LaserJet P3005 printer can use the HP EWS if an optional EIO Jetdirect card is installed The HP EWS provides a simple easy to use solution for one to one device management Instead of installing management software such as HP Web Jetadmin use HP EWS for remote management in offices that have a limited number of devices The only requirement is that the management computer must have a supported Web browser In environments that have a larger number of devices in which one to one management is impractical the HP Embedded Web Server and HP Web Jetadmin work together to provide scalable remote device management Use HP Web Jetadmin to consolidate management tasks and perform operations on a selected set of devices For such environments HP provides hooks between the HP EWS and HP Web Jetadmin to allow configuration of HP EWS features on multiple devices in one operation For example you can set the security password for the HP EWS simultaneously on a cluster of devices c fe 5 Q O 7 Y Lo v fas 5 e o For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide go to www hp com support ljp3005 Topics e A Access to the HP EWS e The HP EWS frame e Information tab e Links to off product solutions e Device
270. he media that you want to use is located in the printer The default setting is Auto Select Tray which causes the printer to use the tray that supports the paper size that you have chosen The following options are available e Auto Select Tray e Printer Auto Select e Manual Feed in Tray 1 72 Ll co O a S gt EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo e Tray 1 through Tray 3 if installed on the device If any of these trays are not installed a red circle with a slash through it appears next to the tray name e Each of the paper types that the HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports such as Plain Preprinted and Letterhead For a full list of supported paper types see Driver supported media types on page 347 Copies Use this box to specify the number of copies to print You can print from 1 to 999 copies This option is ignored when printing an EPS file Some software programs override this setting ENWW HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 177 Unprintable Area Click Unprintable Area to open the Unprintable Area dialog box which is shown in the following figure Unprintable Area 21x Left r Units eft Inches Right 10 18 C Milimeters Top 0 18 Bottom 10 18 Cancel Restore Defaults Figure 4 28 Unprintable Area dialog box The area of the page that cannot be printed appears in the Unprintable Area dialog box Changing these settings to exceed the buil
271. he number of copies in the software program wherever possible Collated The Collated check box is visible when the Copy Count setting is selected The check box becomes available and can be changed when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1 When collated pages print consecutively for each copy of the document When not collated copies of each page print together This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software program Print dialog box Settings in the software program override settings in the print driver For instance when using Microsoft Word the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default However in the print driver the Collated check box in the Advanced tab is not selected by default The software program setting takes precedence over the driver setting and the printed output is collated by default To obtain uncollated printed output clear the Collate setting in both the driver and the software program Similarly if the Collated check box is selected in the driver but the Collate setting is not enabled in the software program the printed output is uncollated Graphic The Graphic setting contains the following control e True Type Font settings True Type Font ENWW Use Substitute with Device Font the default setting to print documents that contain TrueType fonts by using equivalent printer fonts This permits faster printing however special characters may be lost
272. he print driver that is different from the one on the print server In an effort to increase operating system stability Microsoft determined that starting with Windows 2000 and continuing with all future operating systems print drivers would run as user mode processes User mode drivers run in a protected part of the operating system as do all of the normal end user processes and software programs A user mode print driver that functions incorrectly can terminate or crash only the process in which it is running not the whole operating system Because access to critical System resources is restricted overall operating system stability is increased www techweb boi hp com Print driver installation instructions 105 E 0 y z e xe o Set a default printer This section applies to the Windows 98 SE Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 operating systems 1 In Windows 98 SE Windows Me and Windows 2000 click Start click Settings and then click Printers In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 click Start click Control Panel and then click Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional or Printers and other hardware devices Windows XP Home 2 Right click the device that you want to set as the default printer 3 Click Set As Default A check mark appears next to the menu option 106 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW 4 HP traditional print
273. he section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel Remote firmware updates 357 Es O m 97 c Tes 0 0 e c ET NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update this can happen more than once At the end of the update process the READY message appears on the control panel Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message 4 Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update Remote firmware update for UNIX systems For UNIX systems any command method that delivers the TAR file to the device is acceptable including the following 1 Atthe command prompt type cp home yourmachine FILENAME dev parallel where lt home yourmachine FILENAME gt is the location of the TAR file 2 The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device This can take several minutes Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel ET NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update this can happen more than once At the end of the update process the READY message appears on the control panel Do not turn off the device or inter
274. he status bar fills 102 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW HP Installer Customization Utility Creating HP LaserJet P3005 Custom Installer D y The installer package you selected is being created invent Please wait while your HP LaserJet P3005 customized package is created This may take several minutes Cancel Figure 3 50 Installing dialog box Click Cancel to close the Installer Customization Wizard without creating a customized installer At a certain point the Cancel button disappears and the process cannot be revoked When the process is complete the Finish dialog box appears E o gt e po 9 ENWW Print driver installation instructions 103 HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Finish Your HP LaserJet P3005 customized installer has been successfully created Click Finish to close the installer Figure 3 51 Finish dialog box Click Finish to close the Finish dialog box and exit the Installer Customization Wizard ET NOTE Depending on the type of installation and selected options you might or might not be presented with some additional steps after you click Finish Distribution The custom installation package is now ready for distribution It is the same as the package on the software CD except that it is limited to one language and it contains the selected features and options The installation package is run silently so that it requires no user i
275. he upper left corner of the preview The slider bar controls the scale directly The value in the edit box changes as the slider bar indicator is dragged and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale Each click on the arrows increases or decreases the scale by 196 Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 1096 You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider bar indicator Instead either use the slider bar indicator to approximate the value and then use the arrows to refine the value or type the value into the entry box The following settings disable of Normal Size e Print Document On on the Effects tab is selected e Pages per Sheet on the Finishing tab is not 1 Document preview image The document preview image is a line drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text The document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right side up The document preview image appears in the upper right corner of the following Printing Preferences driver tabs e Paper Quality e Effects e Finishing Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image When the mouse cursor moves over the document preview image the cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand Toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image Watermarks Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark create a custom water
276. hes 13 0 inches Legal 216 mm 356 mm LEGAL 2 8 5 inches 14 0 inches o m Custom Minimum Minimum rey 127 mm 76 2 mm des D 5 0 inches 3 0 inches e Maximum Maximum c LL 215 9 mm 355 6 mm 8 5 inches 14 0 inches For all paper sizes the PCL 6 margins are 100 dots at 600 dots per inch The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte array String MediaSize The values in this column are the values for String For custom sizes the PCL 6 Driver specifies actual dimensions for example for 8 by 9 inch custom size real32 xy 8 0 9 0 CustomMediaSize ubyte elnch CustomMediaSizeUnits N w Driver supported media types The following table shows the media types that the HP LaserJet P3005 print drivers support Table 7 4 Supported input media types Media types Tray 1 top Tray 2 500 sheet Trays 3 500 Duplexing unit Manual duplexing command string bin stacker sheet bin Unspecified Y Y Y Y Y Plain 60 199 g m or Y N N N Y 16 53 Ib Plain 60 120 g m or Y Y Y Y Y 16 32 Ib Preprinted 60 120 g Y Y Y Y Y m or 16 32 Ib Letterhead 60 120 g Y Y Y Y Y m or 16 32 Ib Transparency 0 10 Y Y Y N N 0 14 mm thick or 4 7 to 5 mils thick ENWW Media attributes 347 Table 7 4 Supported input media types continued Media types Tray 1 top Tray 2 500 sheet Trays 3 500 Duplexing unit Manual duplexing command string bin stacker
277. hrough PS Emulation Unidriver only e JPEG Passthrough PS Emulation Unidriver only Automatic Configuration Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the device If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment set up this tab by selecting the Update Now setting in the Automatic Configuration setting The default setting is Off After an automatic configuration the setting returns to Off after the changes are made If your environment does not support bidirectional communication the Update Now setting is unavailable so you must manually configure the options on this tab If you have more than one driver installed for the device for example the default HP PCL 6 Unidriver and the HP PCL 5 Unidriver the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which it is activated The other driver will not be updated and might show the default setting for the specific device model Tray 3 This control specifies whether tray 3 an optional 500 sheet tray is installed on the device The default setting is Not Installed Duplex Unit for 2 Sided Printing The HP LaserJet P3005dn and the HP LaserJet P3005x printer models come with a duplex unit installed This setting is enabled Installed by default These printer models support smart duplexing The device uses the smart duplexing feature to detect information on both sides of the print job pages and runs th
278. ial Number XXXXXXXKXX Firmware Datecode 2UU6U U3 U2 U28 U Duplex OFF RAM DISK Storage 193 MB Capacity DIMM Slot 1 256 MB DDR Embedded Jetdirect YES Figure 6 52 Device Status screen Click the Supplies Status link to open the Supplies Status screen HP Embedded Web Server EWS 321 Click the Change Settings link to open the Configure Device screen on the Settings tab The following sections describe the screens and features that are available in the HP EWS Information tab The Information tab allows you to access and print out detailed information regarding device and supply status device configuration network configuration and usage The Status tab contains the following pages e Device Status e Configuration page e Supplies Status page e EventLog e Usage Page e Device Information e Control Panel Snapshot o Print Device Status The Device Status page shows device status messages from the device The Device Status page also displays some pertinent device information and device settings 322 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW 10 10 48 Ua HP LaserJet P3005 Printers Device Status Ready amp Pause Resume o Cunlinue Toners remaining Black 100 Q7551A Other links Tug instal support Order Supplies Product Support mputOutput status Capacity size type Tray 1 Empty 100 Sheets AN Y SIZE ANY TYPE Iray2 OK SUU Sheets LEIER PLAIN STANDARD TOP DIN OK N A NIA
279. ialog box Windows 70 167 368 Index Confirm Network Settings dialog box Windows 69 connectivity bidirectional communication support 28 features 5 Printer Connection dialog box Windows 63 Searching dialog box Windows 65 constraint messages PCL traditional drivers 111 unidrivers 203 context sensitive help PCL traditional drivers 111 PS Emulation Driver 174 unidrivers 203 continuous export 33 control panel language 335 menus 329 viewing 327 Control Panel screen 327 control panel settings traditional drivers 107 unidrivers 199 Copy Count settings PCL traditional drivers 161 PS Emulation Driver 177 unidrivers 207 266 counts page 326 covers use different paper settings PCL traditional drivers 147 unidrivers 221 Ctrl D settings 198 262 Custom Installation choosing 21 dialog boxes Windows 59 Custom Installer Location dialog box Windows Customization Wizard 100 custom paper sizes PCL traditional drivers 348 PCL unidrivers 218 348 customer support 39 Customization Wizard dialog boxes 86 141 D Date amp Time screen 336 Date Time Format setting 337 default Print Task Quick Sets PCL traditional drivers 115 unidrivers 213 default printer setting 106 deleting job storage jobs drivers 316 PCL traditional drivers 159 PS Emulation Driver 190 unidrivers 253 destinations paper device image 151 Device Information page HP Embedded Web Server 38 41 Device Information screen 327 335 Device Installer C
280. ialog box appears the drop down menu in the Name group contains one of two things depending on the current paper size selection on the Paper tab e Ifthe paper size selection is a previously defined custom size then the drop down menu contains the name of that custom size e Ifthe paper size selection is a standard media size then the drop down menu shows the default name Untitled plus a number sign and a numerical value for a custom media size ET NOTE In Windows 98 SE and Windows Me two names for the same size media can coexist for example big and BIG can both be used as names for custom size media measuring 8 4 inches x 11 inches The new name is compared only against the list of user defined custom media size names and not against the standard media size names The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and capabilities are discussed in the Save Delete or Rename on page 143 section The Name drop down menu shows the name of the custom media size that was selected most recently Use the Name drop down menu to select from the list of currently defined custom media sizes or to type a new name for a custom media size The name that appears in the Name drop down menu is one of three things depending on the following conditions e l fasaved custom media size has been selected from the drop down menu and the other controls in the dialog box have not been change
281. ice to send alerts in e mail messages to anyone e X AutoSend Use the AutoSend screen to send device configuration and supplies usage information periodically to your service provider e Security Use the Security screen to manage security for the device e Edit Other Links Use the Edit Other Links screen to add or customize up to five links to the Web sites of your choice e Device Information Use the Device Information screen to provide a name of your choice for the device assign an asset number and configure the company name the person to contact about the device and the physical location of the device e Language Use the Language screen to select the language in which the HP EWS screens appear e Date Time Use this page to set the correct date and time for the device e Wake Time Wake time can be set to turn on the device at a certain time on a daily basis Only one wake time setting can be established per day however each day can have a different wake time The sleep mode delay can also be set on this page Configure device ENWW You can obtain device configuration information through a Web browser by opening the HP EWS screen and changing the basic configuration information on the Settings tab Security and password controls give management information systems MIS managers the level of control that they require within their network environments The following figure shows an example of device options that can be c
282. ices meet the requirements of the Privacy Program and we are proud to display the BBBOnLine Privacy Seal CERY HP has also self certified its privacy practices as consistent with U S E U Safe Harbor principles Notice Choice Onward Transfer Access and Accuracy Security and Oversight Enforcement More information about the U S Department of Commerce Safe Harbor Program can be found at http www export govisafeharbor Sites covered by this privacy statement Types of information we collect 1 2 3 4 How we r in n 5 j 6 Your choices 7 Your privacy preferences and opting out You can continue ordering supplies without sending device information by clicking the Don t Send link On the Supplies Status screen click Media to see the status of the trays The HP Printer Utility cm Supplies Y Information And Support Panar statis 313 supplies Statu The current paper status for the selected printer is shown below Tray 1 Empty Tray 2 Not Empty R Device Information E File Upload 14 Update Firmware A Upload Fonts HP Support y Printer Settings E Duplex Mode Shop for Supplies Economode amp HIM Densi m nte Printer Status Idle a Touei doeet P3005 Supplies Genuine np CAPO Now Figure 6 31 Paper Status screen You can also order supplies from this screen by clicking Shop for Supplies 304 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Device Information Cl
283. ick Device Information in the menu on the left to find the device service ID if assigned the firmware version and the serial number Y Information And Support H ak Supplies Status a g Device Information ES File Upload e Update Firmware HP Printer Utility Device Information Service ID 00000 FW Version 02 028 0 Serial Number XXXXXXXXXX View information about the currently selected printer by clicking the View Configuration Page button below A Upload Fonts HP Support y Printer Settings EJ Duplex Mode Economode amp aner Dansin Figure 6 32 Device Information screen The device configuration page shows other settings click View Configuration Page to see it Click the device icon in the lower left corner to see information about another installed devices This action relaunches the HP Printer Utility so that you can select another device see Figure 6 52 Device Status screen on page 321 File Upload On the Configuration Settings menu click File Upload to open the File Upload screen ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 305 2 T gt e eO HP Printer Utility Y Information And Support File Upload ati Supplies Status R Device Information Select a file and transfer it to your printer The result of this operation depends on the content of the file you transfer File Name lt Not selected gt Display response from the devic
284. ick OK to return to the Additional Software dialog box In the Additional Software dialog box select the additional software for the custom installer and then click Next The Custom Installer Location dialog box appears ENWW Print driver installation instructions 99 E 0 o gt e po 9 HP Installer Customization Utility Custom Installer Location D Select a location to save the customized installer invent Network Path Location Mhplip3 n5 Browse cancel Figure 3 47 Custom Installer Location dialog box Use the Location text field to type a location to save the custom installer The field is large but is limited as to the number of characters that it can accommodate To change the location to save the custom installer click Browse navigate to the folder that you want and then click OK to return to the Custom Installer Location dialog box Click Next The Ready to Create Installer dialog box appears 100 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW HP Laser Jet P3005 Setup e Ready to Create Installer D The Installer Customization Utility is ready to create your installer To modify Printer Properties click Printer Properties Printer Properties Click Next to create your customized installer lt Back Next gt Cancel Figure 3 48 Ready to Create Installer dialog box ET NOTE During installation several files inclu
285. idriver select the following file Drivers your operating system PS hpc3005d inf Windows 98 SE SE or Windows Me e Toinstall the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver select the following file Drivers lt language gt pcl6 hp3dusb inf for a USB connection Drivers lt language gt pcl6 hp3005p6 inf for a network connection e Toinstall the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver select the following file Drivers lt language gt pcl5 hp3dusb inf for a USB connection Drivers lt language gt pcl5 hp3005p5 inf for a network connection e Toinstall the PS Emulation Driver select the following file Drivers lt language gt ps usbprint inf for a USB connection Drivers lt language gt pcl6 hp3005f inf for a network connection 5 Complete the wizard steps The print driver will be installed as part of the wizard process Installer Customization Wizard for Windows Administrators can use the Installer Customization Wizard utility to customize a silent unattended device installer by pre setting the installation options in a response file The installer is customized with settings for the following options e Language e Operating system e Print drivers e Components ET NOTE For detailed information about the Installer Customization Wizard see the HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which is available at the following Web site www hp com support ljp3005 Topics o Run the Installer Customization Wizard e Dialo
286. ied by users Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use A maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets can be stored on a particular system If you attempt to save more a message box appears that states There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined Please delete some before adding new ones Paper Options The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper Quality tab apply to all of the pages of the document The following figure shows the Paper Options group box and the selections that are available by default 216 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Paper Options Size is 8 5 x 11 inches Letter C Use Different Paper Covers Source is E Automatically Select v Type is gt Unspecified v Figure 5 4 Paper Options group box The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper Covers check box is selected The settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order e Sizeis on page 217 e Custom Paper Size on page 218 e Source is on page 219 e Typeis on page 220 e Use Different Paper Covers on page 221 Size is The Size is setting is a drop down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes When the mouse cursor moves over the dimensions label the cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric
287. ime when the average toner coverage is significantly less than 5 it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge If print quality begins to degrade under these circumstances you must install a new print cartridge even if toner remains in the cartridge ET NOTE The EconoMode setting might work only if a genuine HP print cartridge is installed HP print cartridges can measure the life of the mechanical parts and the quantity of toner If the EconoMode setting is used frequently the mechanical parts can wear out before the supply of toner is depleted increasing the risk of toner leaking Use genuine HP parts to avoid this problem Job storage The default value for this setting is Off which means that the print job will not be stored in the device 188 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW ENWW ES NOTE The job storage feature requires at least 80 MB of total memory or that an optional hard disk is installed If the job storage feature is enabled with at least 80 MB of total memory three Job Storage Mode settings are available on the Job Storage tab Two Off Proof and Hold Private Job additional Job Storage Mode settings become available on the Job Storage tab if a hard disk is installed Quick Copy Stored Job To use job storage features when printing follow these steps 1 5 Click File and then click Print from the software progra
288. indows ENWW Advanced PostScript Options EE These settings have been chosen to optimize printer performance You should not change them unless you have specific reasons to do so PostScript language level Bitmap compression Use PostScript Level 1 features Compress bitmap images Use PostScript Level 2 features C No bitmap compression Data format ASCII data z Emar mera TS protocol C Tagged binary communications protacol C Pure binary data Send CTRL D before job v Send CTRL D after job d Cancel Restore Defaults Figure 4 37 Advanced PostScript Options dialog box The following options are available on the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box e PostScript Language Level e Bitmap compression e Data format e Send CTRL D before job e Send CTRL D after job PostScript Language Level The PostScript Language Level specifies which PostScript language level to use from 1 to the highest level that the device supports Some devices support multiple levels It is usually best to select the highest level that is available because a higher language level provides more features In some instances however you would still use level 1 For example if you are printing a file to disk and that file will be printed by someone who has a level 1 device select level 1 Choose between Postscript level 1 and Postscript level 2 features for the HP LaserJet P3005 Bit
289. ing To use job storage features when printing follow these steps 1 Click File and then click Print from the software program The Print dialog box appears ET NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job storage features 2 Click Properties The Properties dialog box appears 3 Click the Job Storage tab 4 Select the job storage options by clicking the appropriate option button and then complete any required fields 5 Click OK 252 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Topics Releasing a job storage print job Deleting a job storage print job Releasing a job storage print job After you send a print job that uses the job storage feature you can release the job to print from the device control panel 1 2 8 9 Press theMenu button to open the menus Press A the up arrow or V the down arrow until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device control panel and then press v select Press A up or V down to scroll to your user name and then press v select Press A up or V down to scroll to the job name and then press v select Press A up or V down until PRINT is highlighted on the device control panel and then press y select Press v select If a PIN number is assigned to the job press A up or V down to select the first digit of the PIN and then press v select The number i
290. ing tab is greater than one the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of media does not change 210 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Paper Quality tab features To gain access to the Paper Quality tab follow these steps 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click Start Select Settings Click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home Right click the device name Click Printing Preferences Click the Paper Quality tab Use the Paper Quality tab to specify the size type and source of the media Also use this tab to specify different media selections for the front cover first page other pages last page and back cover of the document The following figure shows the Paper Quality tab ENWW Paper Quality tab features 211 BS e E o e E ou ac 0 gt fe o S 2 HP LJ P3005 PCL6 Printing Preferences Advanced Paper Quality Effects Finishing Job Storage Services Print Task Quick Sets TAGE Paper Options Size is 8 5 x 11 inches Letter v C Use Different Paper Covers Source is Automatically Select v Type is Print Quality Unspecified v FastRes 1200 O EconoMode May Save Print Cartridges OK j Apply Figure 5 3 Paper Quality tab The Paper Quality tab conta
291. inks page HP Embedded Web Server 41 Edit Other Links screen 334 Effects tab PCL traditional drivers 131 unidrivers 229 Embedded Jetdirect page printing 38 embedded Web server See HP Embedded Web Server Energy Star compliance 4 Enterprise AutoConfiguration about 29 Novell NetWare operating systems 30 Windows operating systems supported 29 envelopes paper type commands 349 escape sequences paper source 344 paper type 349 Euro symbol 263 eventlog 38 Event Log screen HP EWS 325 EWS See HP Embedded Web Server EWS HP Embedded Web Server Device configuration page 323 Device Status page 322 EventLog 325 Information tab 322 Settings 329 Supplies Status page 324 exporting driver parameters 33 Index 369 External Fonts settings PCL unidrivers 260 F features 3 File to E mail utility 342 File Upload Macintosh 305 Finish dialog box Customization Wizard 104 Finish dialog box Windows 83 Finishing tab PCL traditional drivers 114 unidrivers 237 Firewall Detected dialog box Windows 64 firewalls dialog box Windows 64 firmware determining current level 350 downloading 351 FTP updates Windows 354 HP Web Jetadmin updates 359 LPR command updates 358 Macintosh updates 306 messages during update 351 troubleshooting updates 351 UNIX updates 358 updating remotely 350 verifying installation 353 Windows network updates 357 Windows local port update 355 firmware updating 328 First Page paper settings PCL tradition
292. ins the following control sets e Print Task Quick Sets e Paper Options e Use Different Paper Covers e Document preview image e Print Quality Print Task Quick Sets The first group box in the upper portion of the Paper Quality tab is Print Task Quick Sets Because they are all the same control any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on 212 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW the Paper Quality tab affects all the Printing Preferences driver tabs that have the Print Task Quick Sets setting e Paper Quality e Effects e Finishing e Job Storage Use the Print Task Quick Sets setting to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all of the other print driver tabs except the Advanced tab where the setting is not available Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network administrator settings or user defined printing specifications such as media size pages per sheet and so on The Print Task Quick Sets control does not appear on the driver Properties tabs ET NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users These administrator Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users but usually cannot be modified by users Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use The following selections are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop down menu e Default Print Se
293. instructions 87 HP Installer Customization Utility Welcome to the HP LaserJet P3005 Installation Customization Wizard This wizard will help you create a customized installer for HP LaserJet P3005 printers This customized installer can then be distributed to client PCs or servers and used to install HP LaserJet P3005 printers using the settings you have selected Note This wizard will also allow you to configure any drivers that support pre configuration 2005 Copyright Hewlett Packard Development Company L P cma Figure 3 32 Welcome to the HP LaserJet P3005 Installation Customization Wizard screen Click Next The Software License Agreement dialog box appears HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Software License Agreement Please read the license agreement below License Agreement T I defined in FAR 52 227 19 Jun 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause whichever is applicable You have only those rights provided for such Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the HP standard software agreement for the product If you accept the terms of the Software License Agreement select I agree IF not click Cancel to close setup I agree C Idisagree lt Back Cancel Figure 3 33 Installer Customization Wizard Welcome dialog box 88 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW Click Back on this
294. int Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver 126 Current Settlng 5 d eer e IHRER RI CHER IU 127 Font Settings frin ebnmusdu uan mi 127 Output Settings eaea a eer bores d Debes bod irse taa 127 Print Quality Details for the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver 128 Current Setting ope det pte edem eed 129 Graphic Settings a tinte depre Rind 129 generum ET 129 Output Setliligs acriter tette ee meets 129 Effects tab features nieis nine e Deed ieget ruat quse de a ed ee 131 Prnt Task Quick Sets o n nti Ree e tH a e ERE 132 Fit TO Page unen ee ete e ae eue qe dera ee qe te pee de eU 132 Print Document On er fon reete ate etuer Phasen rat soto emnes 132 Scale to Eit ior dpi 132 YOt Normal Size tr t A OE MPO II TERRAE Les p Ree TERR edd 133 Document preview image eses naea tke ne LER X ER Phe ERR Ra 133 Waterrmatks dett he ede dede ttal tet inks ecthausaad e tae oe tte a edt etetels 134 Current Watermarks oooooococconccocccccconccoccnncnnonnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn rennen nens 134 First Page Only ient oet A m 134 Editt Ie Lupa tolto ty itis en EL dts 134 ENWW V Current Watermark Sinai cada dal did 135 Watermark Message iicccconi ococnnnioninanracano code nrnnnnndano tac n aran nano cec na nn 136 Message Angle mvicioiiicci dde 136 Document preview image sssssse mm 136 Font Attributes cai ede to Laude ute de
295. int Using information will automatically be filled in If the HP LaserJet P3005 Series PPD does not appear in the Print Using field turn the computer off and then on again and restart the setup process 6 Click Add The Installable Options screen appears a Installable Options Make sure your printer s options are accurately shown here so you can take full advantage of them For information on your printer and its optional hardware check the documentation that came with it Tray 3 Not Installed HH Collation in Printer No Total RAM lt 80 MB and No Ha ES Printer Hard Disk Not Installed E Duplex Unit Fit to Page f Prompt User cs Sr 0 C Gmel Figure 6 16 Installable Options screen 7 A device hard disk is not installed by default Do not change the Printer Hard Disk setting 8 Ifthe device has an optional tray 3 change the appropriate setting for the tray from Not Installed to Installed 9 If the device has a duplex unit select the Duplex Unit check box ENWW Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 289 10 After selecting the installable options click Continue The device name appears in the Printer List and the setup is complete eee Printer List o Sus Kind amp HP Color LaserJet 2700n HP Color LaserJet g HP Color Laserjet 2700n 9D63FE HP Color Laserjet z Bu Laserjet M5035 MFP HP Laserjet M5035 1 HP Laserjet P3005 HP Laserjet P3005 Figure 6 17 Printer List s
296. int message with an OK button ENWW Help system 111 Whenever a constraint message appears with the OK and Cancel buttons the interpretation of the buttons is as follows e Click OK to accept the change that was just made The driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value e Click Cancel to reject the change that was just made The control returns to its previous value Bubble Help Bubble Help features a graphical icon that resembles a cartoon speech bubble with a lowercase i in it representing the international symbol for information The following figure shows a Bubble Help icon on a driver tab HP LaserJet P3005 PCL6 Properties 2 x Job Storage Basics Configure General Details Color Management Finishing Effects Paper Print T ask Quick Sets Type new Quick Set name here Save Document Options l iz tarect rdertar HESnBiri FlipPages Up Booklet Printing Pd Off v 8 5 11 inches Print Quality Pages per Sheet C Best Quality Faster Printing C Custom Details EconoMode Cancel Apply Help Figure 4 2 A typical page with a Bubble Help icon The bubble typically appears next to a control that is unavailable although it can also accompany an available control if an important note concerning its use is available within the Help Moving the pointer over the bubble c
297. inting sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing If more copies are needed you must reprint the job from the software program Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the device The Private Job PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters 0 though 9 Type non numeric characters to remove immediately The text field does not allow you to type more than four characters The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string but when the edit field loses focus the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job Quick Copy To use the Quick Copy option a hard disk must be installed and Job Storage must be enabled When you select Quick Copy the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the device after which you can print additional copies of the print job atthe device control panel The number of quick copy print jobs that can be stored in the device is set by using the device control panel ET NOTE The device configuration can bet set to hold a maximum of 50 quick copy or proof and hold jobs The number is set at the device control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu and the default is 32 When this preset limit is reached the new document overwrites the oldest held document Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the device Stored J
298. inuxprinting e UNIX For more information go to the following Web site ENWW Printing system software 7 www hp com go jetdirectunix_software e UNIX model scripts Available only on the Web at the following Web site www hp com go unixmodelscripts e MS Windows Terminal Server e Citrix Terminal Server For more information go to the following Web site h20000 ww2 hp com bizsupport TechSupport Document jsp Alternatively go to the HP com Web site and search for c00213455 e MS Windows Cluster Server 8 e HP OpenVMS For more information go to the following Web site h71000 www7 hp com openvms print e Tru64 UNIX printing For more information go to the following Web site h30097 www3 hp com printing e SAP printing For more information go to the following Web site www hp com go sap print e HP Install Network Printer Wizard INPW Available only on the Web at the following Web site www hp com go inpw software Availability Download the printing system software from the Web or order it on a CD from HP fulfillment centers ET NOTE This STR describes drivers that are shipped with the printing system software CD This STR does not describe any drivers that might be released by support personnel The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet software components by operating system ET NOTE Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 64 bit drivers and components are available on
299. ion process consists of three basic steps e Driver acquisition e Driver preconfiguration e Driver installation and deployment These steps can be accomplished in different ways depending on the tool that is being used to define the configuration The configuration process for driver preconfiguration is supported through three distinct tools All three are designed with the same basic user interface UI controls for interacting with the CFG file but are packaged differently either to support established device installation workflows or to leave the deployment and installation of the driver entirely up to the user The following tools support driver preconfiguration e HP Driver Configuration Editor The HP Driver Configuration Editor is a small standalone MS Windows software program that the administrator can use to open the CFG file that is associated with a particular driver and make modifications that are applied when that driver is installed on the target computer It is intended for use in environments that have an established process for deploying drivers This is the preconfiguration tool of choice to support any Novell or HP Print Server Appliance PSA Point and Print environments It is used in the way that any ordinary MS Windows software program is used The HP Driver Configuration Editor is available at the following Web site www hp com go hpdpc sw e The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin HP Web Jetadmin provid
300. ions These settings are usually configured during the installation process by using Apple Mac OS X tools such as Print Center Printer Setup Utility and Print amp Fax For more information see Table 6 1 Adding a device in Macintosh operating systems on page 278 PDEs Printer Dialog Extensions PDEs are code plug ins for Mac OS X V10 2 8 and later only that provide access to device features such as number of copies duplexing and quality settings 276 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW HP Embedded Web Server Mac OS X supports the HP Embedded Web Server HP EWS Use the HP EWS to perform the following tasks e X View the device status and change device settings e X View and change network settings for the device e Print information pages for the device e X View the device event log The HP EWS is accessed by using a Web browser such as Safari The HP USB EWS Gateway software allows the Web browser access to the device if the device is connected using a USB cable The HP EWS can also by opened by choosing the Utility button in the Macintosh Print Center or Printer Setup Utility or through the HP Device Configuration utility Install notes Readme file This text file contains information about basic device installation and OS support and is located in the PDF folder on the installation CD Online help The help system is in English only and can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS Help Center Install th
301. ironments and uses See the print driver Help for available features Topics e Complete LaserJet printing system e HP PCL 6 Unidriver e HP PCL 5Unidriver 24 Chapter2 Software description ENWW e PS Emulation Unidriver e HP universal print driver UPD Complete LaserJet printing system Use the printing system software CD to install the full set of drivers and other software for the HP LaserJet P3005 HP PCL 6 Unidriver Overall the HP PCL 6 Unidriver provides the best performance print quality and printer feature support for most users The driver aligns with MS Windows graphic device interface GDI for best performance in MS Windows environments The HP PCL 6 Unidriver is recommended for most business applications but may not be fully compatible with third party and custom solutions that are based on PCL 5 HP PCL 5 Unidriver The HP PCL 5 Unidriver is compatible with previous versions of PCL and legacy HP LaserJet printers Some features found in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver are not found in this driver c fe 5 Q O 7 7 Lo o past 5 E e o It is the recommended driver choice for e Any third party or home grown custom solutions that use forms fonts and SAP programs e Any environment with mixed operating systems such as UNIX Linux and mainframe PS Emulation Unidriver The PS Emulation Unidriver is recommended for printing with Adobe or other graphics rich software programs
302. ites of your choice see the following note These links appear throughout the HP EWS screens in the Other Links box beneath the left navigational bar Three permanent links hp instant support Shop for Supplies and Product Support have already been established The Edit Other Links screen is shown in the following figure Edit Other Links n f Remove Selected Link Figure 6 66 HP EWS Edit Other Links screen 334 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Adding a link Use this procedure to add a link 1 Under Add Link type the URL and the name of the link as you would like it to appear in the HP EWS 2 Click Add Link Removing a link Use this procedure to remove a link 1 Under User defined Links select the link or links that you would like to remove 2 Click Remove Selected Link Device Information Use the Device Information screen to provide a name of your choice for the device assign an asset number and configure the company name the person to contact about the device and the physical location of the device The device TCP IP address device name device model and serial number are also available on this screen HP Lasc 45 HP LaserJet P3005 Printers Device Information Printer Name HP LaserJet P2005 Printer Location Asset Number Company Name Contact Person Detault IP Address 10 10 48 119 Product Name HP LaserJet P3005 Printer MOCI COOO0XA Printer Sonal Number 90000000QX
303. iver performance The HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5 drivers automatically configure the Total Memory and DWS values in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me environments that support bidirectional communication To manually set the Total Memory and DWS values print a configuration page and find the Total Memory and DWS values in the Memory section of the page Then click More on the Configuration tab and either use the up and down arrows to select the appropriate values or type the Total Memory and DWS values in the Total Memory and DWS fields of the More Configuration Options dialog box 7 La co O a S cy O ET me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo ET NOTE The HP LaserJet P3005 printer can be configured for a maximum of 320 MB Include Types in Application Source List When the Include Types in Application Source List check box is selected all media types such as heavy media and transparencies are available from the Source is list on the Paper tab When you ENWW Configure tab features 171 are in a software program you can open the Paper tab by clicking Print from the File menu and then clicking Properties Automatic configuration If you have modified the configuration of the HP LaserJet P3005 printer since installation click Update Now to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver If the Update Now button is not available select the appropriate configuration options on the Configure tab If y
304. ivers dialog box appears HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Drivers Select the printer drivers to install Drivers Driver Name O HP LaserJet P3005 PS Driver O HP LaserJet P3005 PCL Se Driver O HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 6 Driver Details lt Back le Cancel Figure 3 41 Drivers dialog box 94 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW Select any combination of drivers for the custom installer No selection depends on any other selection It is possible to create a custom installer that installs features without including a print driver Select the drivers that you want to install or select none of them if you are not installing a driver To view details about the drivers click Details The driver Details dialog box appears Details The Following printer drivers are available For installation HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 6 Driver 12208 KB The PCL 6 printer driver can provide the best overall performance and access to your printer features HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 5e Driver 12208 KB PCL 5 recommended for general office monochrome and color printing HP LaserJet P3005 PS Driver 12208 KB PS level 3 emulation printer driver allows you to print and access the features of your printer E 0 o gt e po 9 Figure 3 42 Driver Details dialog box All of the drivers that are available on the Drivers dialog box are described in the Details dialog box Click OK to return to t
305. k You may also need to feed the paper from the multipurpose tray for best results The paper is delivered printed side up Use this feature to order your pages correctly for this bin or slot If you click this check box and also click Print on Both Sides the printer prints the first side of each page pauses for you to reload the paper and then prints the second side of each page Other documents cannot be printed while the printer is paused Follow the onscreen instructions 118 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Print on Both Sides The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off not selected Print on Both Sides is available when the following conditions exist e Type is on the Paper tab is set to any of the following media types except for the following types e Labels e Transparency e Envelope e Cardstock e Tough Paper e Size is is set to any media size except for the following sizes e Statement e Envelope 10 e Envelope DL e Envelope C5 e Envelope B5 e Envelope Monarch e Double Japan Postscard Rotated Ez NOTE As a rule extra memory need not be installed on the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in order to print on both sides However very complex double sided print jobs might require additional memory Selecting Print on Both Sides makes the Flip Pages Up and Booklet Printing options available when Paper Size is set to the following media sizes zO o Letter E QUI e Legal
306. k this check box and also click Print on Both Sides the printer prints the first side of each page pauses for you to reload the paper and then prints the second side of each page Other documents cannot be printed while the printer is paused Follow the onscreen instructions Print on Both Sides The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off not selected Print on Both Sides is available when the following conditions exist ENWW Type is on the Paper tab is set to any media type except for the following types Labels Transparency Envelope Cardstock Heavy Size is is set to any media size except for the following sizes Statement Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Monarch Finishing tab features 239 BS e E o e E ou ac 0 gt fe o S ET NOTE Asarule extra memory is not needed on the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in order to print on both sides However very complex double sided print jobs might require additional memory Topics e Automatically print on both sides e Manually print on both sides Automatically print on both sides The duplexing unit in the device prints on two sides of a sheet of paper when the Print on Both Sides option is specified in the print job The HP LaserJet P3005 printer comes with a duplexing unit installed in the following models e HP LaserJet P3005dn e HP LaserJet P3005x These printer models s
307. ks How do get HP SureSupply or do I already have it FAQs Shop for supplies Use SureSupply to shop for supplies for your printer Shop for supplies On the Transfer printer information to HP SureSUpply page click the Shared Information link to open a screen that shows the HP privacy statement as shown in the following figure ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 303 United States English Contact HP Search DU Online privacy statement invent Online privacy statement HP Respects your privacy Privacy statements for HP and its subsidiaries respect your privacy and are committed to protecting it HP provides this other countries regions Privacy Statement to inform you of our Privacy Policy and practices and of the choices you can make HP Global master privacy about the way your information is collected online and how that information is used We ve structured policy our websites so that in general you can visit HP on the Web without identifying yourself or revealing Cookies amp Web Beacons any personal information We make this notice readily available on our home page and at the bottom P3P technology of every HP Web page Some HP Web pages are P3P enabled which allows you additional control Back to previous page over your personal information HP is a founding sponsor of the Council of Better Business Bureau s BBBOnLine Privacy Program the gold standard for privacy certification HP privacy pract
308. leased the original job for printing the job will overwrite the existing job regardless of the PIN Private jobs are deleted if you turn off the device Quick Copy To use the Quick Copy option a hard disk must be installed and Job Storage must be enabled When you select Quick Copy the entire print job prints and a copy of the print job is stored on the device after which you can print additional copies of the print job atthe device control panel The number of quick copy print jobs that can be stored in the device is set by using the device control panel ET NOTE The device configuration can bet set to hold a maximum of 50 quick copy or proof and hold jobs The number is set at the device control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu and the default is 32 When this preset limit is reached the new document overwrites the oldest held document Quick Copy jobs are deleted if you turn off the device Stored Job To use the Stored Job option a hard disk must be installed and Job Storage must be enabled 250 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the device hard disk without printing it The print job is stored in the device as if it is an electronic file cabinet After the print job is stored on the device hard disk you can print the job at the device control panel The job remains stored in the device until it is deleted Stored jobs remain o
309. lect Basic Installation only the necessary software is installed If you select Custom Installation select the components that you want to install Installer Customization Wizard Use this wizard to customize the HP LaserJet P3005 installer by presetting the installation options in a response file The resulting customized installer can then be used for silent unattended installation HP Easy Printer Care Software Use this option to install the HP Easy Printer Care from the Web in a downloadable installation file This device maintenance tool helps track and maintain the devices by providing information about status alert notifications usage and supplies for one or more devices MS Windows printing system software 21 Software description Register Product Use this option to register the device online After Web registration you can gain access to support and services manage your profile and sign up for free support alerts driver notices and personalized newsletters Printer Documentation Use this option to view the HP LaserJet P3005 user documentation The following document options are available when you click this option e User Guide Interactive e User Guide Printer Friendly e Install Notes e Embedded Web Server Guide e HP Jetdirect Guide E NOTE f Adobe Acrobat Reader 4 0 or later is not installed click any of the links to a portable document format PDF document to open it in a version of Adobe Acrobat Reader
310. leted from the device If more copies are needed you must reprint the job from the software program If you send a second proof and hold job to the device with the same user name and job name as an existing proof and hold job and you have not released the original job for printing the job will overwrite the existing job Proof and hold jobs are deleted if you turn off the device ET NOTE The device configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick copy or proof and hold jobs The number is set at the device control panel in the CONFIGURATION menu and the default is 32 When this preset limit is reached the new document overwrites the oldest held document Also a document that has the same user name and job name as one that is already stored on the device memory will overwrite the existing document Job Storage tab features 155 72 Li co O o c cw O me oe o Lo I gt pa Lo Private Job To use the Private Job option the job storage feature must be enabled and the device must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB When you select Private Job the print job is sent to the device but is not printed until you request the job at the device control panel Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel After the job is printed the job is immediately deleted from the device This feature is useful when you are pr
311. lled previously EAC is not activated and the pre existing bidirectional communication software is used to configure the print driver If bidirectional communication software has not been installed EAC installs bidirectional communication software that allows it to communicate with the device and automatically match the print driver with the actual device configuration EAC is activated during installation of the driver or whenever the Update Now feature is used If the HP LaserJet P3005 printer configuration changes after installation the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication by using the Update Now feature The following tables show the availability of EAC for various operating systems and network environments that support bidirectional communication Table 2 3 EAC availability in MS Windows and Microsoft Share Method Connection type MS Windows Microsoft Share 98 Me 2000 XP 2000 XP host with 2000 XP client Installer Direct Parallel connect USB Network Jetdirect TCP IP x x x x x IPX SPX x x x x x Standard TCP IP HP x x x x x TCP IP x x x x x MS IPX SPX x x x x x HP ENWW MS Windows driver configuration 29 c fe 5 Q O 7 0 Le o fast 5 e o Table 2 3 EAC availability in MS Windows and Microsoft Share continued Method Connection type MS Windows Microsoft Share 98 Me 20
312. ly on the Web All other drivers and components listed in the following table are available on the Web and on the printing system software CD Table 1 4 Software component availability for HP LaserJet P3005 printer Component Windows 98 SE Windows 2000 and Windows XP 64 bit Windows Me and Windows XP 32 bit and Windows Server 2 Windows Server 2003 003 Drivers HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and HP Traditional x PCL 6 Driver HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x 8 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW Table 1 4 Software component availability for HP LaserJet P3005 printer continued Component Windows 98 SE Windows 2000 and Windows XP 64 bit Windows Me and Windows XP 32 bit and Windows Server 2 Windows Server 2003 003 PS Emulation Driver x Installer Common MS Windows Installer x Installer Customization Wizard x x CD Browser x Add Printer Wizard install x x x Other software Web Registration x x HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x Easy Printer Care Software x x Topics e Printing system software on the Web e In box printing system software CDs Printing system software on the Web All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software The HP Web site offers an option for automatic e mail notification about new software releases
313. m The Print dialog box appears ET NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job storage features Click Properties The Properties dialog box appears Click the Device Options tab In the Printer features setting select the job storage options by clicking the appropriate option button and then complete any required fields Click OK After you send a print job that uses the job storage feature you can release the job to print from the device control panel 1 2 Press theMenu button to open the menus Press A the up arrow or Y the down arrow until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device control panel and then press v select Press A up or V down to scroll to your user name and then press v select Press A up or V down to scroll to the job name and then press v select Press A up or V down until PRINT is highlighted on the device control panel and then press v select Press v select If a PIN number is assigned to the job press A up or V down to select the first digit of the PIN and then press v select The number in the device control panel display changes to an asterisk Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number If no PIN number is assigned to the job continue with the next step HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 189 7 Ll co O a S EN O me
314. mands 347 paper source commands 344 Papertab 139 paper type commands 349 Print Quality Details settings 126 128 Print Quality group box 126 Print Task Quick Sets 115 Printer Model box 165 Scale to Fit 132 settings 107 Update Now 30 Update Now button 172 version numbers 26 Watermarks settings 134 PCL unidrivers of Normal Size 232 About tab 268 accessing 201 Advanced Printing Features 208 Advanced tab 205 Alternative Letterhead Mode 210 Automatic Configuration 264 booklets 243 Copy Count settings 207 custom paper sizes 348 Device Services 256 Device Settings tab 257 Document Options 208 239 document preview image 227 232 245 duplexing 239 Effects tab 229 External Fonts settings 260 features 199 Finishing tab 237 374 Index Flip Pages Up 242 Font DIMM Installer 260 Font Substitution Table 259 Form to Tray Assignment 258 Graphic setting 207 Graphics Mode 209 Help system 203 HP Driver Preconfiguration support 33 included 24 Installable Options settings 264 Job storage settings 246 Layout Options 210 media supported 344 Mopier settings 265 Pages per Sheet 244 Paper Options 216 paper size commands 347 paper type commands 349 Paper Output settings 206 Paper Quality tab 211 Print Optimizations option 208 Print Quality settings 227 Print Task Quick Sets 212 Printer Features 209 Printing Preferences tab 201 Properties tab 202 Resizing Options settings 231 Scale to Fit 231 Services tab 255 TrueType font
315. map compression ENWW Use this control to specify whether to compress graphics before sending the document to the device If you are using postscript level 2 or if you are using postscript level 1 and a device connected to a serial port click Compress bitmap images If you are using postscript level 1 and a device connected to a parallel port or if using a network device click No bitmap compression HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 197 7 Ll co O a S EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo Data format This control specifies the protocol that the device uses for printjobs The following options are available e ASCII data This is the default setting Click ASCII data to send data in ASCII format 7 bit which might take longer to print but can be sent through any I O channel such as a serial parallel or network port e Binary communications protocol When you click Binary communications protocol the device sends all data except special control characters in binary 8 bit format This format can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and is faster than sending data in ASCII format Select this option click Send Mode to switch the device to Binary Communications Protocol BCP for future print jobs ET NOTE This option is available only if the computer is connected to the device through a direct connection a USB or parallel cable e Tagged binary communications protoc
316. mark text only or edit an existing watermark The following watermarks are preset in the driver e none e Confidential 232 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW ENWW e Draft e SAMPLE The drop down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system plus the string none which indicates that no watermark is selected This is the default setting Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the preview image When the First Page Only check box is selected the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is none Watermarks are applied to logical pages For example when Pages per Sheet is set to 4 and First Page Only is turned off four watermarks appear on the physical page one on each logical page Click Edit and the Watermark Details dialog box appears Watermark Details Current Watermarks none Confidential Draft SAMPLE Font Attributes Watermark Message Name Arial Color pa E Message Angle EE none Diagonal Very light O Horizontal Size Style O Angle m 80 e Regular Figure 5 13 Watermark Details dialog box The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and font attributes Click OK to accept all of the
317. maximum of 32 767 seconds Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline This control specifies the minimum font size in pixels for which the driver downloads TrueType fonts as outline Type 1 fonts Any font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap Type 3 font Use this option to fine tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Document Defaults The default setting is 100 pixel s Use the spin box to change this value up to a maximum of 32 767 pixels Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline This control specifies the maximum font size in pixels for which the driver will download TrueType fonts as bitmap Type 3 fonts Any font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an outline Type 1 font Use this option to fine tune the Automatic setting or override the Send TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Document ENWW Device Settings tab features 263 e y 09 e E ou a5 0 gt fe o S Defaults The default setting is 600 pixel s Use the spin box to change this value up to a maximum of 32 767 pixels Installable Options Topics e Automatic Configuration e Tray3 e Duplex Unit for 2 Sided Printing e Allow Manual Duplexing e Printer Memory e Printer Hard Disk e Job storage e Mopier Mode e Mopier mode and collation e Postscript Passt
318. me as a private job see above Private jobs are deleted from the device after they are printed Private stored jobs are retained in the device after printing but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed The PIN group box is usually inactive The option within the PIN group box PIN to Print is activated if you select either of the following options e Select Private Job If selected you must type the PIN number at the device control panel in order to print the job e Select Stored Job and then select the Require PIN to Print check box If the Require PIN to Print check box is selected you must type a PIN in order to make the stored job private Job Notification Options Clicking a job storage mode selection causes the Job Notification Options group box to become available The Display Job ID when printing check box is selected by default The Display Job ID when printing option causes a pop up dialog box to appear when the job storage print job is printed The dialog box shows the user name and job name that are associated with the stored print job along with the device name port and location User Name Use the User Name settings to help identify the job at the device control panel The following are the User Name settings e Windows User Name This option associates your MS Windows user name with the stored print job The MS Windows user name automatically appears in the text field below the User Name options e C
319. milar to these examples gt LPT1 Not Rerouted gt Resident portion of MODE loaded gt Infinite retry on parallel printer time out 3 Atacommand prompt type copy b FILENAME lt PORTNAME gt where FILENAME is the name of the RFU file including the path and lt PORTNAME gt is the name of the appropriate device port such as LPT1 For example type the following C gt copy b c P3005fw rfu lptl Es NOTE Ifthe file name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example typeC gt copy b c My Documents VP3005fw rfu lpti ENWW Remote firmware updates 355 Press Enter on the keyboard The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device This can take several minutes Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel ET NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update this can happen more than once At the end of the update process the READY message appears on the control panel Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window Windows 2000 Windo
320. n nn eene 242 Page order preview images 1 pete t nett en Te ED de CEDE ne Pe ERE ee e ERR Rene 245 Job Storage tab ida Da eR abe Dn ap IT tonii ht 248 iMac 255 HP PCL 6 Unidriver Device Settings tab sssssss eene 257 PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab ssssssssseeen eene 258 Fontioubstitution Table too dte t eee t Aa 259 HP Font Installer dialog box o eect ir eee nner aianei i renier eene 260 ADOUE tabe a EE 268 HP LaserJet P3005 printer CD ROM icon 2 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeceaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteetenseenaeeas 279 HP LaserJet Software screen ccccccccecceccccceeceeceeeeeee eee tae e an aea OaE R aa iaa Eaa 279 Authenticate dialog iiit Etat ipe tags dace E TON a iie 280 HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer Introduction screen ooooooocccnnconncccccnoncnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnninoninininons 280 HP LaserJet Installer Read Me dialog ssssse emm emm ennemis 281 License dialog oros a NN 281 Agree diaig print dico 8c ettet iit tate Port eum tun onte ha fai ha tos ma mice e i tu broma DDR EE hs 282 Easy Install dialog ee et p en eb ted beue trea Pare RE Pret i Des Pe Ee REM bs 282 HP LaserJet Installer dialog custom install ssse m 283 installingdialog E 284 FINISH Up dialog cnim tec tee en te dl t HR epos 285 Printer List Screen
321. n the device control panel display changes to an asterisk Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number If no PIN number is assigned to the job continue with the next step Press A up or V down to select the number of copies to print Press v select to print the job Deleting a job storage print job ENWW Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the device memory You can do this from the device control panel 1 2 Press theMenu button to open the menus Press A the up arrow or Y the down arrow until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device control panel and then press v select Press A up or V down to scroll to your user name and then press v select Press A up or V down to scroll to the job name and then press v select Press A up or Y down until DELETE is highlighted on the device control panel and then press v select Press v select If a PIN number is assigned to the job press A up or V down to select the first digit of the PIN and then press v select The number in the device control panel display changes to an asterisk Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number Job Storage tab features 253 e um 09 e E ou ae 0 gt fe o S If no PIN number is assigned to the job continue with the next step 8 Press y select to delete the job 254 Chapt
322. n the device hard disk when the device is turned off Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents A stored job can be managed in two ways as either a private or a public job Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the device which can then be printed only after you type a PIN atthe device control panel You can set the PIN in the PIN group box After the job is printed the job remains in the device and can be printed again at the device control panel The private mode is initiated by selecting the Require PIN to Print check box In this mode a PIN that is typed at the device control panel is required in order to release the job The box labeled PIN is usually inactive The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you select Stored Job If you select the Require PIN to Print box you must type a PIN to make the stored job private Ez NOTE A private stored job is not the same as a private job see above Private jobs are deleted from the device after they are printed Private stored jobs are retained in the device after printing but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed Require PIN Require PIN is available when Stored Job is selected Select the PIN to Print box then type a 4 digit PIN number in the box provided The stored job is sent to the device where you must enter the 4 digit PIN on the control panel to retrieve the stored job The PIN to Print box is selected but
323. n the following figure ET NOTE The figure is provided as an example only The actual files attached will vary depending on your device 342 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW ENWW M Delete this Insert Case Number only Message Rich Text File Edit View Insert Format Tools Actions Help Elsend H amp 2 Arial EGRE e This message has not been sent To ntemalnygalhpcom 0 00000 5OO oo EEcEcc Subject Delete ths Insert Case Number 00 3Dir txt 109 KB 2Dir txt 16 KB 1Dirtxt 1KB 12hpReg txt 11 11hpReg txt 123 10hpReg txt 1 MB KB KB ShpReg txt 9 KB 4hpReg txt 314 B 3hpReg txt 308 B 2hpReg txt 34 KB 1hpReg txt 34 KB HpOsInfo txt 1 KB hpjsilg2 txt 89 KB setupapi log 746 KB Figure 7 1 File to E mail sample e mail message with files attached If the File to E mail utility fails for any reason for instance if you cancel the new message all the files are copied to a folder on the desktop that is named CCC possibly with strings of O s attached to the end You can zip these files and e mail them separately File to E mail utility 343 e y o a oD z o o Oo E WwW Media attributes Topics e Media sources and destinations e Media source commands e Driver supported media sizes e Driver supported media types e Custom paper sizes e Media type commands Media sources and d
324. na orte ott oco a 172 Printer image cea etie ead ee eei ek eed dee aede ees ee 172 HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features oooooooccccccnccccccccccononnonconononcnnnnnnnnnannnnos 173 Access to print drivers in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me ssssssssssss 173 PS 3 emulation support for the HP LaserJet P3005 sssssssssssssee 174 nI VICI Em 174 Whats this Help 2 5 caidas lads ce 174 Context sensitive Help sssssssssssssssssseee enne 174 Paper t b features osten hebetes ciet i e e eet 174 Paper SZO RI ELTE 176 Ky m U 176 Orientation ossium d E ML ELA E 177 Paper Sou Ce EAE ld tia tteend Gdns ete 177 COPIES TERRE 177 Unprintable Area eene oed vetere retreat Eds 178 More ODLIOTIS nr ee fee rte eta i eo RT ep tt a tere ea tee eas 178 ABOUT 2 iint a beet tue oe don ab e em rob deese ine dert ee Mas 179 Restore Defaults cio ete Uer eee d e ARTE RETRO d1n 179 Graphics tab features sss nete hn nennen nennen rrertrr sensn nnns 179 Resol ON M m 180 Halo a e a a 181 A te do 181 o EET 181 Restore Defaults 12 oderit tiesestt ue etit reete t A oett edes 181 Fonts tab T at tes zrnate aiite Gerne ie rtp E e edulis 181 Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table 182 Font Substitution Table ooononinnnnnncconocccnnnccnccnnnnnonannnnnnnnn
325. nd names of the driver tabs can vary depending on the operating system These driver settings apply only while that software program is open Print driver user interface Control the drivers directly from the Printers folder for access to two sets of driver tabs the Printing Preferences tabs and the Properties tabs The settings on the Printing Preferences drivertabs control the driver default settings for each user s profile Configure installable options on the Properties driver tabs Printing Preferences driver tabs The Printing Preferences driver tabs change the default settings that are used across all software programs To gain access to these tabs follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Printing Preferences ENWW Access to print drivers in Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 201 BS e E o e E ou ac 0 gt fe o S The following Printing Preferences print driver tabs are available e Advanced e Paper Quality e Effects e Finishing e Job Storage e Services All of these tabs are device specific The Job Storage tab is available only when the Job Storage setting is Enabled on the Device Settings tab in the Properties driver tabs Click Apply on
326. ng figure shows an Incompatible Print Settings message Help system 203 BS e E 9 it e ou ac gt fe o S Incompatible Print Settings There are one or more conflicting settings One of the conflicting settings is Print On Both Sides Flip on Long Edge Standard User Defined Size Transparency Resolve all conflicts for me automatically O I will resolve the conflict myself Figure 5 1 An Incompatible Print Settings message To accept the change that was just made select the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically option and then click OK The driver resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value To accept the change that was just made and return to the driver settings to resolve the conflict click I will resolve the conflict myself and then click OK E NOTE In this example the conflict can be resolved manually If the conflict is not resolved when the driver is closed then the same dialog appears again when a print job is sent to the device 204 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Advanced tab features To gain access to the Advanced tab follow these steps ENWW 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click Start Select Settings Click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home
327. ng for Letter size media use a larger than letter size media select the Edge to Edge Printing option and trim the margin so that the printed image extends to the edge of the page 130 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Effects tab features To gain access to the Effects tab in Windows 98 SE or Windows Me follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Properties 6 Click the Effects tab Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks The following figure shows the Effects tab HP Creet P3005 PCL6 Propertii 8 dob Storage Default Print Settings De Erst Page nly T 22 co O o c c f ee UO oe 5y Lo gt i O Figure 4 8 Effects tab ENWW Effects tab features 131 The Effects tab contains the following controls e Print Task Quick Sets e Fit To Page e Document preview image e Watermarks Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Properties driver tabs Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by the administrator or user defined printing specifications such as media size and pages per sheet Fit To Page The Fit To Page group box contains the following controls e Print Document On e Scale to Fit e of Normal Size Print Document On Use Prin
328. ng job storage features when printing To use job storage features when printing follow these steps 1 Click File and then click Print from the software program The Print dialog box appears ES NOTE Clicking the print icon in the software program toolbar prints the job without using job storage features 2 Click Properties The Properties dialog box appears 3 Click the Job Storage tab 4 Select the job storage options by clicking the appropriate option button and then complete any required fields 5 Click OK Releasing a job storage print job After you send a print job that uses the job storage feature you can release the job to print from the device control panel 1 Press theMenu button to open the menus 2 Press A the up arrow or V the down arrow until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device control panel and then press v select 3 Press A up or V down to scroll to your user name and then press v select 4 Press A up or V down to scroll to the job name and then press v select 5 Press A up or V down until PRINT is highlighted on the device control panel and then press v select 6 Press y select 7 faPIN number is assigned to the job press A up or V down to select the first digit of the PIN and then press v select The number in the device control panel display changes to an asterisk Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number
329. nge the media size select a tray and then choose a different media size in the Default Media Size drop down menu 4 Click Apply Now to save the settings Lock Resources Select Lock Resources to lock certain features of the HP LaserJet P3005 printer The Lock Resources screen is shown in the following figure HP Printer Utility Lock Resources HP Support Manage resources by changing control panel and storage units access Click the checkbox to lock or unlock a mass storage unit 3y Duplex Mode Lock Mass storage Units Economode amp F3 7 66 Toner Density LJ Hewlett Packard Dynamic RAM Disk Ww Resolution B Trays Configuration fami Lock Resources jr Stored Jobs pp ly Printer Settings Control Panel Access Level No Locking HJ 4 E mail Alerts n Initialize selected mass storage unit I v a e Printer Name NPI937F3D Printer Status Idle AMAN Model Name HP Laserjet P3005 Supplies Genuine HP dint in ota Figure 6 45 Lock Resources screen In Control Panel Access Level choose one of the following settings e No Locking provides full control of the device e Minimal Locking provides control over paper handling features e Moderate Locking blocks changes in the device configuration e Maximal Locking prevents users from changing device control panel settings In the lower pane select the Lock check box for the mass storage unit that you
330. ngs 3 Click Printers 4 Right click the device name 174 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW 5 Click Properties 6 Click the Paper tab The Paper tab controls media and finishing options for the HP PS Emulation Driver The following figure shows the Paper tab HP LaserJet P3005 PS Properties n Statement Executive P Idotateu AutoSelect Tray 5 SUIS TOIT i gk cem sc e Orientation o Figure 4 25 Paper tab O P dE The Paper tab contains the following controls N os e Paper size 5 RI o e Layout Eu i Ly l2 i D e Paper source e Copies e Unprintable Area e More Options e About ENWW HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 175 e Restore Defaults Paper size Layout The Paper size selection area lists the paper or envelope sizes that the HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of supported media sizes forms and then click the icon to specify the media that you want A red circle with a line through any of the paper icons means that paper size is available but you must change a driver setting before you can print on that media size The setting might be on the Paper tab such as the Paper source setting or it might be a setting on the device control panel Clicking Custom page 1 Custom page 2 or Custom page 3 makes the Custom button available at the bottom of the Pa
331. nical parts in the print cartridge If print quality begins to degrade under these circumstances install a new print cartridge even if toner remains in the cartridge ET NOTE The EconoMode setting might work only if a genuine HP print cartridge is installed HP print cartridges can measure the life of the mechanical parts and the quantity of toner If the EconoMode setting is used frequently the mechanical parts can wear out before the supply of toner is depleted increasing the risk of toner leaking Use genuine HP parts to avoid this problem The EconoMode option can be activated from the printer control panel from the Print Quality tab in the software program properties or from the Print Quality dialog box on the Paper Quality tab in the driver If the EconoMode option is selected from the control panel and if the printer has a genuine HP cartridge the ON setting overrides any setting made in the program or driver as shown in the following table Driver EconoMode setting HP Cartridge Device control panel EconoMode setting takes for print job reports effect Selected Yes On Yes Selected No Off No Not selected Yes On Yes Not selected No Off No Selected Yes Off Yes Selected No Off No Not selected Yes Off No Not selected No Off No 228 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Effects tab features To gain access to the Effects tab follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Se
332. nnnnnnnnnnnnns 182 Always use built in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts 183 Always use TrueType fonts ssssssssseenne eee 183 Send FoOntS AS wien iie eh wie ta qe tie erase tete 183 Festore Defaults 2 2 dre etit ep cie tidad 185 Device Options tab features sssssssssssssssseeeee e e em eene nennen 185 Available printer memorty iniit ente titio a EAE ERA 187 Printer features 0 eren Ete A Ct AME DE 187 FastRes 1200 emat ttp Reiten tenete 188 Bree lE ES 188 ENWW vii PIN digit 1 for Private Job oooocoononnccnnncnnccconccccccanananana m 188 PIN digit 2 for Private Job sseH 188 PIN digit 3 for Private Job sm 188 PIN digit 4 for Private Job seeem 188 HPPJLEEricodirig retinere trono Leiden bo daten ts 188 EconoMode eee 188 Job storage iret nature a E ee E REAL e HR Led 188 eric 190 glad m 190 Pint Quali dT 190 Watermark dS ET 191 Watermark Pages per Sheet sses 191 Watermark A 191 Watermark SIZE aviacion il ere de Norge Raid Od xe RERO dua 192 Watermark Angle sessseenm emen 192 Watermark Style eei cerato iter eee en Eee 192 Watermark Intensity sssssese mem 192 Print Watermark ree rrr ira 192 Installable options
333. nt Task Quick Sets for their own use A maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets can be stored on a particular system If you attempt to save more a message box appears that contains the following message There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined Please delete some before adding new ones 7 Ll co TO a S cy O me oe 50 0 o r2 Lo The following settings are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop down menu e Default Print Settings e User Guide Print Settings Default Print Settings When you select Default Print Settings nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed the original settings However if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions custom media sizes or the other quick sets have been changed or deleted the original settings for those items are not restored ENWW Finishing tab features 115 The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets See HP Driver Preconfiguration on page 31 for information about preconfigurable driver settings Table 4 1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Driver feature Feature setting location U S English Print Task Quick Sets for Default values Preconfigurable Print on Both Sides Finishing tab Document Options group box Available not Yes sele
334. nt Windows 98 Windows 2000 XP Macintosh SE Me Server 2003 HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide CHM file x x HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide PDF file x x x Hewlett Packard LaserJet P3005 Series Printing System Install x x Notes HP LaserJet documentation 15 Table 1 8 Document availability continued Document Windows 98 Windows 2000 XP Macintosh SE Me Server 2003 HP Embedded Web Server User Guide x x x HP Jetdirect Administrator s Guide x x x Access to HP LaserJet documents depends on the type of document and its location e Some documents can be opened from the CD Browser e Some documents appear on the software CD and can be opened by navigating to the folder where they reside e Some documents are available on the Web through links in the CD Browser or CD folders Documents are available in the following file formats e Portable document Format PDF The HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD includes Adobe Acrobat Reader for viewing online documentation e Compiled HTML CHM When you click a documentation link to a CHM document a Microsoft HTML Viewer opens the file on the computer screen e Hypertext markup HTM When you click a documentation link to an HTM document a Web browser opens the file on the computer screen The following documents are available e HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide e Hewlett Packard LaserJet P3005 Series Printing System Install Notes e HP Embedded Web Server User
335. ntLog gt S Current Engine Cycles 0 Printer Sor al Number IS Number of Entries in Use 7 Maximum Number of Entries 50 Number Dale and Time Engine C Event Description or Personali 7 2006 Jan04 12022M 0 68 9129 6 2006Jan806 18 M 0 494002 Printer Error 5 2005Jan 1805 164AM 0 68 3400 4 2006 Jan 1806 18AM 0 68 8001 68 STORAGE ERROR SETTINGS CHANGED a 2005 Jan 18 0606 AM o 494002 Printer Eror 2 1907 Jan01 1204 AM 385 000007 Printer Error 1 1904 Jan 01 1207 AM R 000004 Printer Error Figure 6 56 HP EWS Event Log screen ENWW HP Embedded Web Server EWS 325 Usage Page The Usage Page screen gives a page count for each size of media that has passed through the product as well as the number of duplexed pages The total is calculated by multiplying the sum of the print count values by the Units value The information on this screen can be used to determine how much toner or paper to keep on hand The Usage Page is shown in the following figures HP LaserJet P3005 Printers Usage Page Printer Serial Number 3000000000 Printer Name HP LaserJet P3005 F Configuratio E PANIER SMPLEX SEIPLEX DUPLEX DUPLEX 1 MAGE Otter Laks LETTE ae ur e ul M uc mp m LEGAL 0 13 a 26 on o Product Support M 0 10 0 20 00 0 Show Me How EXECUTIVE 0 08 e ss oo ENVELOPE 410 0 04 e oo an ENVELOPE MONARCH n na nn ENVELOPE C5 D 06 oo s ENVELOPE OL 0 04 s oo BSS 0 07 e a 00 ENV
336. nter as your default printer select the Use the printer as the default printer for Windows based programs check box Click OK to return to the Ready to Install dialog box or click the Sharing tab to share the printer over a network 80 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW Printer Properties General Sharing Indicate whether your computer will offer this printer as a shared resource For other network users C Not shared Shared as HP LaserJet 3005 Figure 3 25 Printer Properties Sharing tab On the Sharing tab Not Shared is the default setting If you click Shared as in the Sharing tab of the Printer Properties dialog box the text box becomes available Type the share name and then click Next The Ready to Install dialog box opens E 0 y z e po 2 ET NOTE To allow sharing across all operating systems the share name should not exceed 7 characters The share name is restricted to a maximum of 80 characters for a single page description language PDL or 72 characters for multiple PDLs In the Ready to Install dialog box click Next to begin the process of copying and installing the printing system software folders and files The Installing HP LaserJet P3005 dialog box is shown in the following figure ENWW Print driver installation instructions 81 i HP LaserJet P3005 Setup E Installing HP LaserJet P3005 DU y The program features you selected are being
337. nteraction This installation method is useful when you want to use the default selections that the custom installer provides or when you want to run the installation without being prompted You can perform the silent installation in two ways e Customized silent installer e Command line silent installer The response file can be renamed but it must be in the root directory of the custom installer package The name cannot contain spaces Spaces prevent the SETUP EXE file from passing to the custom installer package The end user cannot customize the command line silent installer It installs the printing system components that are included in the Full Installation The HP Device Installer Customization Wizard which provides the exact text for replacing entries in the RESPONSE INI file is available at the following Web site www hp com support ljp3005 104 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW Point and Print installation for Windows 98 SE Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 ENWW The following information helps you install a print driver by using the Microsoft Point and Print function when you cannot see the device on the network Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two step driver installation process The first step is to install a shared driver on a network print server The second step is to point to the print server from a network client so that the client can us
338. ntrols e Actual Size default e Print Document On setting e Scale to Fit option e of Normal Size setting Actual Size Actual Size is the default setting It prints the document without changing the document size Print Document On Click the Print Document On option to format the document for one media size and then print the document on a different media size with or without scaling the image to fit the new media size The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions e The of Normal Size value is not 100 e The Pages per Sheet value on the Finishing tab is not 1 When Print Document On is selected the drop down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print The list contains all of the standard media sizes that the selected media source supports and any custom sizes that have been created When Print Document On is selected Scale to Fit is automatically selected Clear this check box if you do not want the document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected media Scale to Fit ENWW The Scale to Fit option box specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target media size By default Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected If the setting is turned off then the document page images will not be scaled and are instead centered at full size on the target media If the document size is larger than the target media size then the document im
339. o Page Print Quality Watermark Watermark Pages per Sheet Watermark Font Watermark Size Watermark Angle Watermark Style Watermark Intensity Print Watermark HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 187 7 Ll co TO ot EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo FastRes 1200 User The FastRes 1200 setting contains the following options e On e Off This is the default setting The default value for this setting is System Name if available Additional values for this setting include numbers 1 through 20 PIN digit 1 for Private Job The default value for the PIN digit 1 for Private Job setting is 0 PIN digit 2 for Private Job The default value for the PIN digit 2 for Private Job setting is 0 PIN digit 3 for Private Job The default value for the PIN digit 3 for Private Job setting is 0 PIN digit 4 for Private Job The default value for the PIN digit 4 for Private Job setting is 0 HPPJLEncoding The HPPJLEncoding feature contains the control for the UTF8 feature EconoMode The EconoMode feature contains the following options e False default e True Selecting this option extends the life of the toner supply and reduces cost per page However it also reduces print quality The printed image is lighter but it is adequate for printing drafts or proofs HP does not recommend the full time use of EconoMode If EconoMode is used full t
340. ob To use the Stored Job option a hard disk must be installed and Job Storage must be enabled Use the Stored Job option to send a print job directly to the device hard disk without printing it The print job is stored in the device as if it is an electronic file cabinet After the print job is stored on the device hard disk you can print the job at the device control panel The job remains stored in the device until it is deleted Stored jobs remain on the device hard disk when the device is turned off Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents A stored job can be managed in two ways as either a private or a public job Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the device which can then be printed only after you type a PIN at the device control panel You can set the PIN in the PIN group box After the job is printed the job remains in the device and can be printed again at the device control panel The private mode is initiated by selecting the Require PIN to Print check box In this mode a PIN that is typed at the device control panel is required in order to release the job The box labeled PIN is usually inactive The Require PIN to Print option becomes available when you select Stored Job If you select the Require PIN to Print box you must type a PIN to make the stored job private 156 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW PIN ET NOTE A private stored job is not the sa
341. oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo 8 9 Press A up or Y down to select the number of copies to print Press select to print the job Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the device memory You can do this from the device control panel 1 2 Collate Press theMenu button to open the menus Press A the up arrow or V the down arrow until RETRIEVE JOB is highlighted on the device control panel and then press v select Press A up or V down to scroll to your user name and then press v select Press A up or V down to scroll to the job name and then press v select Press A up or V down until DELETE is highlighted on the device control panel and then press v select Press v select If a PIN number is assigned to the job press A up or V down to select the first digit of the PIN and then press v select The number in the device control panel display changes to an asterisk Repeat this step for each of the remaining three digits of the PIN number If no PIN number is assigned to the job continue with the next step Press select to delete the job The Collate feature contains the following options Fit to Page On turn off in application Off The Fit to Page feature contains the following options Print Quality Prompt User for correct size default Nearest Size and Scale Nearest Size and Crop Letter A4 The Print Quality drop down menu contains
342. ol Click Tagged Binary Communications Protocol to send all data except special control characters in binary 8 bit format The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format e Pure binary data Click Pure binary data to send all data except special control characters in binary 8 bit format The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format Send CTRL D before job This control specifies whether the device is reset at the beginning of every postscript document The default setting is off unselected Pressing Ctrl D resets the device to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job Using Ctrl D might cause a print job to fail if the device is connected through a network If the document fails to print when sent to a device that is connected through parallel or serial ports select the Send CTRL D before job check box Send CTRL D after job This control specifies whether the device is reset at the end of every postscript document The default setting is off unselected Ctrl D resets the device to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job Ctrl D might cause a print job to fail if the device is connected through a network If the document fails to print when sent to a network device click to select the
343. on see E mail Server on page 330 2 Select the Enable AutoSend check box 3 Click an option to specify the interval at which you want the product to send the product configuration and supplies usage information to the e mail recipients determined in the next step and then type the number of days weeks months or pages printed 4 Configure up to 20 destinations using the format that appears on the screen 5 To send device configuration and supplies status information to HP select the Send to HP check box 6 Click Apply Security The Security screen is shown in the following figure ENWW HP Embedded Web Server EWS 333 0 10 48 HP LaserJet P3005 Printers A security password can be set to prevent unauthorized users rom remotely configuring the printer or gaining access to functionality reserved for the network administrator Username admin New Password Verify Password v PrintPage Display On Device Status Page bn instant support Ll Cancel Jah Order Supplise Product Support E PauselResume Show Me How Y Continue Button Direct Ports USB IEEE 1254 Disabling these ports will allow users to print only through a network connection CI Disahle Direct Ports Note The device will automatically turn off then on after this setting is applied Figure 6 65 HP EWS Security screen Edit Other Links Use the Edit Other Links screen to add or customize up to five links to the Web s
344. on group box click Update Now O eoo cmo m S ge Click OK to save the setting HP Driver Preconfiguration ENWW HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP printing system software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments Using HP Driver Preconfiguration information technology IT administrators in corporate and enterprise environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment MS Windows driver configuration 31 c fe E Q O 7 7 Lo o ix 5 e o HP Driver Preconfiguration is most beneficial when configuring print drivers for multiple workstations or print servers for print queues that share the same configuration Two types of features can be configured e Device settings e Printing preferences settings The driver is configured to match the device hardware so that access to all of the device accessories through the driver is enabled correctly for example for duplexing units and additional input trays Most driver feature settings can also be configured HP Driver Preconfiguration configures the driver to match the accessories that are installed on the device or to match the settings that IT administrators make in the configuration CFG file for example optional trays total amount of memory or job storage settings The preconfigurat
345. onfigured remotely HP Embedded Web Server 41 c fe 5 Q T O 7 Q Lo o ix 5 e o h HPLa ca HP LaserJet P3005 Printers invent Intormation Contpers Device Configure Device ee You may configure your device by selecting a configuration menu from the navigation tree below Once you have selected a configuration menu you may contigure its settings at the bottom of the page Select A Menu Bg SHOWME HOW Ie INFORMATION E PAPEH HANDLING CONFIGURE DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS E 8 Figure 2 4 HP EWS Settings tab Configure Device screen Alerts The device can automatically send e mail alerts about printing problems or job status to specified e mail addresses For example if toner is low the device can notify the person who is responsible for ordering or changing the print cartridge If a device failure occurs the device can send an e mail alert directly to the person who is responsible for fixing the problem These e mail alerts can be configured to be sent to any device that can accept e mail such as digital phones pagers and personal digital assistants PDAs In large environments administrators can route e mail addresses to list servers or uniform resource locators URLs for expanded notification 42 Chapter2 Software description ENWW ENWW UJ invenr Information Type a name for your destination list Type a maximum of 2U alert destinations in any ot the
346. ontrol and then click What s this A pop up Help window appears e Click the button in the upper right corner of the frame next to the X to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark When you use this special cursor to select a control the pop up Help window for that feature appears e Pressthe F1 key and the Help window for the currently selected control appears Context sensitive Help When you click the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box a context sensitive Help message appears Incompatible Print Settings messages ENWW Incompatible Print Settings constraint messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific actions These messages appear in response to selections that are illogical or impossible given the device capabilities or the current settings of other controls ET NOTE Constraint messages are limited and the underlying software architecture might accept some settings that are illogical or impossible for the device to perform Sending a job with incompatible settings can lead to unexpected results If print jobs do not print as expected check the device documentation to ensure that the device has the expected capabilities In Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 operating environments some technically invalid print driver configurations result in warning messages Duplexing for example is not possible when the Transparency media type is selected The followi
347. op down menu or from a device image hot spot is highlighted on the printer image The following points are worth noting 7 23 co OO ot EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo e The Automatically Select setting in the Source is drop down menu does not have a corresponding area to highlight in the device image Selecting other settings in this menu highlights the corresponding part in the printer image e Selecting the area that represents a tray in the image always selects the corresponding tray in the Source is option Manual Feed in Tray 1 which is available from the Source is drop down menu cannot be selected by selecting the image e On the Paper tab only source trays have device image hot spots and can be highlighted ENWW Paper tab features 151 Job Storage tab features To gain access to the Job Storage tab follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Properties 6 Click the Job Storage tab ET NOTE The Job Storage tab appears only when at least 80 MB of total memory is installed and configured or an optional hard disk is installed Use the job storage features to store print jobs in the HP LaserJet P3005 printer memory for printing at a later time These job storage features are described in the following sections The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if the job storage feature is enabled To support job storage fe
348. op edge of the document is the shorter edge of the media e Landscape The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the media e Rotate by 180 degrees This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180 This setting is useful for printing prepunched media Toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image Selecting the Rotate by 180 degrees check box does not change the document preview image Finishing tab features 245 m e uem 0 y os zo ED ssc ss Qa E Job Storage tab features To gain access to the Job Storage tab follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Printing Preferences 6 Click the Job Storage tab ET NOTE The Job Storage tab appears only when atleast 80 MB of total memory is installed and configured Use the job storage feature to store print jobs in the HP LaserJet P3005 printer memory for printing at a later time These job storage features are described in the following sections The Job Storage tab appears among the driver tabs only if job storage feature is enabled To support job storage features for complex jobs or if you often print complex graphics print postscript PS documents or use many downlo
349. or any dialog box where it appears to return to a previous dialog box The specific dialog box depends on your previous selections To cancel the installation click Cancel on this or any other dialog box where it appears see Help Back Next and Cancel buttons on page 57 Read the software license agreement select agree and then click Next The Language dialog box appears HP Installer Customization Utility Language Select the language for your customized installer Language English v E 0 V z e xe Figure 3 34 Language dialog box ET NOTE The customized installer limits all system installations of the device to the language that is selected in the Language dialog box Maintenance mode on systems where installation has been completed by using the customized installer does not provide options for changing the language To change the language on a system that used an Installer Customization Wizard installation the customized installation must be uninstalled and a new device must be installed in order to restore the option to install other languages The language that you select is installed on user computers regardless of the language of the text in the dialog boxes as specified in the Language Selection dialog box earlier The Language dialog box defaults to the language that was selected in the Language Selection dialog box but any language that is available on the software CD can be s
350. ot printing clearly e Print All Text as Black The Print All Text as Black feature is Disabled by default When Enabled is selected the driver prints all text as black regardless of the original document text color Color text is printed as black except for white text which remains white White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background This setting does not affect graphic images on the page nor does it affect any text that is part of a graphic ET NOTE The Send TrueType as Bitmap option is available only in the HP PCL 6 and HP PCL 5 unidrivers It is not available in the PS Emulation Unidriver Send True Type as Bitmap provides an alternative for software programs that have trouble using TrueType fonts for special graphic aspects such as shading rotation or slanting The setting is Disabled by default The TrueType fonts are converted to bitmap soft fonts before downloading The Enabled setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines which retains the standard format outline of the fonts e Graphics Mode ET NOTE The Graphics Mode option is available only in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver It is not available in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver Advanced tab features 209 e um i 9 ae e E ou am gt fe Oo S Use the Graphics Mode feature to select one of the following settings e Send Graphics
351. ou have more than one driver installed on your device for example the default HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver the Update Now feature works automatically only on the driver on which it is activated The other driver will not be updated and might show the default setting for your device model Printer image The bitmap image in the lower right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical configuration of the device according to the driver configuration data It should have the same appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper tab ET NOTE The device image shown on the Configure tab might differ from the HP LaserJet P3005 printer depending on the accessories that are installed 172 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features When you install the printing system software in Windows 98 SE or Windows Me the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default The HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver and the HP Traditional postscript level 3 emulation Driver PS Emulation Driver can be installed by performing a Custom Installation This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the PS Emulation Driver Properties interface It also shows the tabs that are available on the PS Emulation Driver interface for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me Access to print drivers in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me
352. ount specifies the number of copies to print This driver setting is useful for software programs that do not provide a copy count If a copy count is available in the software program set the copy count in the software program The requested number of copies appears in the Copy Count option Select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999 The copies value will not advance from the maximum number 9999 to 1 when the up arrow is used or change from 1 to the maximum number 9999 when the down arrow is used When you click another group box or leave the Advanced tab invalid entries into the edit box such as non numerical input numbers less than 1 or numbers greater than the maximum allowed are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box The default number of copies is 1 Because the number of copies can be set in some software programs conflicts between the software program and the driver can arise In most cases the software program and the driver communicate so that the number of copies set in one location such as the software program appears in the other such as the driver For some software programs this communication does not take place and the copies values are treated independently For example setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies 10 x 10 being printed Set t
353. owser opens and the Device Status screen appears In the Print amp Fax screen select the HP LaserJet P3005 click the Print Queue button then click Utility Using a Web browser 320 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW ENWW ET NOTE This method can only be used if the device is using a network connection 1 On the device control panel print a configuration page To print a configuration page follow these instructions a Press theMenu button to open the menus b Press A the up arrow or V the down arrow to scroll to INFORMATION and then press w select c Press A up or V down to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION d Press v select to print the configuration pages 2 On the first configuration page under Product Settings find the IP Address Type this address into a Web browser such as Safari The Device Status screen appears Using the HP Device Configuration application 1 In the Applications folder open the HP EWS Device Configuration folder Run the HP Device Configuration application 2 Choose the HP LaserJet P3005 from the list of devices The Web browser opens and the Device Status screen appears e Pause Resume o Continue Toners remaining Black Cartridge 100 O7S51A InputOutput Status Capacity size type Tray 1 L Empty 100 Sheets AN Y SIZE ANY TYPE Iray2 lI OK 5UU Sheets LETIEH PLAIN STANDAND TOP DIN l om N A NIA Change Settings Capabilities Printer Ser
354. ox sss eene nnns 62 Printer Connection dialog DOX 2 n deer tdt eer lite da uUa ua a c du 63 Firewall Detected dialog DOX ccccessscecesessseneeesnesseneeeseneaseceecnaseceeeesensaaeeeceneneneedentesenedesennasecees 64 Searching dialog DOX ias tits 65 Printer Not Found dialog DOX miii laca 66 Printers Found dialog DOX edendo dn eda A Rd a d ned dS 67 Printer Found dialog box ssssssesssneneeeeeenen nnne enne nennen e nennen nenne enne 68 Confirm Network Settings dialog box ooonooccccconnnocccccnononccccccnnnonncccnnnnnnnnccnnn nan emere enne nen 69 Confirm Changing Setting dialog box 0oooooconnnncccccnnnnncoccccncnnnonnncn nn eter nono nene nnne 70 Check Printer Connection dialog box sssessssse eene eene nennen nnns 71 Specify Printer dialog box oooooooccccnnnnoccccccnnnnconncnccnnnrnnncccnnnn eene nenne nennen nnne nenne nennen 72 Printer Settings dialog DOX 3 rrr deri Fee pet d e E e o EO ERA eek dpa ntn DUE cH 73 Set Port Name dialog BOX dL 74 Change TCP IP Settings dialog box oooooococnnnnccccoconnnononaconcnononnnnn conc n non nn cnn nn arc ener nennen nennen 75 Model dialog DOX qe ta 76 Installation Type dialog box oooooccccconococccccnonononccccononannn nc cono nan nc nnnm nennen rn cnn nnn rrr nnn rennes 76 Drivers dialog DOK sesaran e Bir e Er a Re Bir Rep REED po ltda 77 Driver Details dialog DOK ae ocio O Rey HEU exea
355. pdpc_sw 2 Not supported in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me User Guide Print Settings The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide m e uem 0 y os zo ED ssc ss Qa E ENWW Paper Quality tab features 215 When you select User Guide Print Settings all of the settings are restored to the default settings except for the following settings e On the Paper Quality tab Type Is is set to Unspecified e On the Finishing tab the Print on Both Sides check box is selected e On the Finishing tab Flip Pages Up check box is selected e OntheFinishing tab Pages per Sheet is set to 2 pages per sheet e Onthe Finishing tab Page Order is set to Right then Down Default Print Settings By default the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Default Print Settings To change any of the default settings on any of the Printing Preferences driver tabs and save the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set highlight the words Default Print Settings type the name for the new Print Task Quick Set and then click Save Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry To delete a Print Task Quick Set select it from the drop down menu and click Delete ET NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users These administrator Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users but usually cannot be modif
356. per Quality tab Paper Options group Unspecified Yes box Economode Paper Quality tab Print Quality dialog box Available unselected Yes Unlabeled group Job Storage tab Status message for No box example Your job will be printed but not stored on the printer Job Storage Mode Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode group Off is selected No box Proof and Hold Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode group Available notselected No box Private Job Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode group Available notselected No box Quick Copy Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode group Available notselected No box Stored Job Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode group Available notselected No box Require PIN to Print Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode group Unavailable not No box selected MS Windows User Job Storage tab User Name group box Unavailable selected No Name Windows User Name appears in field PIN to Print Job Storage tab Require PIN group box Unavailable not No selected Display Job ID when Job Storage tab Job Notification Options Unavailable selected No printing group box Job Name Job Storage tab Job Name group box Unavailable No Automatically selected SEC DICT CEPENCCIMCECWE INC AAA AA A C A A AA A i 1 These features can be preconfigured by using one of the HP driver preconfiguration tools For more information See HP Driver Preconfiguration on page 31 or go to www hp com go h
357. per tab Clicking Custom opens the Custom defined size dialog box that you can use to define a custom paper size The following figure shows the Custom defined size dialog box Custom Defined Size 2 x Paper name Custom page 1 3 Units i Width 2 00 E 3 00 12 28 5 inch Length 5 00 5 00 18 50 C Milimeters Transverse Cancel Restore Defaults Figure 4 26 Custom designed size dialog box The following controls appear on the Custom defined size dialog box e Paper name text box Use this option to type a name for this custom media size You can define up to three custom sizes at one time e Width spin box Use this control to specify the width for this custom media size e Length spin box Use this control to specify the length for this custom media size e Units group box Click Inches or Millimeters to specify the measurement unit for this custom media size e Transverse check box Clicking this check box rotates the document 90 when it is printed on a roll fed device Depending on the size of the printed page you might save media if you rotate the page when printing e Restore defaults button Click this button to restore the settings in the Custom defined size dialog box to their original values Use the settings in this group box to specify how many pages of the document print on a single sheet For example clicking 1 up prints one page of the document on each sheet Clicking 2 up prin
358. perties button appears 260 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW 8 Click Properties The HP Font Installer dialog box appears 9 Type the name and path of the font metric file in the Printer Font File Location text box or click Browse to locate the file on the computer The font file names appear in the Font s to be Added window 10 Select the fonts to add and then click Add The fonts are installed and the file names appear in the Installed Font s window 11 Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box Removing external fonts 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings e Click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home Right click the name of the device Click Properties Click the Device Settings tab Click the External Fonts option The Properties button appears on o Oo B Click Properties The HP Font Installer dialog box appears The external fonts that are installed appear in the Installed Fonts window 9 Select the fonts to remove and then click Remove The fonts are removed 10 Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings The following controls are available and appear only in the PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab e Available PostScript Memory e Output Protocol e Send Ctrl D Before Each
359. providers This feature establishes a relationship with Hewlett Packard Company or another service provider to provide you with services that include but are not limited to print cartridge replacement pay per page contracts support agreements and usage tracking A user can add up to twenty AutoSend destinations The AutoSend screen is shown in the following figure 332 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW Ua invent _ Information Y The AutoSend feature enables your product to periodicaily send configuration and supplies usage Information to a list of destinations Enable the Send to HP feature if you have a relationship with Hewlett Packard that provides you services such as pmactive cartridge replacement pay per page contracts support agreements or usage tracking Note To use AuloSend you must first configure your E mail Serve O Enable AutoSend Sendevery 500 O days 1 28 O weeks 1 4 monte 1 6 pages printed 5020000 Type a maximum of 20 e mail destirabons e g your rrame your company com below Sepaute e mail destinations using a semi colon ora comma E Mail destinations Test E Send HP Hewett Packard Online Privacy Statement Figure 6 64 HP EWS AutoSend screen Turn on the AutoSend feature Use the following procedure to make the AutoSend feature available 1 Make outgoing e mail functions available by following the instructions that are listed in this chapter For more informati
360. ptional Width 148 0 mm 5 83 inches 297 mm 11 7 inches Height 210 mm 8 26 inches 432 mm 17 inches Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Table 4 5 PCL 6 custom media sizes continued Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum Duplexing unit Width 148 0 mm 5 83 inches 297 mm 11 7 inches Height 210 0 mm 8 26 inches 432 mm 17 inches Dynamic measurement units Use the dynamic measurement units button to toggle the unit of measurement between standard inches and metric millimeters units of measurement The label on this button is dynamic depending on the measurement units that are in use If the custom size currently shows the measurements in inches the button is labeled Use Millimeters If the custom size currently shows the measurements in millimeters the button is labeled Use Inches Click the button to switch measurement unit types Close When you click the Close button the Custom Paper Size dialog box closes according to the logic in the following table In all cases any custom media sizes that are successfully saved and not renamed or deleted while the dialog box is open remains in the Size is drop down menu on the Paper tab The following table lists options that appear when you click the Close button Table 4 6 Close dialog box text strings If the drop down menu contains And the button says Then this happens when you click the Close button Untitled Save The dialog box closes b
361. r 2003 HP Traditional Yes Yes N A N A N A PCL 6 Driver HP Traditional Yes Yes N A N A N A PCL 5 Driver PS Emulation No No N A N A N A Driver HP PCL 6 N A N A Yes Yes Yes Unidriver MS Windows driver configuration 33 c fe 5 Q O 7 Y Le v fas 5 e o Table 2 5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration continued Driver Windows 98 SE Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 HP PCL 5 N A N A Yes Yes Yes Unidriver PS Emulation N A N A Yes Yes Yes Unidriver 1 N A Not applicable the driver is not supported in this operating system 34 Chapter2 Software description HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool Use the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool a Web based diagnostic software program to determine whether the correct and most current print driver for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is in use Two methods are available to gain access to the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool 1 Open a Web browser 2 Goto the following Web site www hp com go drivercheck Alternatively 1 Open an Internet browser 2 Go to the HP Business Support Center BSC at the following Web site www hp com go bsc 3 Click the self help resources link on the left navigation bar c fe 5 Q O 7 Y Lo v fas 5 e o 4 Click automatic driver checker to run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool When the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Ch
362. r FTP sites in your Web browser In Microsoft Internet Explorer use the following procedure to enable the folder view a Select Tools then select Internet Options and then select the Advanced tab b Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites c Click OK to save the setting 6 The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device This can take several minutes Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel ENWW Remote firmware updates 353 ET NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update this can happen more than once At the end of the update process the READY message appears on the control panel Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connection If the HP LaserJet P3005 uses a direct network connection use file transfer protocol FTP to update the firmware Complete the following steps 1 o gt d u9 S Make note of the TCP IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout To print a configuration page see Print
363. r Macintosh is composed of an HP created postscript printer definition file PPD and a printer dialog extension PDE file that work together with the Macintosh OS print system These files are used by the Macintosh OS print system to determine default print settings and to allow the user to select between the various print options and settings These files are installed by the provided HP LaserJet Installer Additionally an HP supplied Macintosh device configuration utility is provided which allows the user to access the device embedded Web server EWS for additional configuration and device status monitoring The following are provided on the installation CD e The HP LaserJet Installer for Macintosh e Install notes Readme file located in the PDF folder The following major components are installed by the HP LaserJet Installer for Mac e HP LaserJet P3005 PPD e HP LaserJet P3005 PDE e HPUSB EWS Gateway e HP Device Configuration Utility e HP Uninstaller for the HP Device Configuration Utility and HP USB EWS Gateway Topics e Hardware requirements e Operating system support e Availability Hardware requirements e PowerPC G3 G4 G5 or Intel Core processor e 256 MB RAM e 32 MB of available hard disk space o CD ROM drive or internet connection Operating system support e MacOS X v10 2 8 v10 3 v10 4 and later are supported e MacOS 9 and Mac OS X classic are not supported Availability This STR provides information
364. raphic Settings The Graphics Settings group box in the HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver has settings for the graphics rendering mode The following Rendering Mode options are available e Automatic This is the default setting e Send Graphics as Vector Select this setting to send graphics to the printer as a combination of HP Graphics Language V2 HP GL 2 and raster images This setting might produce higher quality output e Send Graphics as Raster Select this setting to send all graphics to the printer as images composed of individual dots This setting might improve printing speed in some cases e Send Page as Raster Select this setting to send all graphics and text TrueType fonts to the printer as images composed of individual dots Use Send Page as Raster if you are experiencing problems with overlapping text and graphics With this setting the Send TrueType as Bitmaps option has no effect Font Settings In the Font Settings group box the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes such as shading rotation or slanting The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected clear by default If you select this option the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines which retains the standard format outlines of the fonts Output Settings The Output Settings group box contains the followin
365. ride any previous Size is settings in other Use Different Paper Covers options When you select Front Cover also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box to enable the setting The Source is and Type is drop down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Front Cover option The Source is setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front cover to the document The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here The Type is drop down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports ET NOTE Use the same size of media for the entire print job All Use Different Paper Covers options use the last Size is setting selected in any one of the Use Different Paper Covers options When you change the type and source of the media and covers the settings remain configured until you close the software program First Page Use the First Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the first page of a document The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when Use Different Paper Covers check box is selected 222 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Paper Options Size is q x 11 inches v ont Covel i Dther Pages Last Page Rack Cover l Source is Automatically Select v T
366. rinter information and configuration options by clicking the button below Ww Resolution EF Lock Resources i Stored Jobs AN ES E mail Alerts a Network Settings e Bonjour 5J Settings e Additional Settings Printer Name NPI937F3D Printer Status Idle i Model Name HP LaserJet P3005 Supplies Genuine HP Appl y Now Figure 6 51 Additional Settings screen To open the HP EWS click Open Embedded Web Server For information about HP EWS settings see HP Embedded Web Server on page 37 or consult the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide HP Embedded Web Server EWS HP EWS is embedded in the device firmware It is a series of Web pages that provide access to additional device status and configuration options Topics e Access to the HP EWS e Information tab e Settings tab e Networking tab Access to the HP EWS Use any one of the following methods to gain access to the HP EWS Using the Mac OS Print Center Printer Setup Utility or Print amp Fax screen 1 Inthe Applications folder open the Utilities folder and then run the Printer Setup Utility or the Print Center utility You can also access the HP EWS using the Print amp Fax pane of System Preferences from the Apple menu choose System Preferences then choose Print amp Fax 2 Select the HP LaserJet P3005 and then click Utility Mac OS X V10 3 or later The Web br
367. river driver should switch from downloading TrueType fonts as bitmap Type 3 fonts to downloading them as outline Type 1 fonts The most efficient threshold value varies depending on the printing resolution For example at 300 dpi downloading TrueType fonts as outlines becomes efficient when fonts are about 25 points or larger If this value is O outline Type 1 fonts are always sent e Favor system TrueType fonts over printer fonts that have the same name Use this option to specify whether to use system TrueType fonts instead of printer fonts when the same font is found on both the computer and the printer Printer fonts are the default 184 Chapter4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Using printer fonts can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be downloaded However the fonts in the printed document might not exactly match the fonts on the screen e Send PostScript fonts as Use this option to specify whether to download postscript fonts to the printer The following options are available e n Native Format Click this option to download the postscript font files to the device before the document prints e Don t Send If you click this option no fonts are downloaded This does not affect downloading of TrueType fonts Restore Defaults Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Fonts tab to their original values Device Options tab features To gain access to the Device Options tab
368. rmat ssssssssssssssseeeeeeemeeeertennnnn 337 Clock Drift Correctlon i rte ettet Per gets 337 Wake TME e erre ter Rete dis 338 Networking tab ote ette etur pane tnb eben 338 GOGU AU cd e cent diria e RAE e edad 339 ENWW SECUMILY SECUON mesi ni 340 Diaghostics Section ii 340 7 Engineering Details INTO UCM 341 File to E mail Utility vano OEO 342 Media attributes hte P e diia 344 Media sources and destinations ssssssssssenenneemeeeem nennen nnns 344 Mediassource COMMANGS s sucia td oett o erre ans 344 Driver supported media sizes oooooconccininiconoonconnncconccnnnnnncnncnnnnnnnnnr nen meer nennen 345 Driver supported media types cooccoconccoconooooncconoconcnocnnnnnnnnnn non nnnncnnnnnncnnnn nana mere trnn nnne 347 CUSTOM paper SIZES EE 348 Media type commands sse nennen nennen nnne nennen nnne nennen nns 349 Remote firmware Updates sti ii aia 350 Print a configuration page oooooocccccnnnnoccccccconcnnncnccnnanonnnncnnnnn o nn n rc naar ri nnne nennen enn 350 Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site sssssee 351 Downloading the new firmware to the device essssss een 351 Printer messages during the firmware update ssss enn 351 Remote firmware update by using FTP through a browser seseeene 353 Remote firmware update by using FTP on a direct network connec
369. rol panel display If you Job Storage tab features 157 7 Ll co O a S EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo try to type a character in an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters the character is removed from the edit field along with all of the characters that follow it If you try to type more than 16 characters any character beyond 16 is truncated When the dialog box is closed or as soon as the focus is removed from the control that is when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected an empty string is replaced with Automatic The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the device control panel display If Job Name Exists When you store a print job you can create a print job name or the device software can assign one automatically If a print job with the same name already exists the new print job will overwrite the existing print job To eliminate the chances of a new print job overwriting an old print job because both have the same name select Use Job Name 1 999 After you create the print job name or when one is created automatically the device software assigns a number between 1 and 999 to the end of the print job name to make the name unique Select Replace Existing File if you always want the device software to overwrite an existing print job with the same print job name Usi
370. ronenanos 56 Install from the printing system CD seme 56 Install from a network or from downloaded files occccoooocnnocconocnnonons 57 Detailed MS Windows install instructions cooonccnccoconncncnconnnononononcnnnnononnonenoninnnnonnnonnos 57 Help Back Next and Cancel buttons ccccccccoccncncnnnonoconononcnnnnnnnononononenenicinons 57 Modify a pre existing installation seem 58 Direct connect installation through a USB or parallel port 59 Basic Full and Custom Installation dialog box sequence 59 Install print drivers by using Add Printer ssm 85 Installer Customization Wizard for Windows cesse 86 Run the Installer Customization Wizard eeeeseeeee 87 Bids 87 DISTTIDUtION ETE TEMA 104 Point and Print installation for Windows 98 SE Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 cccccceesececeeceseeeeeeceeseeeeeaeaeeenes 105 Set a default printer ssssssssssssssssssesssessseee nee enne eene rennes 106 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows iv ENWW INTOAUCION A a a ance te EET 107 Access to print drivers in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me ooooocccccccccccccccccncnnnonnnonnonnnnnnnnnnonncnnnnos 109 Devi ce ntrolpanel sinini arre A dde eese ede ue add 109 Soft
371. rop down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option ET NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Printing Layout setting is enabled on the Finishing tab The back cover setting is unavailable because this page would be printed in the middle of a booklet The Source is setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here The Type is drop down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports Document preview image The document preview image is a line drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text The document preview image appears in the upper right corner of the following Properties driver tabs e Finishing e Effects e Paper e Basics Device image The bitmap image in the lower right portion of the Paper tab represents the current physical configuration ofthe device and corresponds to its configuration data It should look the same as the image that appears in the same location on the Configure tab in the Printer Properties On the Paper tab the device image contains hot spots where you can select a media source When you use the mouse to move the pointer over a hot spot the arrow reverts to a gloved hand The current media source tray whether selected from the dr
372. rovides instructions for installing and uninstalling the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in Macintosh operating systems and for using Macintosh features Chapter 7 Engineering details This chapter contains information about the following special topics e File to E mail utility e Media attributes e Remote firmware update e Printing print ready documents For information about the location of information within chapters see the table of contents An index is provided in this STR Additional detailed information about the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software is published in an addendum to this STR The following information is available only in the addendum e Lists of installed files e System modification information such as changes to the registry and registry keys e Descriptions of known software issues and solutions Topics e Device features e Printing system software e HP LaserJet documentation 2 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW Device features The following table contains descriptions of the HP LaserJet P3005 printer features that are discussed in this STR Device configurations might vary among countries regions ENWW Table 1 2 HP LaserJet P3005 printer features Models Base model HP LaserJet P3005 printer part number Q7812A HP LaserJet P3005d part number Q7813A HP LaserJet P3005n printer part number Q7814A HP LaserJet P3005dn printer part number Q7815A HP LaserJet P3005x printer pa
373. rst Page Only Effects tab Watermark dialog box Unavailable Yes watermark Current Watermarks Effects tab Watermark Details dialog box none Yes Click Edit for Watermark Details Watermark Message Effects tab Watermark Details dialog box none Yes Click Edit for Watermark Details Message Angle Effects tab Watermark Details dialog box Diagonal Yes watermark Click Edit for Watermark Details 116 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Table 4 1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer continued Driver feature Feature setting location U S English Print Preconfigurable Task Quick Sets for Default values Watermark message Effects tab Watermark Details dialog box Unavailable unless Yes angle angle Click Edit for Watermark Details Angle option is selected 52 degrees Name watermark Effects tab Watermark Details dialog box Arial Yes font Font Attributes group box Color watermark Effects tab Watermark Details dialog box Gray Yes font Font Attributes group box Shading watermark Effects tab Watermark Details dialog box Very Light Yes font Font Attributes group box Size watermark font Effects tab Watermark Details dialog box 80 No Font Attributes group box Style watermark Effects tab Watermark Details dialog box Regular Yes font Font Attributes group box Use Different Paper Paper tab Paper
374. rt dialog box Select IP Address to make the field available for typing the TCP IP address for the device Only numerals are allowed in this field If this option is selected you must type at least one digit in the IP Address field to prevent an error message from appearing to prompt you for a valid IP address Select IP Hostname to make the field available for typing the IP hostname for the device Any characters are allowed in this field but an error message appears if spaces are included in the field If this option is selected you must type at least one character in the IP Hostname field to prevent an error message from appearing to prompt you for a valid IP hostname Select Hardware Address to make the field available for typing the hardware address for the device Any characters are allowed in this field but the entry is limited to 12 characters If this option is selected you must type at least one character in the Hardware Address field to prevent an error message from appearing to prompt you for a valid hardware address For each of the options in the Specify TCP IP Port dialog box you can either use the default port name as specified in one of the three option fields or you can specify a different port name Select Use Default and then click Next The Port Creation Options dialog box appears To specify a different name select one of the three port name identifying options select Specify type the device port name as select
375. rt number Q7816A Performance The HP LaserJet P3005 prints up to 35 pages per minute ppm for Letter sized media Prints up to 25 ppm for A4 sized media First page out in 10 seconds or less Sleep mode Wake time setting available Memory Standard base memory e 32MBforthe HP LaserJet P3005 printer expandable to 288 MB e 48 megabytes MB of memory for the HP LaserJet P3005d and printer expandable to 320 MB e 64MB for the HP LaserJet P3005n HP LaserJet P3005dn and the HP LaserJet P3005x printers expandable to 320 MB One open EIO slot on all HP LaserJet P3005 printer models The HP LaserJet P3005 printer uses 100 pin 133 MHz dual inline memory modules DIMMs that support 128 or 256 MB of random access memory RAM User interface Two line back lit graphical display on control panel Enhanced Help with animated graphics Embedded Web server to gain access to support and order supplies network connected printers Supported printer personalities Job storage features HP PCL 6 HP PCL 5e PostScript amp PS 3 emulation Portable document format PDF Job storage features include Device features 3 o Q fe o 7 Lo c o 2 O Q gt a Table 1 2 HP LaserJet P3005 printer features continued e Proof and hold e Private jobs e Personal identification number PIN printing Environmental features e Sleep mode setting e High content of recyclable componen
376. s Current Setting The Current Setting group box has two settings in the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver When you make a change in the Print Quality Details dialog box the setting changes to reflect the current print quality setting e This is the Best Quality setting e Thisis the Faster Printing setting e This is a Custom setting Font Settings In the Font Settings group box the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes such as shading rotation or slanting The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected clear by default If you select this option the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines which retains the standard format outlines of the fonts Output Settings The Output Settings group box contains the following controls and default settings e ProRes 1200 170 Ipi e ProRes 1200 141 Ipi e FastRes 1200 e 600 dpi e Resolution The options are e ProRes 1200 170 Ipi e ProRes 1200 141 Ipi default e FastRes 1200 This is the default setting e 600 dpi 7 Ll co O a S EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 Lo Ez NOTE When a ProRes setting is selected documents are printed using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 dpi This is the best print quality but printing speed is slower than for documents printed on a FastRes setting The
377. s Duplexing unit Width 148 0 mm 5 83 inches 297 mm 11 7 inches Height 210 0 mm 8 26 inches 432 mm 17 inches Media type commands o The PCL 5 escape sequence for paper type is Esc amp n Wdpapertype where n is the number of E characters in the paper type plus 1 For example in the sequence Esc amp n6WdPlain Plain has 5 letters a plus 1 for a total of 6 zi Table 7 6 Media type commands E 0 Esc amp n Wd Paper type E Esc amp 6 Wd Plain ui Esc amp 11 Wd Preprinted Esc amp 11 Wd Letterhead Esc amp 13 Wd Transparency Esc amp 11 Wd Prepunched Esc amp 7 Wd Labels Esc amp 5 Wd Bond Esc amp 9 Wd Recycled Esc amp 6 Wd Color Esc amp 6 Wd Light Esc amp 13 Wd Intermediate Esc amp 6 Wd Heavy Esc amp 11 Wd Cardstock Esc amp 6 Wd Rough Esc amp 12 Wd Tough Paper Esc amp 9 Wd Envelope You must spell out the word Transparency in the string although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the control panel The correct command for cardstock is Esc amp n11WdCard Stock with a space between the d and the S and with an uppercase S ENWW Media attributes 349 Remote firmware updates The HP LaserJet P3005 printer features remote firmware update RFU capability The method for downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to download the latest printing system software and print drivers The process for remotely up
378. s ta Additional Settings Apply Now Figure 6 47 E mail Alerts screen Click Open E mail Alerts Settings to open the HP EWS The HP EWS opens to the Alerts screen on the Settings tab where you can set notifications to manage the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Network Settings The Network Settings screen is available if the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is installed over a network connection It is not available when the device is installed over a USB connection FOO E HP Printer Utility gt ration Ed Duplex Mode IP Settings Configuration DHCP HJ Host Name NPI937F3D Economode amp Toner Density Ww Resolution a Trays Configuration IP Address 10 10 48 119 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 a Lock Resources Default Gateway 10 10 48 1 amp Stored Jobs Additional Network Settings Click Additional Network Settings to get to the printer s embedded web server Network Settings page There you can configure AppleTalk IPX SNMP and other network settings Additional Network Settings CS E mail Alerts Network Settings C Bonjour J Settings ta Additional Settings EAN NS mit r apply Now Figure 6 48 Network Settings screen Choose Additional Network Settings to open the TCP IP Settings page of the HP Embedded Web Server Networking screen ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 317 1937F3
379. s ENWW Short side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar Long side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book Booklet Printing The Booklet Printing drop down menu is visible when Print on Both Sides is selected and a supported media size is selected in the Size is drop down menu on the Paper tab The Booklet Printing drop down menu offers choices that are based on the current media size The default setting is Off The other settings have the following format where paper size depends on the media size that is set on the Paper tab e paper size Left Binding e paper size Right Binding Selecting paper size Left Binding or paper size Right Binding changes the document preview image to show the location of the binding Changing the Pages per Sheet setting manually to 4 6 9 or 16 pages per sheet disables the booklet setting Booklet printing is disabled when unsupported media sizes such as envelopes are selected as the media size and an incompatibility error message appears when you click OK to close the driver The Booklet Printing drop down menu appears only when the following conditions exist e Printon Both Sides on the Finishing tab is selected e of Normal Size on the Effects tab is 100 e Pages per Sheet on the Finishing tab is 1 e Size is on the Paper tab is set to Letter Legal or A4 If any o
380. s from the time the device recognizes the beginning of an RFU update until the time the device has verified the validity and integrity of the RFU update EX NOTE If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded while RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control panel display the firmware file must be sent again No message appears on the device control panel to indicate that the update was interrupted PERFORMING UPGRADE This message appears while the device is actually reprogramming the firmware ES NOTE If power is lost during the flash DIMM update while PERFORMING UPGRADE appears on the control panel display the update is interrupted and the message RESEND UPGRADE appears on the control panel display INITIALIZING This message appears from the time the device has finished reprogramming the DIMM until the device reinitializes RESEND UPGRADE This message appears in English only if the firmware update fails because the RFU process is interrupted It can also occur if firmware for accessories Such as the duplex unit or an output device becomes is corrupted Perform another update 352 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Table 7 9 Update messages continued Printer message Explanation by any means that is supported by the printer regardless of the connection network parallel or USB RFU LOAD ERROR This message appears in English only if the firmware
381. s theMenu button to open the menus il Press A the up arrow or V the down arrow to scroll to INFORMATION and then press w select iii Press A up or V down to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION iv Press select to print the configuration pages c On the first configuration page under IPv4 find the IP Address Type this address into the Printer Address field on the add printer screen d Select the Printer Model and select HP LaserJet P3005 in the Model Name list If the HP LaserJet P3005 Series PPD does not appear in the Model Name list turn the computer off and then on again and restart the setup process 6 Click Add The HP LaserJet P3005 appears in the Printer List 7 To configure installable options such as a duplexing unit or optional paper tray click Show Info on the device list and choose Installable Options in the pull down menu 8 Inthe Collation in Printer drop down menu select one of the following options depending on the device configuration e Yes Total RAM gt 96 MB or Hard Disk e No Total RAM lt 96 MB and No Hard Disk 9 Ifthe device has the optional 500 sheet tray 3 select the appropriate tray 10 Ifthe device has a duplex unit a standard feature on the HP LaserJet P3005dn and HP LaserJet P3005x models select the Duplex Unit check box 11 Click Apply Changes and then close the Printer List dialog Set up a printer with Mac OS X V10 2 8 1 If you are installing the device using
382. sarily correspond to geographic countries regions English for instance is distributed on three CDs Table 1 5 CD 1 Americas Component AR DE EN ES FR EL IT NL PT HP Traditional Postscript 3 x x X X X x x x x Emulation Driver HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x x x x x x x x TE Printing system software 11 o Q fe o 7 Lo c o O Q a Table 1 5 CD 1 Americas continued Component AR DE EN ES HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x x x HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x x x HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x x x Common MS Windows x x x x Installer Add Printer Wizard Installer x x x x Installer Customization x x x x Wizard CD Browser x x x x HP Easy Printer Care x x x Printer Usage Report x x x HP Driver Preconfiguration x x x x Fonts x x x HP Web Registration x HP LaserJet P3005 User x x x x Guide CHM file HP LaserJet P3005 User x x x x Guide PDF file Hewlett Packard x x x x LaserJet P3005 Series Printing System Install Notes HP Embedded Web Server x x x User Guide HP Jetdirect Administrator s x x x Guide 250 Sheet Install Guide x x x x Table 1 6 CD 2 Asia Pacific Component ZHCN ZHTW HP Traditional Postscript 3 Emulation Driver x x HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver x x HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver x x HP PCL 6 Unidriver x x HP PCL 5 Unidriver x x PS Emulation Unidriver x x Common MS Windows Installer x x
383. select your Country Welcome back Please or Region sign in Country Region User ID UNITED STATES Password Forgot your User ID Forgot your password Figure 6 40 HP Registration Web page Duplex mode If a duplex unit is installed the Configuration Settings menu includes a Duplex Mode setting Click this setting to open the Duplex Mode screen as shown in the following figure 310 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW HP Printer Utility SS v Information And Support f Duplex Mode Using the Duplex Printing mode allows printing on both sides of each page 1 a SATUS UD Enable Duplex Mode Device Information E File Upload e Update Firmware A Upload Fonts HP Support y Printer Settings B Duplex Mode Economode amp aner Densit Printer Status Idle Supplies Genuine HP Figure 6 41 Duplex Mode screen 1 Choose Duplex Mode to open the Duplex Mode screen 2 Select the Enable Duplex Mode check box This box is clear by default 3 Click Apply Now to enable printing on both sides of the page Economode ENWW Under Printer Settings choose the Economode and Toner Density menu item to open the Economode screen as shown in the following figure e m HP Printer Utility SS Economode HP Support 1 Turn Economode on Economode helps save printer resources y Printer Settings g Duplex Mode Toner Density Economode amp 1 P Toner Density 3 m
384. serJet P3005 Setup EJ Specify Printer h E Specify the network printer to install if invent Specify by Hardware Address MAC C IP Address C IP Hostname m Description Searches for a printer with the specified hardware address For example 0010831234BC or 01234567885BCDEF NOTE Only the local network segment will be searched lt Back Cancel Figure 3 15 Specify Printer dialog box Specify a printer by clicking one of the following options and typing in the required information e Hardware Address MAC e IP Address e IP Hostname Click Next to open the Searching dialog box When the search is finished the Printer Found dialog box opens see Figure 3 10 Printers Found dialog box on page 67 Click Enter settings for a printer not on the network in the Check Printer Connection dialog box and then clicked Next to open the Printer Settings dialog box as shown in the following figure 72 Chapter 3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW HP Laser Jet P3005 Setup EJ e Printer Settings h Specify settings for the network printer if Specify by Hardware Address MAC C IP Address Description Searches for a printer with the specified hardware address For example 0010831234BC or 01234567885BCDEF NOTE Only the local network segment will be searched lt Back Cancel Figure 3 16 Printer Settings dialog box To install the device by using the hardware address cli
385. settings 207 unidrivers 256 Update Now 30 version numbers 26 Watermarks settings 232 PDEs Printer Dialog Extensions 276 PDF files command line printing 361 installing Adobe Acrobat Reader 22 LPR commands printing 364 Macintosh File Upload command 305 printing using HP Embedded Web Server 38 viewing 16 PDF files printing 328 Percentage of Normal Size setting PCL traditional drivers 133 unidrivers 232 PINs private jobs PCL traditional drivers 157 unidrivers 250 251 Point and Print installation Windows printing system software 105 Port Creation Options dialog box Customization Wizard 93 port selection dialog box Windows Customization Wizard 90 portrait orientation settings PCL traditional drivers 122 161 PS Emulation Driver 177 unidrivers 242 245 ports included 5 PostScript Device settings PS Emulation Unidriver 261 postscript documents printing 38 PostScript Options unidrivers 208 PostScript Passthrough 266 Postscript printer description PPD files 276 PostScript tab Advanced button 196 bitmap compression 197 Ctrl D settings 198 data format 198 error information 196 header 196 language level 197 output format 195 PS Emulation Driver 194 timeout value 196 power setting wake time 338 PPD postscript printer description files 276 pre existing installation modifying 58 preconfiguration driver 31 preview image document PCL traditional drivers 125 133 151 162 unidrivers 245 ENWW
386. sheet bin Prepunched 60 Y Y Y Y Y 120 g m or 16 32 Ib Postcard 135 176 g Y N N N Y m or 36 47 Ib Labels 0 10 0 14 mm Y Y Y N N thick or 4 7 to 5 mils thick Bond 60 120 g m or Y Y Y Y Y 16 32 Ib Recycled 60 120 g Y Y Y Y Y m or 16 32 Ib Color 60 120 g m or Y Y Y Y Y 16 32 Ib Light 60 75 g m or Y N N N Y 16 20 Ib Cardstock 135 176 g Y Y N N Y m or 36 47 Ib Rough Y N N N N Tough Paper Glossy Y N N N N Film 0 10 0 14 mm thick or 4 7 to 5 mils thick Envelope 75 90 g m Y N N N N or 20 24 Ib Vellum 60 120 g m Y N N N N or 16 32 Ib Custom 60 199 g m Y Y Y Y Y or 16 53 Ib 1 Use only HP LaserJet glossy media Using HP Inkjet glossy media can cause permanent damage to the printer Custom paper sizes 348 The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Table 7 5 PCL 6 custom media sizes Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum Tray 1 100 sheet Width 76 mm 3 0 inches 312 mm 12 28 inches multipurpose Height 127 mm 5 0 inches 470 mm 18 5 inches Tray 2 500 sheet Width 148 0 mm 5 83 inches 297 mm 11 7 inches Height 210 mm 8 26 inches 432 mm 17 inches Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Table 7 5 PCL 6 custom media sizes continued Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum Tray 3 500 sheet optional Width 148 0 mm 5 83 inches 297 mm 11 7 inches Height 210 mm 8 26 inches 432 mm 17 inche
387. software can detect the device ET NOTE For wireless installation instructions using an HP Jetdirect ew2400 802 119 Wireless Print Server or an HP Direct 380x802 11B wireless print server consult the documentation that comes with the print server Click Next to continue Print driver installation instructions 63 E 0 V z e xe 9 If the network has a firewall that is blocking the installation the Firewall Detected dialog box appears as shown in the following figure HP LaserJet P3005 Setup ES Firewall Detected C j Important notice about installation and firewalls Setup has determined that the Internet Connection Firewall on this computer is enabled For installation to continue Setup will need to open a port through the firewall to communicate with the printer This port will also be used for printing Click Next to allow Setup to open the port and to continue with the installation If you do not want Setup to open a port see Help for more information on temporarily disabling your firewall Otherwise click Cancel to exit the installation Whenever the software firewall is disabled HP strongly recommends that the following be installed hardware device that provides firewall protection between the Internet and your computer such as a gateway n up to date virus detection program on your computer Help lt Back Cancel Figure 3 7 Firewall Detected dialog box
388. sssssese 263 ENWW Job TIMEOUT arisini edt eee ER eese ddlaantaseeia Neun de es Md 263 Wait De M 263 Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline seeeee 263 Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline sssssesss 263 Installable Options 5 etr rt tnr perhibere ne ei eee e kir ida 264 Automatic Configuration oooonnononcconcnncconccnncccnnnnn cnn cnc nnnnr non eene 264 I ii ia 264 Duplex Unit for 2 Sided Printing ooonnnininnnnnnninonncccooconnnnnccnnnanarrnnnnrrnnnnnnn 264 Allow Manual Duplexing ooocoocccccccnonnnononcconcnoncnnncn oin 265 Printer Memory risa Er p Ld ERR M ed Eau dev End 265 Printer Hard Disk insinuis ninrin iiaiai nennen terne 265 Job Storage ssiriantadic idad ddr 265 Mopier Mode ociosos 265 Mopier mode and collation sesesssssss Ree 266 Postscript Passthrough PS Emulation Unidriver only 266 JPEG Passthrough PS Emulation Unidriver only sess 267 About tab feature badina 268 6 Macintosh INTOUCION coria ED 271 Macintosh printing system software cece terete ttt e ee erent NANANA ARNAN nnne nennen rr RAKNA 272 Hardware requirements cccceececeeecaeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesececsaacaaaaaacaaesaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteess 272
389. stom Installation dialog box sequence ENWW ET NOTE The dialog boxes shown in this STR appear in the Windows XP Professional installation sequence The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating systems The Full Installation includes the following components e HP LaserJet P3005 PCL 6 Driver e Screen Fonts e Install Notes e User Guide When you select the Install Printer option from the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD the Language Selection dialog box appears Print driver installation instructions 59 E 0 V z e po o HP LaserJet P3005 Setup Language Selection D Select the language for the installation invent Location United States Note It is very important that Location is set to the country in which the device is actually in use This may be different than the Regional Setting in your computer Language English Y cma Figure 3 3 Language Selection dialog box Select a location from the Location drop down menu ET NOTE The Language Selection dialog box lists only the languages that are available on the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD The installer automatically detects the language that the computer system uses and presents this selection as the default Select any other language that is available on the CD by clicking the down arrow in the drop down menu Click OK to initiate the printing system setup Th
390. stom media size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter The custom media size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole millimeter Any non numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1 10 of an inch depending on the current measurement units Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by the increment amount within the allowed range of values The computer determines the rate at which the values change Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters depending on the measurement units the driver is currently using To change measurement units click the dynamic measurement units button either Use Inches or Use Metric Custom width and height control limits 144 The minimum media size for the HP LaserJet P3005 is 76 2 x 127 mm 3 x 5 inches and the maximum is 312x470 mm 12 28 x 18 5 inches The following table summarizes media size limits for each media handling device Table 4 5 PCL 6 custom media sizes Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum Tray 1 100 sheet Width 76 mm 3 0 inches 312 mm 12 28 inches multipurpose Height 127 mm 5 0 inches 470 mm 18 5 inches Tray 2 500 sheet Width 148 0 mm 5 83 inches 297 mm 11 7 inches Height 210 mm 8 26 inches 432 mm 17 inches Tray 3 500 sheet o
391. support Availability System requirements The following operating systems support the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software Windows e Linux Windows Linux UNIXO Pentium or compatible processor Windows 98 SE Windows Millennium Edition Me or Windows 2000 333 MHz processor with 64 MB RAM Windows XP 333 MHz processor with 128 MB RAM Windows Server 2003 550 MHz processor with 128 MB RAM Standard Edition and 220 MB of available hard disk space Minimum 16 color grayscale display with 640 x 480 pixel resolution video graphics array VGA Onboard parallel port USB port or network connection CD ROM drive or internet connection For information about Linux support for the device see the following HP Linux Web site UNIXO www hp com go linuxprinting For information about UNIX support for the device see the following Web sites www hp com go jetdirectunix software www hp com go unixmodelscripts Operating system support MS Windows operating systems provide full featured support for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Operating systems that are not described in this STR provide varying levels of functionality 6 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW Throughout this STR Windows XP is used to denote Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 unless noted otherwise Information relating to networking functions is specific to devices that have network capabilities
392. support HP Driver Preconfiguration sssss 33 Table 3 1 Default fonts eoe Rad Rd EIA nacadedessaameinuannd RAE n ERR RR Acad 50 Table 3 2 Additional PS emulation fonts ooonconnnicnicoconcooncnnnnnnnonncnnnnnnnn conan nn nnnnnnnn rn nn nn nn rr rra nm cnn rn nnns 52 Table 4 1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer ssuusuuuuusss 116 Table 4 2 Page orientation erect t ee A d Io Y a Redde EVERY eds 122 Table 4 3 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks sss 138 Table 4 4 Name drop down menu text strings ssssssseeeee nemen eee eren nennen nennen 143 Table 4 5 PCL 6 custom media sizes coooccocccoccnnononnoncnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnn non nnnncnnnnnn nn cnn nan nennen metr enn enne nennt EEEE 144 Table 4 6 Close dialog box text strings 0 2 0 cece tree ene eee eee nc cnn eene nennen nennen nnn 145 Table 4 7 Printer model configuration settings oononnicccnnnnnncccccnnnconccccnnnnonccncnon nn nc cnn naar nn cc nccn nan enne 166 Table 4 8 Driver Mopier mode and collation settings sse 168 Table 5 1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer ssuuuuuuus 213 Table 5 2 PCL 6 custom media sizes ooocococcccccnnnnnonconconcnnnnnncnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nan nn nan nerrer enn s nnne nennen nennen 219 Table 5 3 Font Attribute settings for new and prese
393. sure the product i5 Ready at 7 45 Set the Wake Time tor 730 then seta Sleep Delay of 30 minutes or longer so popie have time to use the product belore it re enters Sleep Mode Use Sleep Times Lunch Time Sleep and Holiday Sleep lor additional energy savings Wales Tae AA Select one or more days below then sat the Wake Time reach day satha Week Day Wake Time Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday pooo Saturday The product will enter Sleep Mode to save energy il not in use for the periodol time set below SLEEP DELAY SUMNUTES m Note Once a Sicep Delay Is applied Sleep Mode will be automatically enabled If may take a while for the product to return to Ready once itis in Sleep Mode Cancel Figure 6 72 HP EWS Wake Time screen Networking tab The HP EWS Networking tab is shown in the following figure 338 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW ET NOTE Notall of the screens on the tab are shown in this document For more information see the HP Jetdirect Administrator s Guide TCP IP Settings Summary Network Identification TCPAP v4 TCPAP 6 Config Precedence Advanced Host Name NPIS37F3D IPW Status Enabled Fully Qualified Domain Name Pv4 NPI937F3D sakson corp Pvt Address Address 101049119 Subnet Mask 5 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 10 48 1 Config By DHCP DHCP Lease Time 259200 Seconds IPv6 Status Enabled Fully Qualified Domain
394. t Document On to format the document for one media size and then print the document on a different media size with or without scaling the page image to fit the new media size The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions e of Normal Size is not 100 e Pages per Sheet on the Finishing tab is not 1 When Print Document On is selected the drop down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print The list contains all of the standard media sizes that the selected media source supports and any custom size that you have created When Print Document On is selected Scale to Fit is automatically selected Clearthis check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to fit on the selected media size Scale to Fit The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target media size By default Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected If the setting is turned off then the document page images will not be scaled and are instead centered at full size on the target media If the document size is larger than the target media size then the document image is clipped If the document size is smaller then it is centered within the target media The following figure shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal size media with the Print Document On option selected and the target size specified as Letter 132 Chapter 4 HP tradition
395. t are installed Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here 148 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW The Type is drop down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports Other Pages Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media source or the same source as First Page for the other pages of the document The Other Pages setting and options are shown in the following figure Paper Options SIZE 85x11 inches Letter v M Use Different Paper Covers Front Cover Y First Page Last Page y D sale Canine Source is automatically Select Type is Unspecified bal Figure 4 16 Other Pages options The following are the Other Pages options e Source is drop down menu e Type is drop down menu The Source is setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed Any optional trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here The Type is drop down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports Last Page Use the Last Page options to select an alternative media type or source for the last page of a document The Last Page setting and options are shown in the following figure 7 Ll co O a S c y O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo ENWW Paper tab features 149 r P
396. t in page margins can cause the text in your document to be cut off when printed More Options Click More Options to open the More Paper Options dialog box shown in the following figure More Paper Options 21x Printing on both sides duplex printing Ja E Flip on long edge C Flip on short edge Cancel Restore Defaults Figure 4 29 More Paper Options dialog box The single control on this dialog box is the Printing on both sides duplex printing group box Ez NOTE Asa rule extra memory is not needed on the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in order to print on both sides However very complex double sided print jobs might require additional memory Use the settings in this group box to specify how you want to turn the page if you print on both sides When you print on two sides of the page the document can be read differently depending on the way itis printed For example you could have the pages of the document turn like a book or like a calendar When you click Flip On Long Edge or Flip On Short Edge the page icon changes to illustrate how the printed document will look 178 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW About Click About to open a dialog box that contains copyright and version information about the print driver The following figure shows the About dialog box PostScript Printer Driver Version 4 01 Jointly developed by Microsoft Corporation and amp
397. t one or more installed cards in the Installed Font Cards list The list to the right Fonts shows all of the fonts that are available on the selected card s e Enable or disable one or more of the selected font s Complete the following steps to configure a font card 1 Make sure that the font card is installed correctly Click Add The Add Font Card dialog box appears Click Browse The Font Card Files dialog box appears 2 3 4 Find and select the appropriate Printer Cartridge Metrics PCM file that came with the font card 5 Click OK 6 Specify a font card name in the Add Font Card dialog box if necessary 170 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW 7 Click OK The selected PCM file appears in the Installed Font Cards list Select the PCM file to see a list of available fonts in the Fonts list 8 Click OK to close the Add Font Card dialog box The fonts on the card should now be available on the system ET NOTE When using font cards with the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver and HP Traditional PCL 5 Driver To install screen fonts that match the font card use the HPB file that is specifically designed to work with that card If no screen fonts exist for the card use the PCM file that is specifically designed to work with that card Alternative Letterhead Mode When selected this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a tray whether you are printing on one or
398. t preview image First Page Only When First Page Only is selected the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document The First Page Only check box is not available when the current watermark selection is none Watermarks are applied to logical pages For example when Pages per Sheet is set to 4 and First Page Only is turned off four watermarks appear on the physical page one on each logical page Edit Click Edit and the Watermark Details dialog box appears The following figure shows the Watermark Details dialog box 134 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Watermark Details 8 5 x 11 inches E Meum E Figure 4 10 Watermark Details dialog box The dialog box shows a document preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and the font attributes The Watermark Details dialog box contains the following controls ET NOTE This section also contains information about default watermark settings e Current Watermarks e Watermark Message e Message Angle 72 Ll co O a S cw O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo e Document preview image e Font Attributes e Default watermark settings Current Watermarks The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks both the predefined watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that have been created
399. t ready files to your product e Print ready file printing by using FTP through a browser e Print ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection e Print ready printing by using a local MS Windows port e Print ready file printing in an MS Windows network e Print ready file printing in UNIX systems e Print ready file printing by using the LPR command Print ready file printing by using FTP through a browser Complete the following steps to print print ready files directly by using FTP through a browser ET NOTE The following instructions can be used on MS Windows or Macintosh operating systems 1 Make note of the TCP IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page The HP Embedded Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout To print a configuration page see Print a configuration page on page 350 2 Open a browser window 3 Inthe address line of the browser type ftp lt IPADDRESS gt For example if the TCP IP address of your product is 192 168 0 90 type the following FTP 192 168 0 90 4 Locate the print ready file for the product 5 Drag and drop the print ready file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window ENWW Printing print ready documents 361 E 1 2 3 NOTE If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name you might have to enable folder viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser In Microsoft Internet Explorer use the following procedure to
400. t the Enable Outgoing E mail check box 3 Type the SMTP server TCP IP address in the SMTP Server text box 4 Type the domain name in the Domain Name text box 5 Click Apply to save the changes Configuring the return e mail address Alerts ENWW When you configure the return e mail address on the E mail Server page you are configuring the identity of the product For example if you type anyone in the Username field and your company com in the Domain Name field all e mails sent out by the product will come from anyonelyour company com In this example anyone your company com is the identity of the product From the Alerts screen IT administrators can set up the product to send problem and status alerts to anyone through e mail messages When this function is configured alerts are automatically triggered about supplies paper path status and other service and advisory information More than one individual can receive alerts with each person receiving only specific alerts For example an administrative assistant might be responsible for ordering print cartridges or fixing jams and could receive advanced HP Embedded Web Server EWS 331 warning when toner is low or a jam occurs Similarly the long life supplies might be handled by an external service provider who could receive alerts about performing product maintenance loading the front or rear stapler and similar needs E NOTE A user can create up to four different
401. t watermarks sss 236 Table 5 4 Page orientation sssini niin a a aa RR RR RR str RR n sh nennen neret nennen nnis 242 Table 5 5 Driver mopier mode and collation settings ssssne nnn enn 266 Table 6 1 Adding a device in Macintosh operating systems 0oococccnnonccccccconanancncccnnnnn cnn arc nnno no enne 278 Table 7 1 HP LaserJet P3005 media sources and destinations ooooononicnnnnnonconconnccnncnnnnnnnnnnnnannnn non nnnnnnnnnn 344 Table 7 2 Media source commands sss eher rem rmn en nsn EESE nene n nennen nennen 344 Table 7 3 Supported media sizes and attributes ooooninninncnnonconncnnnnnccnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn rra eene 345 Table 7 4 Supported input media types ssssssssssssssssssssssee eee trennen nnne nennen nennen 347 Table 7 5 PCL 6 custom media SIZES eese idit eere ehe enn ea dannuenacaduaeedssudeugendeauaacaedeaguaeeceaneadadeaaanedes 348 Table 6 Media type commands cde cte adeo run Pace keen edere ex pte deo E redux Reve ve va vu dex gud 349 Table 7 7 Troubleshooting a firmware update ooooocnoncccnnnnnoccccccnonannccnnnonannnccnnna nan nn cnc cnn nn eene nennen nnne 351 Table 7 8 Troubleshooting a firmware update failure ssssssssssssssssee eene 352 Table 7 9 Update messages tao A e dA ED esuada PE duo Fue 352 ENWW XV xvi ENWW List of figures Figure 1 1 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Fig
402. tONS ascitis ta ri lira 157 User Natme J ee iter terree e ete d ead ad dr eed 157 JOB NAME ETT 157 Using job storage features when printing ssn mm 158 Releasing a job storage print job ssssss nn nn rr rnnnnnnnnnn 158 Deleting a job storage print job ssssssen e 159 Basics tab features rc teet astute t lu done e dudedoceds tutu Dee Pe du doce e dp dne de gr c dic de 160 Print Task Quick Sets eder oH EPOR d t dite ert tI aie 161 Mele RM EE 161 entum p 161 Document preview image cete enne E E ETEA as 162 o REDE 162 Configure tab features ito Hp ip p S Ea tou D taie iE 164 ENWW Printer Model 0 a dae a a ee ote de ede e s 165 Paper Handling Options ssssssssssssseseeemee rennen nennen rn nnne 166 Duplexinig Umit oio ade 167 Allow Manual Duplexing ssrninot eniinn sdai a a emm 167 Mopier Enabled 1 1 cn 8 ete ada 167 Mopier mode and Collation sssssm 167 Optional Paper Sources nsemi iieo aea aeiiae E 168 Other ODptiOns tii td dee aee t ent id a 168 Kor lA A ee a cid beeen i ev E dee ae 169 E E teeta Nt unie hec 169 Alternative Letterhead Mode sssssssssssssseeen enne 171 Ignore Application Collation is anea aa a a aaa a 171 Pinter Memory side eee a AE RR EE TE E 171 Include Types in Application Source List ooooooonnncincninnnnnncincconconncnnnnnccnnncnnnos 171 Automatic configuration 2 ore
403. tab click Apply close the Properties tabs and then re open the Properties tabs The Device Options tab contains the following options e Available printer memory e Printer features e Installable options e Restore Defaults This section also contains information about using job storage features ET NOTE Use the dynamic Change settings for control in the Printer features and the Installable options sections of the Device Options tab to change the setting for the feature or option that you have selected 186 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Available printer memory The Available printer memory control specifies the amount of memory in the device If the value in this control does not match the amount of memory in the printer model use the spin box to specify the correct amount of memory ET NOTE The HP LaserJet P3005 printer can be configured for a maximum of 320 MB Printer features ENWW The Printer features group box shows settings that are specific to the printer You can change the settings by selecting the setting you want to change and then specifying a new value in the Change setting for list The following printer feature settings are available on this tab FastRes 1200 User PIN digit 1 for Private Job PIN digit 2 for Private Job PIN digit 3 for Private Job PIN digit 4 for Private Job HPPJLEncoding EconoMode Job storage Collate Fit t
404. tab 255 timeout settings 263 TrueType font settings 207 version number 26 Watermarks settings 232 PS files command line printing 361 PS files printing 328 Q quality settings See Print Quality settings Quick Sets See Print Task Quick Sets R Ready to Create Installer dialog box 101 Ready to Install dialog box Windows 79 regional versions CD ROMs Macintosh 274 Windows 10 Registration dialog box Windows 85 releasing job storage jobs drivers 315 PCL traditional drivers 158 PS Emulation Driver 189 unidrivers 253 remote configuration 329 remote firmware updates about 350 determining current firmware level 350 downloading 351 FTP Windows 354 HP Web Jetadmin 359 LPR commands 358 Macintosh 306 messages 351 troubleshooting 351 UNIX 358 verifying installation 353 Windows network 357 Windows using local port 355 Resizing Options unidriver settings 231 resolution PCL traditional driver settings 127 129 PS Emulation Driver settings 180 unidriver settings 227 return e mail address 331 RFU See remote firmware updates S SAP printing 8 Scale Patterns WYSIWYG feature 128 129 Scale to Fit setting PCL traditional drivers 132 unidrivers 231 Scaling control PS Emulation Driver 181 screen readable documentation 16 Searching dialog box Windows 65 security settings general 333 Security page HP Embedded Web Server 41 44 Security screen 333 Security section HP Embedded Web Server 46 340 Sen
405. tall instructions 295 ET NOTE If the automatic selection fails or if you want to manually select a PPD file click the Printer Model drop down menu choose HP and then choose the PPD file that you want to add If the HP LaserJet P3005 PPD does not appear in the Model Name list turn the computer off and then on again and restart the setup process If you are using IP Printing carry out the following steps a Print out the device configuration pages To print the configuration pages follow these instructions i Press theMenu button to open the menus ii Press A the up arrow or V the down arrow to scroll to INFORMATION and then press w select iil Press A up or V down to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION iv Press select to print the configuration pages b On the first configuration page under IPv4 find the IP Address Type this address into the Printer s Address field c Choose Printer Model and then choose the HP LaserJet P3005 printer in the Model Name list 6 Click Add The HP LaserJet P3005 appears in the Printer List 7 Select the HP LaserJet P3005 go to the Printers menu and choose Show Info 8 Choose Installable Options from the top drop down menu Printer Info HP LaserJet P3005 937F3D Installable Options Hm Tray 3 Not Installed ey Collation in Printer No Total RAM lt 80 MB and No Hard Disk Printer Hard Disk Not Installed H4 C Duplex Unit
406. talled over a network connection It is not available when the MFP is installed over a USB connection Choose Bonjour Settings to open the Bonjour Settings screen Bonjour is enabled by default 318 Chapter6 Macintosh ENWW HP Printer Utility Ed Duplex Mode Economode amp Toner Density Ww Resolution Ba Trays Configuration Bonjour Settings mM Enable Bonjour Bonjour service name HP Laserjet P3005 937F3D The highest priority service LPD BINPS HJ ln LodeReea rcas Access your device at URL http NPI937F3D local EN Stored Jobs Ew E mail Alerts ta Network Settings Bonjour Settings ta Additional Settings dt Figure 6 50 Bonjour Settings screen To disable Bonjour click to clear the Enable Bonjour check box and then click Apply Now The following options are available in the The highest priority service drop down menu e Port 9100 default e IPP e LPD RAW e LPD TEXT e LPD AUTO e LPD BINPS e LPD Queue5 e LPD Queue6 e LPD Queue7 e LPD Queue8 e LPD Queue9 e LPD Queue10 After you select a new setting click Apply Now to save it Additional Settings ENWW Choose Additional Settings to gain access to the HP EWS Macintosh HP Printer Utility 319 B Trays Configuration feo O HP Printer Utility 7 Es Duplex Mode d Web Server Economode amp The selected printer may be configured using an embedded web server View bo Toner Density p
407. tem Preferences from the Apple menu choose System Preferences then choose Print amp Fax ead Print amp Fax a Printing n Faxing Sharing E In Menu Printer Location Directly attached via usb Kind HP LaserJet P3005 Status Idle v HP Color LaserJet 2700n a vi HP Color LaserJet 2700 Y HP LaserJet M5035 MFP Name HP LaserJet P3005 HP Laserjet P3005 Supplies for this printer ssh f Print Queue 3f Printer Setup b WM 0 MM Selected Printer in Print Dialog f Last Printer Used Default Paper Size in Page Setup US Letter 4 0 d id Click the lock to prevent further changes Figure 6 13 Print amp Fax dialog 3 Ifyou are installing the device using a USB connection verify that the device appears on the device list The Kind column in the device list or the Kind field in the Print amp Fax screen should display HP LaserJet P3005 If this is the case the setup is complete If the device does not appear or if the correct information does not appear in the Kind field see Troubleshooting the printer setup on page 297 If you are installing the device using a network connection continue with the following steps 4 Click Add in the Printer List or the button in the Print amp Fax utility to open the Printer Browser screen 286 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW 5 You can use either Bonjour or IP Printing for the network connection ET NOTE Bonjour is
408. ter Found Setup found the following printer Setup found the following printer Model HP LaserJet P3005 Hardware Address 001438937F3D IP Address 10 10 48 113 Is this the printer you want to install Yes install this printer C No want to install a different printer e ome Figure 3 11 Printer Found dialog box Click No I want to install a different printer and then click Next to open the Check Printer Connection dialog box and make sure the cable is properly connected You have the option of searching again for a network printer or specifying a printer by address see Figure 3 14 Check Printer Connection dialog box on page 71 Click Yes install this printer and then click Next to open the Confirm Network Settings dialog box as shown in the following figure 68 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW HP Laser Jet P3005 Setup E e Confirm Network Settings h Setup recommends the following network settings for the printer if Confirm the settings below then click Next to accept these settings Device Name HP LaserJet P3005 TCP IP Settings IP Address 10 10 48 113 Configuration Method Automatically obtained To change the settings on this printer click Change Settings Change Settings lt Back Next gt Cancel Figure 3 12 Confirm Network Settings dialog box In the Confirm Network Settings dialog box click Next to continue the installation The Installation
409. ter wizard install Common installer Network Yes Yes Direct connection No Yes Bidirectional communication In environments that support bidirectional communication the computer communicates with the device during installation determines the physical configuration and then configures the driver accordingly Bidirectional communication is the capability of the device to respond to data inquiries from the computer and report information back such as what type of print media is available or what accessories are connected to the device Bidirectional communication depends on the network operating system and on the type of connection that exists between the computer and the HP LaserJet P3005 printer If the connection does not have this capability that is if it has no bidirectional mode it can only accept commands from the host and cannot report information back to the host computer 28 Chapter2 Software description ENWW Enterprise AutoConfiguration Enterprise AutoConfiguration EAC uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration functionality for installation of the print driver over a network whether you use the installer on the printing system software CD or the Add Printer wizard to install the driver Driver installation that includes EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the device Configuration occurs without user interaction Ifbidirectional communication software has been insta
410. the TrueType font as an outline font 208 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Select one of the following settings in the PostScript Language Level drop down menu e 3 e 2 e 1 The default setting is 3 It is usually better to select the highest number available because it provides more features In some instances lower numbers might be necessary For example if you are printing a file to disk and that file is to be printed by someone who has a level 1 printer select 1 Select one of the following settings in the Send PostScript Error Handler drop down menu e Yes This is the default setting When an error occurs in the print job an error page is sent to the printer e No Select this setting if you do not want an error page to be printed when an error occurs Select one of the following settings in the Negative Output drop down menu Yes Select this option to print a negative of the image by reversing the values for black and white e No Print the image without reversing the values for black and white This is the default setting Printer Features ENWW The Printer Features setting contains the following controls e REt The REt feature is Enabled by default Resolution Enhancement technology REt refines the print quality of characters by smoothing jagged edges that can occur on angles and curves of a printed image Select Disabled if graphics particularly scanned images are n
411. the CD browser click Printer Documentation 2 Click Embedded Web Server Guide You can also gain access to the file by following these steps 1 Insert the software CD into the CD ROM drive 2 Navigate to the Manuals lt language gt folder 3 Open the file that has the appropriate file name LJP300x_EWS_XXWW PDF ET NOTE The XX in the file name corresponds to the language In French the file name is LJP300x EWS FRWW PDF When the file is open click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location HP Jetdirect Administrator s Guide The HP Jetdirect Administrator s Guide is a network administrator s guide in PDF format that contains information about connecting the device directly to a network To view this guide from the software CD follow these steps 1 In the main screen of the CD browser click Printer Documentation 2 Click HP Jetdirect Guide You can also gain access to the file by following these steps 1 Insert the software CD into the CD ROM drive 2 Navigate to the Manuals lt language gt folder 3 Open the file that has the appropriate file name HPJDIAG_XXWW PDF ET NOTE The XX in the file name corresponds to the language In French the file name is gt HPJDIAG_FRWW PDF When the file is open click File and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location 18 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW 2 Software description Introduction Th
412. the bidirectional query occurs If bidirectional communication is enabled then the information an updated list of media types is returned If bidirectional communication is not enabled then the driver looks for custom media types that have been saved from a previous bidirectional communication query and uses those Otherwise no custom media types are available through the driver The following standard types appear in the list Unspecified Plain Preprinted Letterhead Transparency Prepunched Labels Bond Recycled Color Light 60 75 g m2 16 20 Ib Heavy 91 164 g m2 25 43 Ib Cardstock 164 200 g m2 45 53 Ib Rough Vellum Envelope 220 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW The default setting is Unspecified and the program selects the media type Before selecting a different setting make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray that s specified in the Source is setting If the pane print driver setting is changed to a media type that is not currently loaded in the device a control message appears that prompts you to load the media type or select another tray Use Different Paper Covers Print books that include different media types by using the Use Different Paper Covers options When the Use Different Paper Covers check box is selected the following settings can appear in the group box along with the associated options ES Front Cover
413. tinued Paper sizes Width Height PCL 6 8 5x 13 216 mm 330 mm 8 5x13 8 5 inches 13 inches 12x 18 305 mm 457 mm 42x18 12 0 inches 18 0 inches A3 297 mm 419 mm A3 11 7 inches 16 5 inches A4 211 mm 297 mm A4 8 3 inches 11 69 inches A5 147 mm 211 mm A5 5 8 inches 8 3 inches A6 105 mm 148 mm A6 4 14 inches 5 83 inches B4 JIS 257 mm 363 mm JIS B4 10 1 inches 14 3 inches B5 JIS 183 mm 257 mm JIS B5 7 2 inches 10 1 inches B6 128 mm 182 mm B6 5 1 inches 7 2 inches RA3 305 mm 430 mm RAS 12 0 inches 16 93 inches S Postcard JIS 100 mm 148 mm 3 94 inches 5 83 inches D Postscard JIS 100 mm 200 mm JPOSTD 3 94 inches 7 87 inches D Postscard JIS 148 mm 5 83 inches 200 mm 7 87 inches Double Postcard JIS Envelope 10 105 mm 241 mm COM10 4 13 inches 9 5 inches Envelope B5 176 mm 250 mm B5 ENV 6 93 inches 9 84 inches Envelope C5 162 mm 229 mm C5 6 38 inches 9 02 inches Envelope DL 110 mm 220 mm DL 4 33 inches 8 66 inches 346 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Table 7 3 Supported media sizes and attributes continued Paper sizes Width Height PCL 6 Envelope Monarch 99 mm 190 mm MONARCH 3 88 inches 7 5 inches Executive 185 mm 267 mm EXEC 7 3 inches 10 5 inches Executive JIS 216 mm 330 mm JISEXEC 8 5 inc
414. tion 354 Remote firmware update through a local MS Windows port ooocciccnccocinococoncconcnnncnnninnnns 355 Windows 98 SE or Windows Me ssssss eme 355 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 356 Remote firmware update through a USB port oooccccccncconocococonononcnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnncnnnnnnnns 357 Remote firmware update through an MS Windows network sseseeeeee 357 Remote firmware update for UNIX systems ssssssss eee 358 Remote firmware update by using the LPR command sse 358 Remote firmware update through HP Web Jetadmin sese 359 Printing print ready documents ssssssseee eene nn narran nn nr en nennen nennen nnns 361 Print ready file printing by using FTP through a browser eee 361 Print ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection 362 Print ready printing by using a local MS Windows port sseeeeem 363 Windows 98 SE or Windows Me ssssssem emm eem 363 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 364 Print ready file printing in an MS Windows network esss 364 Print ready file printing in UNIX systems snnm 364 Print ready file printing by using the LPR command sse 364 lp c
415. tion or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries UNIXO is a registered trademark of The Open Group Table of contents 1 Purpose and scope INTO UCI EE 1 Device features ep 3 PHrintinG SVSlOMSOMWale Caos ei di 6 System fequiremiebts secesie aN REANA 6 Ehe RM TR 6 LINUX a aena a a a a A caveat EELE A TOTEEN 6 Bp 6 Operating system support oooooccccccccccccnnccnncnoncnnnnnnncnnnnnn non nennen nmn n nnns n nsn nens EENE E 6 Print cc 7 Print driver support in other operating systems sssssssssssss 7 ncrj 8 Printing system software on the Web sssssssss emm 9 In box printing system software CDS ssesee eeeea 9 Windows partition ooooooonnnnnnnnnnnncccccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 10 CD VErSIONS Ce LE 10 HP LaserJet documentation ooooccccococcconcoocccnononcnnccnnnnnnnnnnnn ono ttt nn cnn nnnnnnnnn nn n nennen me rrtrren sensn n nnne 15 HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide ssssssssssssseee eene 16 Hewlett Packard LaserJet P3005 Series Printing System Install Notes 17 HP Embedded Web Server User Guide ssssssssssssssssseeeeeeee eene 17 HP Jetdirect Administrator s Guide ooooocicocccccoconconcccnnnnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnno nn nono nnnnnnnnnnrnn nn nannannn nes 18 2 Software description INTO UCI sisi
416. to print postscript error messages after the document has been printed The PS Emulation Driver can detect certain errors that MS Windows cannot If you are having printing problems click this option This information can help you a system administrator or a device support representative determine what caused the problem The error message information is not included in EPS format PostScript timeout values Use the following options to specify the postscript timeout values for the printer Job timeout This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the device before the device stops trying to print the document If you specify 0 seconds the device continues trying to print indefinitely The default setting is 0 seconds Use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32 767 seconds Wait timeout This control specifies how long the device waits to get more postscript information from the computer After the specified time passes the device stops trying to print the document and prints an error message When printing a very complicated document increase this value If you specify 0 seconds the device waits indefinitely The default setting is 300 seconds Use the spin box to change this value up to a maximum of 32 767 seconds Advanced Click Advanced to open the Advanced PostScript Options dialog box which appears in the following figure 196 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS W
417. to the minimum valid entry If units are in millimeters the custom media size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter The custom media size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole millimeter Any non numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1 10 of an inch depending on the current measurement units To change measurement units click one of the options in the Units group box either Inches or Millimeters Custom width and height control limits The minimum media size for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer is 76 2 x 127 mm 3 x 5 inches and the maximum is 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 inches The following table summarizes media size limits for each media handling device Table 5 2 PCL 6 custom media sizes Tray Dimensions Minimum Maximum Tray 1 100 sheet Width 76 mm 3 0 inches 312 mm 12 28 inches multipurpose Height 127 mm 5 0 inches 470 mm 18 5 inches Tray 2 500 sheet Width 148 0 mm 5 83 inches 297 mm 11 7 inches Height 210 mm 8 26 inches 432 mm 17 inches Tray 3 500 sheet optional Width 148 0 mm 5 83 inches 297 mm 11 7 inches Height 210 mm 8 26 inches 432 mm 17 inches Duplexing unit Width 148 0 mm 5 83 inches 297 mm 11 7 inches Height 210 0 mm 8 26 inches 432 mm 17 inches Source is ENWW The Sourc
418. tomatically Select make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray Type is The Type is drop down menu shows all ofthe media types that the HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports When you use the default setting Unspecified the device uses the default media type which is usually Plain The following standard types appear in the list e Unspecified e Plain e Preprinted e Letterhead e Transparency e Prepunched e Labels e Bond e Recycled e Color e Cardstock 164 200 g m2 45 53 Ib e Rough e Vellum e Envelope e Light 60 75 g m2 16 20 Ib e Tough Paper Glossy Film The default setting is Unspecified and the program selects the media type Before selecting a different setting make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray is specified in the Source is setting 146 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW If the print driver setting is changed to a media type that is not currently loaded in the device a control panel message appears that prompts you to load the media type or select another tray Use Different Paper Covers Print books that are comprised of different media types using the Use Different Paper Covers options When the Use Different Paper Covers check box is selected the following settings can appear in the group box along with associated options e Front Cover e First Page e Other Pages e Last Page e Back Cover ET NOTE When you change th
419. ts and materials e Energy Star amp compliant e Restrictions of Hazardous Substances RoHS Directive compliant Fonts e Internal fonts are available for both printer command language PCL and postscript emulation e Printer matching screen fonts in TrueType format are available on the printing system software CD e HP Web Jetadmin supported forms and fonts are on the disk Paper handling e Prints on media sizes from 211 millimeters mm x 297 mm 8 3 inches x 11 7 inches up to 216 mm x 356 mm 8 5 inches x 14 inches Legal size e Tray can process heavy weight media from 60 g m to 199 g m 16 Ib to 53 Ib as well as standard 80 Ib cover stock e Tray 2 and the optional trays can process media up to 120 g m 32 Ib in weight e Prints on a wide range of media types including transparencies glossy papers heavy stock labels and envelopes e Features adjustable gloss level on page by choosing the appropriate glossy media type e Standard 100 sheet multipurpose paper tray tray 1 supports Letter Legal Executive 8 5 x 13 B5 JIS Executive JIS A4 A5 16K Statement Postcard JIS Envelope and custom media e X Standard 500 sheet paper feeder tray 2 supports Letter Legal Executive 8 5 x 13 B5 JIS Executive JIS A4 A5 and custom media e Optional 500 sheet paper feeder tray 3 standard in the HP LaserJet P3005x printer model supports Letter Legal Executive 8 5 x 13 B5 JIS Executi
420. ts two pages on each sheet of paper dividing the sheet in half The Layout group box values are ignored if you print an EPS file 176 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW The following options are available in the Layout group box e 1up e 2up e 4up Orientation The settings in this group box specify how the document is positioned on the page The following options are available e Portrait option button Use this button to print your document in portrait mode When you click this button the page icon shows an example of the portrait orientation e Landscape option button Use this button to print your document in landscape mode When you click this button the page icon shows an example of the landscape orientation e Rotated check box The Rotated check box becomes available when you click the Landscape option Select the Rotate check box to rotate the image on the page To see the current dimensions of the page such as the paper size and the unprintable margins point to the page icon and then press and hold down the mouse button The Orientation group box is replaced by the Page dimensions in inches group box as seen in the following figure Releasing the mouse button restores the Orientation group box Page dimensions in inches Width 8 50 Top 0 18 Left 0 18 Height 11 00 Bottom 0 18 Right 0 18 Figure 4 27 Page dimensions in inches Paper source This setting specifies where t
421. ttern that you want to use for halftone screens If print jobs have a moir pattern when you print graphics such as photographs or detailed images you might want to adjust these settings However the default printer settings should work in most cases Do not change these settings unless you have experience using halftones To return to the default settings after you have made changes click Use printer s settings Special The Special group box contains the following options e Print as a negative image Selecting this option prints a negative of the image by complementing the RGB values or reversing the black and white values Click this option to see the page icon change to reflect this setting e Printas a mirror image Selecting this option prints a mirror image of your document by reversing the horizontal coordinates Click this option to see the page icon change to reflect this setting Scaling Use the Scaling control to specify the size of the image to print You can specify from 25 to 400 of the original size A setting of 400 for example prints an image four times larger than the original When you enlarge a document only the portion of the document that fits on the page prints The default setting is 100 Restore Defaults Click Restore Defaults to reset the values on the Graphics tab to their original values Fonts tab features The Fonts tab controls the fonts for the HP PS Emulation Driver The following figure sho
422. ttings 3 Click Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003 or Printers and Other Hardware Devices Windows XP Home 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Printing Preferences 6 Click the Effects tab Use the Effects tab to create unique media effects such as scaling and watermarks The following figure shows the Effects tab m e uem 0 y os 20 ED ssc ss Qa I ENWW Effects tab features 229 2 HP LJ P3005 PCL6 Printing Preferences f p x Advanced Paper Quality Effects Finishing Job Storage Services Print Task Quick Sets Type new Quick Set name here Resizing Options Actual Size Print Document On Letter jle to Fit X of Normal Size Watermarks none First Page a Figure 5 11 Effects tab The Effects tab contains the following controls e Print Task Quick Sets e Resizing Options e Document preview image e Watermarks Print Task Quick Sets Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that appear on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs Print task quick sets are either preset or user defined printing specifications such as media size and pages per sheet 230 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW Resizing Options The Resizing Options group box contains the following co
423. ttings e User Guide Print Settings Default Print Settings ENWW When you select Default Print Settings nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed the original settings However if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions custom media sizes or the other quick sets have been changed or deleted the original settings for those items are not restored Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically if no other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed or if all of the driver settings match the original settings Otherwise the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the same label that appeared when a user or the computer last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking OK The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets See the HP Driver Preconfiguration on page 31 section for information about preconfigurable driver settings Table 5 1 Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Driver feature Feature setting location Default values for Preconfigurable U S English Print Task Quick Sets Print on Both Sides Finishing tab Document Options group Available notselected Yes box Flip Pages Up Finishing tab Document Options group Unavailable not Yes box selected Booklet Layout Finishing tab Document
424. tton is disabled To edit an existing watermark select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list If changing the Watermark Message for that watermark in effect creates a new watermark Watermark Message The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list except when more than one watermark has the same message For example several different watermarks can contain the message DRAFT each with a different typeface or font size When this occurs the string is appended with a space a pound sign and a number for example Draft 2 When a number is added the number two is used first but if the resulting name is also in the list then the number increases until the name is unique Draft 3 Draft 4 and so on Message Angle Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on the page All settings center the watermark string within the page the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement The following settings are available e Diagonal This is the default setting Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the lower left to upper right corners of the page e Horizontal Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid left and mid right edges of the page e Custom Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page Use the numeric
425. tures e Configure tab features ENWW Introduction 107 o HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 108 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Access to print drivers in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me Depending on which operating system is being installed on the print drivers access to the print drivers and different print driver interfaces is available in several ways e Device control panel e Software program print dialog box e Print driver user interface Device control panel For information about controlling print jobs from the device control panel see the HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide that came with the device or download it from following Web site www hp com go ljp3005 software Software program print dialog box To gain access to the print driver settings from within most software programs follow these steps 1 Click File 2 Click Print 3 Click Properties The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary depending on the operating system These driver settings apply only while that software program is open Print driver user interface To gain access to the print driver user interface in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me follow these steps 1 Click Start 2 Select Settings 3 Click Printers 4 Right click the device name 5 Click Properties to gain access to all print driver tabs 7 Ll co O a S EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo The
426. twork as shown in the following figure 70 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW HP Laser Jet P3005 Setup EJ e Check Printer Connection h Verify that the printer is setup properly if invent Please check the following Make sure the printer is powered on If connecting wirelessly verify that the printer s wireless indicator is on f connecting with a network cable verify that the cable is connected properly and that there is an active network connection The Link light on the network connector at the back of the printer should be on Choose a method to search for the printer Search again for all available printers C Specify a printer by address C Enter settings for a printer not on the network Click Help for more information Help lt Back Cancel Figure 3 14 Check Printer Connection dialog box Select Search again for all available printers and then click Next to open the Searching dialog box see Figure 3 8 Searching dialog box on page 65 E o z e xe o Select Specify Printer by address and then click Next to open the Specify Printer dialog box The Specify Printer dialog box is shown in the following figure Select Enter settings for a printer not on the network and then click Next to open the Printer Settings dialog box see Figure 3 16 Printer Settings dialog box on page 73 ENWW Print driver installation instructions 71 HP La
427. u can install drivers and connect to a networked device in a single process e The Selection dialog box sets the operating system language as the default language Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 only Use the installer to select any of the languages on the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD 22 Chapter2 Software description ENWW The HP LaserJet P3005 printing system software CD also includes the following features e The HP LaserJet Uninstaller Utility e The HP Customization Utility for custom installations All of the MS Windows system components are installed by using the HP LaserJet P3005 printing system installer The installer automatically detects the language of choice and the operating system Select from the following types of installation e Basic Installation e Full Installation e Custom Installation HP LaserJet print drivers HP LaserJet P3005 print drivers provide the printing features and communication between the computer and the device The printing system includes software for end users and network administrators who are working in the following operating systems c fe 5 Q O 7 Y Lo pa 5 E e o e Windows 98 SE Windows Me and Windows Server 2003 e Windows 2000 Windows XP 32 bit and 64 bit and Windows Server 2003 32 bit and 64 bit MS Windows 64 bit drivers for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 are available for the following systems e Itanium
428. ued Driver feature Feature setting location U S English Print Preconfigurable Task Quick Sets for Default values Landscape Basics tab Orientation group box Available not Yes selected Rotate by 180 Basics tab Orientation group box Available not Yes degrees selected Preconfigurable by using one of the HP Preconfiguration tools For more information see HP Driver Preconfiguration on page 31 or go to www hp com go hpdpc sw 2 Not supported in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me User Guide Print Settings The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the HP LaserJet P3005 User Guide When you select User Guide Print Settings all of the settings are restored to the default settings except for the following settings e Print on Both Sides is set to ON e Flip Pages Up is set to ON e Booklet Printing is set to OFF and is unavailable e Pages per Sheet is set to 2 e Page Order is set to Right then Down Document Options The Document Options group box contains the following controls e Correct Order for Rear Bin o Print on Both Sides e Flip Pages Up e Booklet Printing e Pages per Sheet e Print Page Borders e Page Order Correct Order for Rear Bin The HP LaserJet P3005 has a door in the back that can be opened to make the paper go straight out the back of the printer Use this bin or slot to minimize curl and avoid jams with heavier paper such as cardstoc
429. uine HP emm Economode amp aner De ENWW Macintosh HP Printer Utility 301 Click Detailed Supplies Information to open the Supplies Information screen 0080 Suppliesimfomati n 7 Hewlett Packard supplies can be ordered on the internet on line through your printer software or by calling an authorized reseller Refer to your printer User Guide for instructions Order HP Part Q7551A Approximate Pages Remaining 6310 Pages remaining will vary depending on types of documents printed Low Reached NO Serial Number 5317262 First Install Date 20050331 Last Used Date 20060314 Please return your used genuine HP supplies to Hewlett Packard For more information see http www hp com go recycle Figure 6 29 Supplies Information screen Use the scroll button to see information about the print cartridges If you have Internet access and click Shop for Supplies see Figure 6 28 Current Supplies Levels screen on page 301 a screen appears that explains the ordering process and describes the kind of information that can be sent about your device to facilitate the ordering of supplies Transfer printer information to HP SureSupply e O The fastest way to order supplies online is to transmit information about your printer to HP Or if you prefer you can enter this information on your own invent HP SureSupply Simpler J J smarter online supplies Do you want to send printer information to SureSupply
430. um Font Size to Download as Bitmap 600 pixel s Si Installable Options Figure 5 20 PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings tab The Device Settings tab contains the following controls e Formto Tray Assignment e FontSubstitution Table e External Fonts e PS Emulation Unidriver Device Settings e Installable Options Form to Tray Assignment A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the media size in each input tray The HP LaserJet P3005 printer supports more than one source of media Use this feature to assign a form which defines the media size and margins to each media source When a form is matched to a Source select the form to print The device prints from the tray to which that form is assigned Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify in the driver the media size that is loaded into each available input tray The use of forms constrains the choices that are available in the media size list on the Paper Quality tab in the Printing Preferences driver tabs This constraint prevents or reduces the likelihood of tying up the printer with media mount messages that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available 258 Chapter 5 HP PCL 6 PCL 5 and PS emulation unidrivers for MS Windows ENWW The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional accessory trays Generally items that are inst
431. um Italic CHANC___ TTF ITC Zapf Dingbats Regular DINGS TTF Letter Gothic Regular LETR45W TTF Letter Gothic Bold LETR65W TTF Letter Gothic Italic LETR46W TTF Marigold Regular MARIGOLD TTF New Century Schoolbook Bold NCSR75W TTF New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic NCSR76W TTF New Century Schoolbook Italic NCSR56W TTF New Century Schoolbook Roman NCSR55W TTF Palatino Bold PALR65W TTF Palatino Bold Italic PALR66W TTF Palatino Italic PALR46W TTF Palatino Roman PALR45W TTF SymbolPS Regular SYMPS TTF Times Bold TIMR65W TTF Times Bold Italic TIMR66W TTF Times Italic TIMR46W TTF Times Roman TIMR45W TTF Univers Bold UNVR65W TTF Univers Bold Italic UNVR66W TTF Univers Condensed Bold UNVR67W TTF Univers Condensed Bold Italic UNVR68W TTF Univers Condensed Medium UNVR57W TTF Univers Condensed Medium Italic UNVR58W TTF Univers Medium UNVR55W TTF Univers Medium Italic UNVR56W TTF Ninety two additional PS emulation fonts are available on the CD Table 3 2 Additional PS emulation fonts Font name Font style File name Albertus MT Regular PS 12639 TTF Albertus MT Italic PS 12640 TTF 52 Chapter3 Install MS Windows printing system components ENWW Table 3 2 Additional PS emulation fonts continued Font name Font style File name Albertus MT Lt Regular PS_14530 TTF Antique Olive CompactPS Regular PS_11120 TTF Antique Olive Roman Regular PS_11119 TTF
432. units Because media size settings in most software programs override driver settings it is generally best to use the driver to set media size only when printing from software programs that do not include a media size setting such as NotePad or when producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes ET NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media sizes within a single document When you change the print driver setting to a media size that is not currently loaded in the device a control panel message appears that prompts you to load the media size or select another tray e e m 0 y os zo ED ssc ss Qa E ENWW Paper Quality tab features 217 For information about media sizes see the Media attributes on page 344 section of this STR When the Use Different Paper Covers check box is selected and different options are configured the Size is Source is and Type is menus change offering a variety of options Custom Paper Size Name The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click Custom on the Paper Quality tab The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box Custom Paper Size The custom paper size you have just defined will not become available for selection until you have exited and re entered the Printing Preferences Properties Mame Custom Paper Size Units Width Inches 3 00
433. upport smart duplexing The smart duplexing feature increases printing performance by preventing one page print jobs or single sided pages of a duplexed print job from going through the duplexing unit even when the duplexing feature has been selected in the driver All media types support the smart duplexing feature except for media types that cannot be printed on both sides such as labels transparencies and envelopes and the following media types e Prepunched e Preprinted e Letterhead When the media type is set to Unspecified the smart duplexing feature is disabled To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page the printer makes adjustments to its print modes Selecting a media type in effect instructs the printer to use a group of settings such as fuser temperature and print speed to create an image that has the best possible quality for that media This group of settings is known as print mode A different print mode is used with each media type Print mode adjustments for the second side of a duplexed page are automatic Manually print on both sides Select the Print on Both Sides Manually check box to print on the second side of the media because the HP LaserJet P3005 and HP LaserJet P3005n printer models do not have a duplexing unit installed AUse this setting on the other HP LaserJet P3005 printer models for media types that the automatic duplexing unit does not support such as cardstock and
434. ure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 ENWW Installation software CD printer documentation screen ssssssssssssseeH eH 15 Installation software CD browser ssssssesene enne ENNER ARRETE 21 HP EWS Information tab Device Status screen nnnccccnnnnncccccnnnoncnncccnnnono non cnnn nan r cc nn emen 39 HP EWS Information tab Configuration Page screen ssssse emm 40 HP EWS Settings tab Configure Device screen ssssssesssssseeee eene 42 HP EWS Settings tab Alerts screen ssssssssssseeee enne eee nennen nnne nennen 43 HP EWS Settings tab Security screen eeesssissssesensesnna nc 44 HP EWS Networking tab Network Settings screen ssssssssseen emen 45 Are you sure you want to cancel the installation dialog box sse 58 Cancel dial0g DOX es 58 Language Selection dialog DOX etre eb ee tai needa eo e a a EEEE ERA 60 Welcome to the HP LaserJet 5200 Setup Wizard dialog box sse 61 Software License Agreement dialog b
435. ure 6 19 Print amp Fax screen 3 If you are installing the device using a USB connection verify that the device appears on the device list In the Print amp Fax screen click the Set Up Printers button to see the device list The Kind column in the device list same change as before should display HP LaserJet P3005 Series If this is the case the setup is complete If the device does not appear or if the correct information does not appear in the Kind field see Troubleshooting the printer setup on page 297 If you are installing the device using a network connection continue with the following steps ENWW Macintosh install and uninstall instructions 291 4 Click Add or the Set Up Printers button in the Print 8 Fax screen and then Add to open the add printer screen Rendezvous ES HP Color LaserJet XXXXn XXXXXX HP Color LaserJet XXXXn XXXXXX HP Color LaserJet XXXXn XXXXXX HP LaserJet XXXX HP LaserJet XXXX XXXXXX Location Local Domain Printer Model HP HJ HP LaserJet XXXX HP LaserJet XXXX 9 a Figure 6 20 Add printer screen 5 Select the network connection protocol in the top pull down menu The two supported protocols are Rendezvous and IP Printing Ez NOTE Rendezvous is the easiest method and is the best method to use if the device is E installed on your local network IP Printing must be used if you are installing the device on a different network If you are using
436. ure tab For the HP LaserJet P3005 printer the following settings are available in the Optional Paper Sources drop down menu e None This is the default setting for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer e HP 500 Sheet Input Tray Other Options The Other Options group box contains a single More command button Click More to open the More Configuration Options dialog box 168 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW More Configuration Options 1x r Storage Printer Hard Disk Iv licati llati I dct Stoga Enabled Ignore Application Collation Fonts Printer Memory Total Memory 320 MB Configure DwS 150 0022 MB v Include Types in Application IV Allow Scaling from Large Paper Source List Altemative letterhead mode Cancel Help Figure 4 23 More Configuration Options dialog box The More Configuration Options dialog box contains the following controls e Storage e Fonts e X Alternative Letterhead Mode e Ignore Application Collation e Printer Memory e Include Types in Application Source List Storage The Storage group box contains the Printer Hard Disk and Job Storage Enabled check boxes 7 La co TO o c EN O me oe Sw 0 o lt gt Lo ET NOTE A printer hard disk is optional for the HP LaserJet P3005 printer Do not select the Printer Hard Disk setting unless a hard disk is installed
437. user name and job name as one that is already stored on the device memory will overwrite the existing document Private Job To use the Private Job option the job storage feature must be enabled When you select Private Job the print job is sent to the device but is not printed until you request the job at the device control panel Selecting Private Job activates the PIN group box The print job can be printed only after you type the correct PIN at the control panel After the job is printed the job is immediately deleted from the device This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing The Private Job PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters 0 though 9 If you type non numeric characters they are removed immediately If you type more than four characters the characters past the fourth are truncated The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string but when the edit field loses focus the zeroes pad the left end until the PIN contains exactly four digits The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for Private Job After it is released for printing the private job is immediately deleted from the device If more copies are needed you must reprint the job from the software program If you send a second private job that has the same user name and job name as an existing private job and you have not re
438. ustom Use this option to type a custom name for the stored print job When you click the Custom option the text field below the option becomes available The User Name field can contain no more than 16 characters Job Name ENWW Use the Job Name options to specify a name to identify the job at the device control panel The following are the Job Name settings e Automatic This option which is the default selection automatically generates the job name that is associated with the stored print job The file name of the print job is used if it is available to the print driver Otherwise the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name The file name of the print job is used if itis available to the print driver Otherwise the software program name or a time stamp is used for the job name e Custom Use this to type a custom job name for the stored print job When you click the Custom the text field below the option becomes available In those languages for which Automatic cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters the driver uses a string of three dashes The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the device control panel display The Job Name field can contain no more than 16 characters and is limited to A through Z uppercase or lowercase and 0 through 9 so that the name can appear on the device cont
439. ustomization Wizard 86 device location 327 Device Options tab PS Emulation Driver 185 Device Services unidrivers 256 Device Settings tab unidrivers 257 Device Status page HP Embedded Web Server 39 Device Status page HP EWS 322 diagnostics 35 255 Diagnostics section HP Embedded Web Server 46 340 dialog boxes printing system software installation Windows 59 Windows Customization Wizard 86 dialogs printing system software installation MacOSX 278 DIMMs fonts PCL traditional driver settings 169 unidriver settings 260 direct printing FTP Windows 362 local port Windows 363 LPR 364 344 ENWW networks Windows 364 UNIX 364 direct connect installation 59 directory structure software CD ROM Macintosh 273 Windows 10 disabling driver features 33 disk space requirements Macintosh 272 Windows 6 Document Options PCL traditional drivers unidrivers 208 239 document preview image PCL traditional drivers 133 151 162 unidrivers 227 232 245 documentation HP Embedded Web Server User Guide 17 HP Jetdirect Administrator s Guide 18 install notes 17 Print Task Quick Set for use guide HP Traditional PCL traditional drivers 118 Print Task Quick Set for use guide unidriver 215 User Guide 16 viewing 15 22 double sided printing PCL traditional driver settings 119 PS Emulation Driver 178 unidriver settings 239 downloading firmware 351 printing system software 9 Driver Details dialog box Customization Wizard
440. ut you lose the changes that were not saved The current media size remains the same as it was when you clicked the Custom button user typed text Save The dialog box closes but you lose the changes that were not saved The current media size remains the same as it was when you clicked the o Custom button E 3 O lt name of saved item gt Delete The dialog box closes and the current a c media size is set to the size that last appeared in the drop down menu N fe lt user typed text gt Rename The dialog box closes but you lose the changes that were not saved 5 o The current media size remains the pem o same as it was when you clicked the Loy Custom button Lo Source is The Source is setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed Any optional source trays that are installed through the Configure tab also appear here ENWW Paper tab features 145 The Source is drop down menu can contain the following options depending on what has been installed on the device e Automatically select e Manual Feed in Tray 1 e Tray 1 100 sheet multipurpose tray e Tray 2 500 sheet tray e Tray 3 optional 500 sheet tray The default setting is Automatically Select When this setting is selected the HP LaserJet P3005 uses the source tray that supports the selected media size If you select a source tray other than Au
441. ute a printer font for a TrueType font the printed document might not match the look of the document on the screen Click Edit the Table to customize which TrueType fonts are downloaded and which printer fonts should be substituted for TrueType fonts Font Substitution Table Click this option to open the Font Substitution Table dialog box which makes available the options for changing the TrueType to PostScript font mapping The following figure shows the Font Substitution Table dialog box 182 Chapter 4 HP traditional print drivers for MS Windows ENWW Font Substitutions Table x For this TrueType font Use printer font iA Send s Outlines Arial Black Send As Outlines Comic Sans MS Send As Outlines Courier New Courier Impact Send As Outlines Lucida Console Send As Outlines xi Printer font for Arial Send s Outlines M Cancel Restore Defaults Figure 4 33 Font Substitution Table Always use built in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts Click this option to use font matching rules to find the best printer font to substitute for TrueType fonts in your document TrueType fonts are not downloaded when the document is printed This can speed up printing but the printed fonts might not exactly match the fonts on the screen Always use TrueType fonts Click this option to download TrueType fonts to the device when your document is printed This ensures that the printed document looks the same as it
442. ve JIS A4 A5 and custom media e X Standard 250 sheet face down output bin e Optional duplex unit for automatic two sided duplex printing on the HP LaserJet P3005d HP LaserJet P3005dn and HP LaserJet P3005x printers e Automatic duplex unit at up to 30 sides 15 sheets per minute for 120 g m 32 Ib paper 4 Chapter 1 Purpose and scope ENWW ENWW Table 1 2 HP LaserJet P3005 printer features continued Accessories e Dual inline memory modules DIMM Flash memory slot for additional memory or additional fonts Additional 500 sheet paper feeder tray 3 Hard disk Connectivity e Enhanced input output ElO card slots for optional connectivity Network connection through an HP Jetdirect embedded print server are standard on all models Universal serial bus USB 2 0 connection HP Jetdirect embedded print server for network connectivity without using an ElO slot Supplies e The supplies status page contains information about toner level page count and estimated pages remaining for genuine HP cartridges High capacity no shake cartridge with automatic toner seal removal feature The device checks for authentic HP print cartridges when a cartridge is installed Internet enabled supply ordering capabilities through the HP Embedded Web Server Device features 5 o Q e o 0 Lo c o Y O Q i 2 a Printing system software Topics System requirements Operating system
443. view and change settings for the following features e Configure Device e E mail Server e Alerts e AutoSend e Security e Edit Other Links e Device Information e Language e Date amp Time e Wake Time Configure Device You can use the Configure Device screen to print device information pages and configure the device remotely ENWW HP Embedded Web Server EWS 329 The menus on this screen are similar to the menus that are available at the device control panel Some of the device control panel menus are not available from the HP EWS See the documentation that came with the device for more information about the different menus that your device supports The Configure Device screen is shown in the following figure HP LaserJet P3005 f 10 10 48 HP LaserJet P3005 Printers Intormation Configure Device You may configure your device by selecting a configuration menu from the navigation tree below Once you have selected a configuration menu you may contigure its settings at the bottom of the page Select A Menu B SHOWME HOW BI INFORMATION El PAPER HANDLING amp CONFIGURE DEVICE El DIAGNOSTICS Figure 6 61 HP EWS Configure Device screen Using the menus on the Configure Device screen The following procedure is provided only as an example Similar procedures can be used to set other menu items Follow these steps to print a configuration page example procedure 1 Click INFORMATIO
444. want to lock WARNING Click Initialize selected mass storage unit only if you want to erase all data that is currently stored on the hard drive You cannot undo this action Stored Jobs Choose Stored Jobs to change the Enable Job Storing setting This setting is selected by default Click to clear the check box to disable the job storing feature 314 Chapter 6 Macintosh ENWW HP Printer Utility v Enable Job Storing HP Support Select a stored job to print or delete it You may print multiple copies by entering the number of copies required y Printer Settings User Name Job Name Ed Duplex Mode Economode amp Toner Density Ww Resolution O Trays Configuration Lock Resources Eh Stored Jobs Enter Secure Job PIN J E mail Alerts e Copies to Print 1 Delete v am ceat dete NIT You can type a PIN for your job in the Enter Secure Job PIN field Select the number of copies in the Copies to Print field Select a stored job and click Print to print the job Select a stored job and click Delete to delete the job Job storage print jobs can also be released or deleted at the device control panel Topics e Releasing a job storage print job e Deleting a job storage print job Releasing a job storage print job After you send a print job that uses the job storage feature you can release the job to print from the device control panel 1
445. ware program print dialog box ooooooonoonccccnnconcconccnccccnnnan ocn enne nnns 109 Print driver User interface eec tte te tedere cit eene ee ette d eee d n eee d edi 109 Help System unie REP Immun 111 What s this Help ern ATL dedere eie ees 111 Gontext sensitive Help coire ot ctt Ft tta ient Lat did ta 111 Incompatible Options messages sssssssssssessseeene emen nnne 111 Bubble FHelp 5 itte da iet qud 112 FINISHING tab features an bebe e rm eerta tese doter 114 Print Task Quick Sets cocaleros 115 Default Print Settings idad 115 User Guide Print Settings 5 inet cedo nada edad 118 Document ODtors ter tee TR E E aes gt ei ese e Te id 118 Correct Order for Rear Bin essem 118 PrintoniBoth Sldes noe dee fete a e ec aite td e as teer feta 119 Automatically print on both sides ssssee 120 Manually printing on both sides s 120 Flip Pages Up x ner eee sine ne oe a ev ee rese ee eee iod Lune 122 Booklet Printing terciaria 123 Book and Booklet Printing en 123 Printa booklet s ott e nti eO 124 Pages par Sheet 4 tote perle RE ur e ea ors 124 Print Rage Borders oc tp t t acia 124 Page Order eeu IRE 125 Document preview image 2 nte eet di 125 Prnt Quality oea iii ierit 126 Best Quality 1 atiende eee ch nene e uc d red did 126 Faster Printing nette tte set eee icto feit reato 126 Pr
446. will facilitate E File Upload online ordering of supplies for your printer by ensuring that the correct supplies are ordered through HP or a reseller of your choice e Update Firmware Shop for Supplies A Upload Fonts The HP Registration page on the HP Web site allows you to register your printer online Y HP Support TTD z Online Registration V Printer Settings m By Duplex Mode 3 Economode amp gt Printer Name NPI937F3D Printer Status Idle m Model Name HP Laserjet P3005 Supplies Genuine HP APRO Figure 6 38 HP Online Support screen If you have Internet access you can connect to HP support pages over the Web from this screen Click the Instant Support link to open the HP Instant Support Web page The hp instant support link connects you to a set of dynamic web pages that will help you solve h o specific problems and determine what additional services are available for your device To deliver this experience detailed information including serial number error conditions and status will be transferred to Hewlett Packard HP will treat this information in the manner sct out in the invent Hewlet kard Online Privacy Stat ni If you do not wish to send information to Hewlett Packard but would like to receive generic product support for your product type please click here Product Support HP SureSupply Simpler smarter online supplies ordering To have th
447. ws XP or Windows Server 2003 The RFU file can be sent directly to the device by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in an MS DOS window 1 At a command prompt type copy b FILENAME lt PORTNAME gt where FILENAME is the name of the RFU file including the path and lt PORTNAME gt is the name of the appropriate printer port such as LPT1 For example type the following C gt copy b c P3005fw rfu lptl EZ NOTE If the file name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example type C gt copy b c MMy Documents NP3005fw rfu 1pt1 Press Enter on the keyboard The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the device This can take several minutes Let the process finish without further interaction with the device or the computer The messages described in the section Printer messages during the firmware update on page 351 appear on the control panel ET NOTE The device automatically turns off and then on again to activate the update this can happen more than once At the end of the update process the READY message appears on the control panel Do not turn off the device or interfere with the update until you see this message Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current update At the command prompt type exit to close the command window 356 Chapter 7
448. ws the Fonts tab ENWW HP Traditional PostScript Level 3 Emulation Driver features 181 7 Ll co O a S EN O me oe Sw 0 o r2 i Lo HP LaserJet P3005 PS Properties IES General Details Sharing Paper Graphics Fonts Device Options PostScript The Font Substitution T able enables you to specify which TrueType fonts should be replaced with built in printer fonts Edit the T able C Always use built in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts If you use built in printer fonts jobs will usually print faster however jobs output from different printers may look different C Always use TrueType fonts If vou use TrueType fonts jobs will usually print slower however jobs output from different printers will look identical Send Fonts As Restore Defaults cora am Figure 4 32 Fonts tab The following options are available e Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table e Always use built in printer fonts instead of TrueType fonts e Always use TrueType fonts Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table Use this option to substitute a postscript printer font for the common TrueType fonts in a document This can speed up printing because the TrueType fonts do not have to be downloaded By default common TrueType fonts are substituted when printing but uncommon ones are downloaded to the device If you substit
449. x 1200 dpi This is the best print quality but printing speed is slower than for documents printed on the FastRes 1200 which uses a resolution of 1200 x 600 dpi The Print Quality drop down menu contains the following controls in the HP PCL 5 Unidriver e 600 dpi e 300 dpi The Print Quality drop down menu contains the following controls in the PS Emulation Unidriver e ProRes 1200 e FastRes 1200 e 600 dpi e 300 dpi Paper Quality tab features 227 e y o i e E ou a5 gt fe o S ET NOTE When a ProRes setting is selected documents are printed using a resolution of 1200 x 1200 dpi This is the best print quality but printing speed is slower than for documents printed on a FastRes setting The FastRes setting emulates 1200 dpi printing but places fewer dots on the page and uses less toner and printing speed is faster than for documents printed on a ProRes setting EconoMode Select the EconoMode check box to reduce the amount of toner on each printed page Selecting this option extends the life of the toner supply and reduces cost per page However it also reduces print quality The printed image is lighter but it is adequate for printing drafts or proofs HP does not recommend the full time use of EconoMode If EconoMode is used full time when the average toner coverage is significantly less than 5 it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mecha
450. xt TXT files 38 Chapter2 Software description ENWW Links to off product solutions Links on the HP EWS screens provide an easy way to locate information or complete tasks e hp instant support This link connects to a set of dynamic Web resources that help you solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for the device Specific status and configuration information about the device is retained and directed to the Solve a Problem Web site This site offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve problems as quickly as possible e Order Supplies This link connects to an HP product supplies screen from which you can order genuine HP supplies for the device e Product Support This link connects to an HP product support screen from which to search for information contact the HP customer care home page or find additional resources for the device Device Status screen Status information such as whether the device is online or the toner is low is available through a Web browser on a computer that is linked directly to the device You can view this information without going to the device to identify the status The following figure shows how this information is presented on the device Web page c fe o O Y o Uo o E tY e o Device Status Ready amp Pause Resume o Cunlinue Toners remaining Black Cartridge 100 O7S51A Media
451. y the administrator or user defined printing specifications such as media size and pages per sheet Status dialog box The unlabeled dialog box on the Job Storage tab contains a status message about the destination of a print job The status information changes depending on the selections that are made on the Job Storage tab Job Storage Mode Off Use the Job Storage Mode options on the HP LaserJet P3005 printer to store documents at the device and then control their printing at the device control panel The HP LaserJet P3005 printer offers the following Job Storage Mode options e Off e Proof and Hold e Private Job These options and the settings that control them are described in the following sections When selected this option turns the job storage feature off it is disabled which means that the print job will not be stored in the device Proof and Hold ENWW To use the Proof and Hold option the job storage feature must be enabled and the device must have a minimum total memory of 80 MB When selected this option stores the print job in memory and prints only the first copy of the job allowing you to check the first copy If the document prints correctly you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the device control panel You can set the number of proof and hold print jobs that can be stored in the device at the control panel After it is released for printing the proof and hold job is immediately de
452. ype copy b FILENAME N COMPUTERNAME N SHARENAME where FILENAME is the name of the print ready file including the path lt COMPUTERNAME gt is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared and lt SHARENAME gt is the product share name For example type the following C gt copy b c P3005FW PDF your_server sharename Ez NOTE Ifthe file name or path includes a space you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks For example type C gt copy b c My Documents P3005FW PDF your_server sharename 2 Press Enter on the keyboard The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the control panel and the job prints The message 1 file s copied appears on the computer screen Print ready file printing in UNIX systems For UNIX systems any command method that delivers the print ready file to the product is acceptable including the following At the command prompt type cp lt home yourmachine FILENAME dev parallel gt where lt home yourmachine FILENAME gt is the location of the print ready file Print ready file printing by using the LPR command ET NOTE This direct printing method is for use in Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 364 Chapter 7 Engineering Details ENWW Complete the following steps to print a print ready file by using the LPR command 1 Make note of the TCP IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page The HP
453. ype is Unspecified v Figure 5 7 First Page options The following are the First Page options e Size is drop down menu e Source is drop down menu e Type is drop down menu The Size is setting specifies the media size to use for the entire print job Changes made to the Size is setting here override any previous Size is settings in other Use Different Paper Covers options The Source is setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document The list of source trays depends on the device accessories that are installed Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here The Type is drop down menu shows all of the media types that the device supports ET NOTE Use the same size of media for the entire print job All Use Different Paper Covers options use the last Size is setting selected in any one of the Use Different Paper Covers options When you change the type and source of the media and covers the settings remain configured until you close the software program Other Pages Use the Other Pages options to select an alternative media type or source for the other pages of the document The following figure shows the appearance of the Paper Options group box when the Use Different Paper Covers is selected pan uem 0 y os 20 ED ssc ss Qa I ENWW Paper Quality tab features 223 Paper Options Size is 8 5 x 11 inches Letter vi h Use Different Pap

HP LaserJet P3005d

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents